Manual ET2001A

Caterpillar
Electronic
Technician
User's Manual
Version 2001A
Caterpillar Inc. Software License Agreement
IMPORTANT: THE MEDIA CONTAINING CATERPILLAR

ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN (THE “PROGRAM”) THAT HAS
BEEN PROVIDED TO YOU WILL ONLY RUN IN A TRAINING
MODE. IF YOU DESIRE TO OBTAIN THE RIGHT TO USE THE
PROGRAM, YOU MUST FIRST BECOME A LICENSED USER
AND AGREE TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
TITLE: Title to this PROGRAM belongs to, and at all times shall
remain the property of, Caterpillar Inc., Peoria, Illinois, USA and/or its
subsidiaries (CATERPILLAR), and is protected by copyright. By
agreeing to this License Agreement, you do not become the owner of
the PROGRAM or acquire any rights therein other than those
specifically granted below. Use of the PROGRAM by anyone not a
Licensed User is strictly prohibited.
CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO LICENSE: The PROGRAM

includes protection mechanisms to prevent use of the PROGRAM
until you become registered as a Licensed User and that prevent the
use of certain functions of the PROGRAM without the appropriate
password. Your rights to use the PROGRAM are subject to your
payment of all fees, your registration as a Licensed User on a
Designated CPU, and our delivery of an appropriate password to you
to enable you to use the PROGRAM on the Designated CPU. As
used herein, “Designated CPU” means the computer having the
CATERPILLAR ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN serial number entered
on the “ET License” program screen in the PROGRAM.
CATERPILLAR limits access to and use of certain functions of the
PROGRAM to only authorized Caterpillar and TEPS dealers, as
CATERPILLAR, in its sole discretion, deems appropriate, and no
rights to obtain passwords is granted to you herein. Your rights to
use the PROGRAM is also conditioned upon your assent to the
terms and conditions of this License. THE PROGRAM REQUIRES
THAT YOU ASSENT TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS BY
CLICKING ON THE “I AGREE” BUTTON DURING PROGRAM
INSTALLATION. DOING SO, INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE
OF AND AGREEMENT TO BE BOUND BY THESE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS.
LICENSE:
You may:
a. Use the PROGRAM only on the Designated CPU. Transfer
of the PROGRAM to another computer must be
accomplished in the manner set forth in the “Caterpillar
Service Tool Software/Getting Started” booklet.
b. Make a backup copy of the PROGRAM to support your use
on the Designated CPU. Each backup diskette must include
a reproduction of the copyright notice and other notices or
legends as contained on the original PROGRAM and
PROGRAM CD-ROM label(s).
You may not:

a. Transfer this License or otherwise provide or disclose the
PROGRAM or any copy thereof to third parties;
b. Grant sublicenses, leases, or other rights in the PROGRAM
to third parties;
c Export or reexport the PROGRAM without the appropriate
United States and/or foreign government license(s);
d. Decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the
PROGRAM or allow others to do the same; or
e. Obtain or seek to obtain a PASSWORD to which you are not
entitled or share any PASSWORDS obtained from
CATERPILLAR with others.
RESTRICTED PROGRAM FUNCTIONS: Certain functions of the

PROGRAM ARE LIMITED TO USE BY ONLY CATERPILLAR AND
TEPS DEALERS AND OTHER AUTHORIZED USERS and require
the entry of specific PASSWORDS in order to access such functions.
Caterpillar Dealers, TEPS Dealers and those specifically authorized
by Caterpillar Inc. to use such functions must obtain the
PASSWORDS in the manner set forth in Caterpillar’s Level 3 Factory
Password System. Unless you are authorized and provided with an
appropriate password(s) by Caterpillar, access or use of such
functions is prohibited and IMMEDIATELY TERMINATES YOUR
LICENSE to use the PROGRAM.
LIMITED WARRANTIES: CATERPILLAR warrants that it is the sole

owner of the PROGRAM or has full power and authority to grant the
rights herein granted without the consent of any other party, and that
the PROGRAM is delivered free of the rightful claim of any third party
by way of infringement or the like. For a period of ninety (90) days
from your acceptance of this Agreement, CATERPILLAR also
warrants that the media on which the PROGRAM is furnished will be
free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. If
a defect appears during the limited warranty period, you may return
the media for free replacement. However, CATERPILLAR does not
warrant that the PROGRAM will meet your requirements or that
operation of the PROGRAM will be uninterrupted or error-free.
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES DESCRIBED ABOVE,

'THE PROGRAM' IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT OTHER
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
YOU ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION OF THIS

PROGRAM TO ACHIEVE YOUR INTENDED RESULTS, AND FOR
THE INSTALLATION, USE, AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM
THIS PROGRAM.
LIMITATION ON LIABILITY: In no event will CATERPILLAR be

liable to you, in law or equity, for any special, indirect or
consequential damages arising out of your use of the PROGRAM.
Except for the warranty against infringement, you agree that
regardless of the form of any claim you may have, CATERPILLAR's
liability will not exceed the license fee you paid for your rights to use
the PROGRAM.
TERM: This Agreement is effective until terminated as hereinafter

provided. The license granted herein will automatically terminate
without further action of CATERPILLAR if you fail to comply with the
restrictions as recited herein. These restrictions are for the benefit of
CATERPILLAR and/or applicable licensors of the copies thereof.
CATERPILLAR may also terminate this License at any time upon
thirty (30) days written notice to you. You may terminate this
Agreement at any time by either returning the PROGRAM together
with all copies thereof to CATERPILLAR or by destroying the same.
Upon termination all of your rights to use PROGRAM shall cease
and any further use by you is strictly prohibited.
GENERAL: This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the

State of Illinois, United States of America. This Agreement may be
modified only in a writing signed by the duly authorized
representatives of CATERPILLAR. No action may be brought for
any breach of warranty more than one year following the expiration
of the warranty period.
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS

AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY
ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT IT
IS THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE
AGREEMENT BETWEEN US WHICH SUPERSEDES ANY
PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, AND
ANY OTHER COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN US RELATING TO
THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT.
INQUIRIES: Should you have any questions concerning this

Agreement, write to Caterpillar Inc., Intellectual Property Dept., 100
N.E. Adams St., Peoria, IL 61629-6490.
Table of Contents
APPLICATION OVERVIEW..................................................................1-1
UNDERSTANDING THE CATERPILLAR ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN SCREEN1-2
MENU ITEMS ......................................................................................1-4
TOOL ICONS.......................................................................................1-6
COMMON SERVICE TOOL FUNCTIONS ..................................................1-8
Displaying Active Diagnostic and Event Codes ........................1-9
Data Log Viewer ......................................................................1-11
Exporting a File........................................................................1-20
Entering Customer Passwords................................................1-22
Printing ....................................................................................1-27
FILE DROP-DOWN MENU ...................................................................2-1
CREATING A NEW FILE .......................................................................2-3
OPENING A FILE .................................................................................2-4
CLOSING A FILE .................................................................................2-6
FILE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................2-7
File Operations: New...............................................................2-10
Open..............................................................2-11
Delete ............................................................2-12
Rename.........................................................2-13
Export ............................................................2-14
Import ............................................................2-16
Doc Operations: Open.............................................................2-18
Print ..............................................................2-22
Copy .............................................................2-23
Delete ...........................................................2-24
Move..............................................................2-25
Rename.........................................................2-26
Edit Description .............................................2-27
Export ............................................................2-28
Import ............................................................2-30
CONNECTING TO CATERPILLAR ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN ..................2-32
DISCONNECTING CATERPILLAR ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN ..................2-33
SELECTING THE ECM.......................................................................2-34
PRINT SETUP ...................................................................................2-35
EXITING CATERPILLAR ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN ...............................2-37
VIEW DROP-DOWN MENU..................................................................3-1
CHANGING THE TOOLBAR VIEW ..........................................................3-2
CUSTOMIZING THE TOOLBAR...............................................................3-3
CUSTOMIZING THE FUNCTION KEYS ....................................................3-6
DIAGNOSTICS DROP-DOWN MENU..................................................4-1
ACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC CODES ...............................................................4-2
LOGGED DIAGNOSTIC CODES .............................................................4-4
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS ............................................................................4-7
Auto Retarder Test ....................................................................4-8
Compression Brake Solenoid Test..........................................4-12
Cylinder Cutout Test: CAT Data Link ......................................4-17
Cylinder Cutout Test: 3126 HEUI ............................................4-23
Cylinder Cutout Test: C-10/C-12/C-15/C-16/3406E/3176B
(On Highway Truck) 3176B/3176C/3196/3406E (Marine)
Challenger 75 and 85........................................................4-32
Cylinder Cutout Test: 3500 EUI...............................................4-41
Cylinder Cutout Test: 797 Tandem Engine .............................4-50
End Line Relief Test ................................................................4-57
Engine Speed Test..................................................................4-63
Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test ................................4-67
Injection Actuation Pressure Test............................................4-71
Injector Solenoid Test (ATA) ...................................................4-77
Injector Solenoid Test (CAT Data Link)...................................4-83
Main Implement Relief Test.....................................................4-88
Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test ...........................................4-93
Misfire Detection Test..............................................................4-99
Override Parameters Test .....................................................4-105
Power Shift Pressure Test.....................................................4-110
Special Tests .........................................................................4-114
System Troubleshooting Settings..........................................4-119
Traction Aid Brake Test.........................................................4-123
Transmission Stall Test .........................................................4-130
Variable Speed Fan Test (Option B) .....................................4-136
Other Track Type Excavator Hydraulic Tests .......................4-143
EVENTS .........................................................................................4-145
Active Event Codes ...............................................................4-146
Logged Event Codes.............................................................4-148
Critical Events (ATA) .............................................................4-153
Shift Count Matrix ..................................................................4-156
Counters ................................................................................4-159
RESET VIDS EVENT LIST ...............................................................4-162
INPUT TROUBLESHOOTING ..............................................................4-163
INFORMATION DROP-DOWN .............................................................5-1
STATUS .............................................................................................5-2
ECM SUMMARY ...............................................................................5-13
CURRENT TOTALS ............................................................................5-15
HISTORY ..........................................................................................5-18
Rating History ..........................................................................5-19
Parameter Change History......................................................5-21
DATA LOG........................................................................................5-24
Data Log Recorder ..................................................................5-25
SEA TRIAL .......................................................................................5-36
Sea Trial General Information .................................................5-37
Sea Trial Steady State ............................................................5-49
Sea Trial Steady State Settings........................................5-51
Sea Trial Steady State Recorder ......................................5-79
Sea Trial Transient ..................................................................5-88
Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder ............................5-90
REAL TIME GRAPHING ....................................................................5-101
SNAPSHOT .....................................................................................5-113
Snapshot Recorder ...............................................................5-114
Snapshot Viewer ...................................................................5-120
PROGNOSTICS DOWNLOAD .............................................................5-134
Trip or Job Segment..............................................................5-140
TRIP OR JOB HISTOGRAM ...............................................................5-143
CUSTOM DATA ...............................................................................5-149
TRIP/JOB/DRIVER RESET................................................................5-153
SERVICE DROP-DOWN MENU ...........................................................6-1
CONFIGURATION ................................................................................6-2
COPY CONFIGURATION .......................................................................6-8
ECM Replacement ..................................................................6-11
Fleet Configuration ..................................................................6-17
Fleet/Key Configuration...........................................................6-24
MONITORING SYSTEM.......................................................................6-33
MONITORING SYSTEM (WITH PARAMETER SECURITY).........................6-37
PARAMETER LOCKOUT .....................................................................6-41
SECURITY MANAGEMENT ..................................................................6-45
MACHINE SECURITY SYSTEM UNINSTALL ...........................................6-52
OPERATOR SETTINGS.......................................................................6-57
TOOL CONFIGURATION .....................................................................6-62
Tool List Screen.......................................................................6-63
Tool Configuration Screen.......................................................6-67
MAINTENANCE INDICATOR ................................................................6-71
ECM DATE/TIME .............................................................................6-74
CALIBRATION STATUS.......................................................................6-78
CALIBRATIONS .................................................................................6-80
Articulation Position Calibration...............................................6-82
Articulation Sensor Calibration ................................................6-84
Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration................................6-88
Crankcase Pressure Calibration..............................................6-92
Engine Prechamber Calibration ..............................................6-96
Extended Service Coverage Calibration ...............................6-106
Hitch Sensors Calibration......................................................6-107
Hitch Valve Calibration ..........................................................6-110
Injector Codes Calibration .....................................................6-112
Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations ...........................................6-115
Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations.....................6-124
Monitor Throttle (Position) Sensor Calibration ......................6-132
Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration ...........................6-134
Pressure Sensor Calibration .................................................6-136
Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration ..............................6-138
Rack Sensor Calibration........................................................6-143
Ripper Position Calibration....................................................6-145
Throttle Calibration ................................................................6-147
Timing Calibration: 3406B/3406C .........................................6-150
Timing Calibration: 3176B/3406E/3500/C-10/C-12/C-15/
C-16/3116 HEUI/3126.....................................................6-152
Timing Calibration: EIS..........................................................6-154
Other Calibrations .................................................................6-156
SERVICE PROCEDURE ....................................................................6-172
Dyno Mode ............................................................................6-173
Engine Control System Tuning..............................................6-180
Power Balancing Tuning .......................................................6-184
DRIVER REWARD ...........................................................................6-187
UTILITIES DROP-DOWN MENU..........................................................7-1
SETTING PREFERENCES .....................................................................7-2
Setting Communication Preferences.........................................7-3
Setting Regional Preferences....................................................7-6
Setting Confirmation Preferences .............................................7-8
HELP DROP-DOWN MENU .................................................................8-1
TRAINER ............................................................................................8-2
ABOUT ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN ........................................................8-6
NAVIGATION SHORTCUTS ................................................................9-1
COMMA SEPARATED VALUE ................................................................9-5
GLOSSARY OF TERMS ......................................................................9-10
INDEX..................................................................................................10-1
Application Overview
About Caterpillar Electronic Technician Section


1
Caterpillar Electronic Technician (Cat ET) is a service tool designed
to run on a personal computer (PC) under Microsoft Windows .
With Cat ET you can display the status of a group of parameters
(temperatures, pressures, etc.) simultaneously, view and clear active
and logged diagnostics, or display the current configuration of an
Electronic Control Module (ECM). Cat ET can perform these as well
as many other tasks, such as:
• Display, graph, and record logs of parameter status

• View and clear diagnostics
• View events where irregularities occurred and were logged
by the ECM
• View and change configuration of the ECM
• Perform diagnostic tests
• Perform calibrations
• View Trip information through Trip Summary, Histograms
and Custom reports
• Print reports and diagnostic results
For some subscriptions of Caterpillar Electronic Technician,

additional programs have been included with the Cat ET program.
Caterpillar Electronic Technician is designed to communicate with

the ECMs through a communication data link. Caterpillar Electronic
Technician allows you to obtain data, analyze it, and then diagnose
existing and potential problems.
About Caterpillar Electronic Technician Documentation

All Caterpillar Electronic Technician documentation assumes the
user has some Microsoftâ Windows experience. If this does not
describe you, please take some time to acquaint yourself with
Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, or 2000, before installing Caterpillar
Electronic Technician.
The data and menus that are displayed in the illustrations of this
manual may be different from the data and menus that you have
displayed in Caterpillar Electronic Technician. The reason for this is
that the data depends on the Electronic Control Module (ECM) that
Caterpillar Electronic Technician has targeted as the current ECM.
1-1
Understanding the Caterpillar Electronic
Technician Screen
Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar
Service Tool
function screen
Status Bar
Illustration 1-1: Caterpillar Electronic Technician main screen
Overview
Parts of the screen are:
Title bar The bar at the across the top of the

application, displays the application name.
Control menu The icon in the upper left corner of the Title
Bar, allows you to manipulate the service
tool window.
Minimize button Located in the upper right corner of the

Title Bar, allows you to minimize the
service tool.
Maximize button Located in the upper right corner of the

Title Bar, allows you to fill the service tool
1-2
to the entire screen. After the service tool
is maximized, the Restore button displays.
Restore button Located in the upper right corner of the Section

Title Bar, allows you to return the service 1
tool to its normal size. After the service tool
is maximized, the Restore button displays.
Close button Located in the upper right corner of the

Title Bar, allows you to exit the service
tool.
Menu bar Located under the title bar, this area

displays the menu names in the service
tool.
Toolbar Located under the menu bar, this area

displays push-buttons, when selected
display a service tool function.
Function screen Located below the toolbar, this area

displays the service tool functions.
Status bar Located at the bottom, the service tool

status bar has three sections. The left
section displays explanations or
instructions for using the service tool. The
middle section indicates if a file within file
management is Open. If there is no file
open, this area is blank. The right section
displays the ECM connected to the service
tool.
1-3
Menu Items
Overview
The Caterpillar Electronic Technician Software main screen consists
of eight drop-down menus. The functions available depend on the
application and the specific software installed on your ECM.
When the service tool does not have a data link connection, the
following menu functions are available (Refer to Illustration 1-2):
Illustration 1-2: Caterpillar Electronic Technician Menu Items
File New…
Open > Fleet Configuration File
Data Log File
Sea Trial General Information File
Sea Trial Steady State File
Sea Trial Transient File
Snapshot File
Other…
Close
File Management…
Connect
Print Setup…
Exit
View Toolbar
Custom > Toolbar
Function Keys
Utilities Preferences
Comm Adapter Toolkit (if installed)
License
Help Contents
Using Help
Trainer
What's New
About Electronic Technician
1-4
When the service tool does have a data link connection, the
following menu functions are also available (Refer to Illustration 1-3):
Section
1
Illustration 1-3: Caterpillar Electronic Technician Menu Items
Diagnostics
Information
Service
1-5
Tool Icons
Overview
The toolbar allows quick access to the different Caterpillar Electronic
Technician functions and displays below the menu bar. You can hide
or change the size of this tool, or you can customize the toolbar.
Illustration 1-4: Caterpillar Electronic Technician Toolbar in default
The icons available are:
Status
Active Diagnostic Codes
Logged Diagnostic Codes
Logged Event Codes
ECM Summary
Configuration
Connect
Disconnect
Enable Trainer
Disable Trainer
Exit the application
1-6
Display help contents
Section
Active Event Codes 1
1-7
Common Service Tool Functions
Like many other computer applications, Caterpillar Electronic

Technician has many tools that are common to most functions found
in the service tool. These common functions are grouped in one
location for your convenience.
The common service tool functions are:
• Active Codes
• Data Log Viewer
• Export
• Passwords: Customer
• Print
1-8
Displaying Active Diagnostic and Event
Codes
Section
1
push-pin
icon
Illustration 1-5: Active Codes dialog box
Purpose
The Active Codes dialog box displays all of the currently active
diagnostic and event codes. These codes are the same as those
found in the Active Diagnostic Codes and Active Event Codes
screens in the Diagnostics drop-down menu. This dialog box
displays separately from the main screen allowing you to view active
codes while running specific service tool functions.
On the title bar, a "push-pin" icon is displayed before the Active

Codes title name. Using your mouse and clicking on this icon keeps
this screen open while using specific service tool functions.
When the push-pin appears "pushed in," the

Active Codes dialog box remains on the screen
while using specific service tool functions.
1-9
When the push-pin appears "pulled out," the
Active Codes dialog box does not display unless
you press the "Active Codes" push-button.
The description of each code helps distinguish each code. The

codes are grouped according to the ECM from which they are
retrieved. If no codes are present, "No Active Codes" is displayed in
the code column.
When the Include All ECMs check box is checked, active codes from
all available ECMs are retrieved and displayed. When there is a
single ECM on the data link, this check box is disabled.
Instructions
To display active diagnostic and event codes:
Step 1 Press the "Active Codes" push-button. The Active Codes

dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 1-5).
Note: Pressing the "Hide Events" push-button removes the active

event codes from the Active Codes dialog box. This push-button is
then replaced with the "Show Events" push-button. Pressing the
"Show Events" push-button displays the Active Event Codes.
Step 2 Press "Close." You return to the selected service tool

function screen.
1-10
Data Log Viewer
Section
1
Legend Area
Graph
Area
Tracing Point
Area
Illustration 1-6: Data Log Viewer screen
Purpose
Data Log Viewer allows you to either view the logged data from
specific service tool functions graphically or export the file to view as
a *.txt file. As a Comma Separated Value text file, the data can be
imported into other applications (for example Excel or Lotus 123).
You do not need a data link connection to view a log.
Note: For an explanation of how to export a Comma Separated

Value text file to an Excel spreadsheet, refer in the Appendix to
"Comma Separated Value," section 9, page 5.
Accessing
To run the Data Log Viewer function:
Select Viewer from the specific service tool function. The Data
Log Viewer screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 1-6).
OR--
1-11
Press the "Graph" push-button in the specific service tool
function. The Data Log Viewer screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 1-6).
Note: The Select Parameters dialog box is displayed the first time
you try to use this tool. See "Selecting Parameters," section 1,
page 14.
Screen Layout
Legend Area
The Data Log Viewer legend area, above the graph, displays the
ECM name and its selected parameters. These parameters display
with the corresponding line color and symbol, if the Show Data
Points option is enabled.
The status parameter and its unit of value display on the y-axis.
These are displayed on each side of the graph. A maximum of six
parameters may be selected. These parameters display in the line
color.
Graph Area
The Data Log Viewer area displays the time on the x-axis and the
minimum and maximum values for each parameter on the y-axis.
State parameters (for example, the only status is “On” or “Off”),
display with dashed lines until the graph begins to trace the state
parameter's value.
To maneuver through the screen:
To make the graph easier to read, "click and drag" the mouse over
an area. The area selected fills the graph. You may do this several
times in order to spread the graph out even more. To scroll through
the graph's data, press the right or left arrows on the keyboard. To
return the graph to its default setting, press the right mouse button in
the graph area.
Tracing Point Area

If the Enable Tracing option is checked in the Data Log Viewer
Settings dialog box, the X and Y value/s of the points selected in the
graph, are displayed in the lower left area. If two points are selected,
the difference in the two points is also displayed. The selected "Point
1" and "Point 2" display next to the selected point in the Graph Area.
1-12
Note: When selecting a point on the graph, the cursor changes to a
"hand" when positioned correctly to specify a point.
Push-Buttons
Section
The push-buttons available in the Data Log Viewer screen are: 1
• Parameters
• Settings…
• Export
• Print
Note: See "Exporting a File," section 1, page 20.
Note: See “Printing,” section 1, page 26. After pressing the "Print"
push-button, the Print Comment dialog box is displayed. Comments
entered in the text box display at the top of the printed document. If
you do not want a comment at the top of the printed document, press
"OK" without typing information in the text box.
1-13
Selecting Parameters
Illustration 1-7: Select Parameters dialog box
Purpose
The "Parameters" push-button displays the Select Parameters dialog
box. This dialog box displays the parameters of the selected file
allowing you to select specific parameters from that file to graph.
The Selected Parameters dialog box displays the comments entered

in the Save As dialog box. In this dialog box the comments text box
cannot be changed (read only).
Note: The last file viewed in Data Log Viewer displays in the File text
box. If launched from a specific service tool function, it is the last
data log recorded from that specific function.
Instructions
To select parameters:
Step 1 Press the "Parameters" push-button from the Data Log

Viewer screen. The Select Parameters dialog box is
displayed (Refer to Illustration 1-7).
1-14
Step 2 If launched from Data Log Recorder, the last data log
recorded, is displayed in the File text box. Otherwise, it
is the last file viewed in Data Log Viewer. To select a
different file, enter the file name in the File text box.
Section
OR— 1
Press the "Browse..." push-button to display the Select
an SDF file dialog box (Refer to Illustration 1-8).
Illustration 1-8: Select an SDF file dialog box
Select a file and press "Open." You return to the Select

Parameters dialog box with the selected file and its
comments (if any) and parameters listed.
Step 3 Highlight a parameter in the Available Parameters list

box and press the “>” push-button or double click on the
parameter. This moves parameters, one at a time, from
the Available Parameters list box to the Selected
Parameters list box, (highlighting a parameter in the
Selected Parameters list box and pressing the “<” push-
button moves it back).
When finished, you can select a different file from the

File Area and then select from its Available Parameters.
A maximum of six parameters can be added to the
Selected Parameters list box.
1-15
Note: In the Selected Parameter list box, each selected parameter
displays its file location and the ECM information for that file above
the selected parameter/s.
Note: If you want to select parameters from another file for

comparison, repeat step 2 and step 3 until all files and their
parameters are selected to be drawn.
Step 4 Press "OK" to accept the selected file/s and their

parameters. The Data Log Viewer screen is displayed
showing the selected ECM and its selected parameters
Press "Cancel" if you want to leave the Select

Parameters dialog box without selecting parameters.
1-16
Setting up the Graph
Section
1
Illustration 1-9: Data Log Settings dialog box
Purpose
The “Settings…” push-button allows you to change the viewable time
range, the range of the status parameters, and the color of the status
parameters. You can also show symbols on the graph, display a grid,
and/or enable tracing to numerically view two specific points on the
graph.
Note: If a parameter’s range cannot be changed, the value is

grayed.
Instructions
To change the graph settings:
Step 1 Press the "Settings…" push-button from the Data Log

Viewer screen. The Data Log Viewer Settings dialog box
is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-26).
Step 2 Depending on the value you select to change, enter the

new value in the text box or select the value from the
drop-down list in the X-Axis Range area.
The X-Axis Range settings display on the graph the

desired viewable length of time.
1-17
Start Point Displays the starting time on the graph. By
default, this value is the pre-trigger time.
Width Displays the total width of the graph. By

default, the value is the pre-trigger time
plus duration. If multiple data logs are
graphed, the largest duration is default.
Units Displays the units for the start point and

width. Default is in seconds.
Note: Changing the Starting Point and Width reduces the area you
can scroll through on the Data Log Viewer screen by using the left
and right arrow keys on the keyboard.
Step 3 The Y-Axis Range area allows you to set properties for
the traces:
File Lists the file name of the data log file

associated with the parameter selected.
This column is read only.
Parameter Lists the ECM and its parameter. This

column is read only.
Y Min Lists the parameters minimum default

value. To limit the range, double click on
the cell and enter a new value.
X Max Lists the parameters maximum default

value. To limit the range, double click on
the cell and enter a new value.
X Offset Allows you to adjust the X-Axis when

viewing different files on the same graph.
Color Allows you to change the color of the trace

for the selected parameter. Do this by
pressing the down arrow to the right of the
color bar. A color grid is displayed.
Note: If the text in longer than the column width, placing your mouse
pointer over the cell displays all the information in a text box.
1-18
Step 4 In the Options area, check the options you want to
display on the Data Log Viewer screen.
Show Grid Displays grid lines on the graph

area. Section
1
Show Data Points Displays symbols on the graph
lines corresponding to the
symbol above the parameter.
Compare Data Points Displays the Tracing Point Area

on the Data Log Viewer graph.
After the Compare Data Points
option is checked, select two
point on the Data Log Viewer
graph. The selected points and
differences display in the
Tracing Point Area. When
selecting a point on the graph,
the cursor changes to a "hand"
when positioned correctly.
Step 5 Press “OK” to accept the setting changes. The graph

shows the changes you have made.
Press “Cancel” if you decide not to make changes to the

settings. Press “Default” to return settings to their default
positions.
1-19
Exporting a File
Illustration 1-10: Export dialog box
Purpose
The Export operation allows you to save a data log file to a text file.
This data is saved as a comma separated value *.txt file that can be
imported into other applications (for example Excel or Lotus 123).
Instructions
To export a file:
Step 1 Press "Export" from the service tool screen. The Export
Step 2 The current data log file is listed in the Data Log File text
box. Press the "Export" push-button. "The Data Log file
was successfully exported…" message box is displayed
(Refer to Illustration 1-11). Press "Cancel" if you do not
want to export a file.
Note: By default, the current data log displays in the Data Log File
text box. The "…" push-buttons after the Data Log File text box
displays the standard Microsoft Windows Open dialog box. This
allows you to select a different log file to export to a text file. The "…"
push-buttons after the Text File text box displays the standard
Microsoft Windows Save As dialog box. This allows you to change
file name and/or path of the file.
1-20
Section
1
Illustration 1-11: "The Data Log file was successfully exported…" message
box
Step 3 Press "OK." You return to the Export dialog box.
Step 4 Press the "Cancel" push-button to return to the last

active service tool screen.

1-21
Entering Customer Passwords
Illustration 1-12: Enter Customer Passwords dialog box
Purpose
-
The Enter Customer Passwords dialog box (Refer to Illustration 1 12)
is used for protection. It prevents free-access to some of the
important changes being made in the service tool. Only people who
know the passwords can make changes. The Customer Passwords
cannot be longer than eight characters long. When you are in a
screen, once the passwords are successfully entered they are not
requested again, unless another function is selected or the data link
communication is interrupted.
These passwords can be changed in the Configuration tool, by

highlighting either Customer Password number 1 or number 2 and
pressing the “Change” push-button. The Change Parameter Value
dialog box is displayed.
Instructions
To enter customer passwords:
Step 1 Type the first customer password into the Customer

Password number 1 text box.
Step 2 Type the second customer password into the Customer

Password number 2 text box.
Step 3 Press “OK” to enter these passwords. If the passwords

that you entered are correct, the action that you were
performing can be finished.
If the passwords that you entered are incorrect, the

“Incorrect Customer Password…” message box is
1-22
displayed. Press “OK” to return to the Enter Customer
Passwords dialog box.
Press “Cancel” to exit the Enter Customer Password

dialog box. You return to the last open screen. Section
1
1-23
Illustration 1-13
1-24
Section
1
1-25
Printing
Illustration 1-14: Print Document dialog box
Purpose
The Print Document dialog box allows you to send a report to a file,
printer, or to the screen. The report includes the source of data, time
and date of report generation, ECM connection, list of parameters
and their values, and information that is unique to the function that
you are printing.
Instructions
To print a report to a file:
Step 1 Press the “Print” push-button. The Print Document dialog

box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 1-14).
Step 2 Press the “Print to File” radio button and then press
“OK.” Press “Cancel” to exit the Print Document dialog
box without saving the file.
Illustration 1-15: Printing dialog box
Note: If you do not have a file open, the Printing dialog box asks you
to open a file, create a new file, or cancel. Choose the appropriate
button to continue (Refer to Illustration 1-15).
1-26
Open... Press the “Open...” push-button. The
Open File dialog box is displayed.
Highlight a file and press the “Open”
push-button. The Print New Document To
File dialog box is displayed. Section
1
New... Press the “New...” push-button. Enter a
new file name in the new file name text
box and press “OK.” The Print New
Document To File dialog box is displayed.
Cancel Press “Cancel” to exit the dialog box. You

return to the Print Document dialog box.
Step 3 In the Print New Document To File enter a document

name and description in the appropriate text boxes and
press “OK.” The “Print to File is complete” message box
is displayed. Press “OK” to return to the last active
screen. Press “Cancel” to exit the Print New Document
To File dialog box.
To print a report to the printer:

box is displayed.
Step 2 Press the “Print to Printer” radio button and then press
“OK.” The “Print to Printer is complete” message box is
displayed. Press “OK” to return to the last active screen.
Press “Cancel” to exit the Print Document dialog box.
To print a report to the screen:

box is displayed.
.
Step 2 Press the “Print Preview” radio button and then press
“OK.” The Print Preview screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 1-16).
1-27
Illustration 1-16: Print Preview screen
This screen gives you a sample of how the report looks

when printed. Choose the appropriate push-button to aid
in viewing the document:
Print Prints the report to a printer.
Next Page Views the next page of the report. “Next

Page” is disabled if you are on the last
page or if it is a one-page report.
Prev Page Views the previous page of the report.

“Prev Page” is disabled if you are on the
first page or if it is a one-page report.
Two Page Displays two pages of the report at once.

“Two Page” push-button is replaced with
“One Page” push-button; press the “One
Page push-button to view one page.
Zoom In Magnifies the test. “Zoom In” is disabled

when the text is fully magnified.
Zoom Out Decreases the text size. “Zoom Out” is

disabled when the text is at normal size.
1-28
Close Exits print preview and return to the
service tool.
Section
1
1-29
1-30
File Drop-Down Menu
Illustration 2-1: File drop-down menu
Overview
The File drop-down menu functions provide you with easy methods
for grouping, creating, saving, viewing, and retrieving multiple
documents related to a maintenance activity or group of activities.
A File Management file is similar to the concept of a physical file

folder containing various documents about a specific activity. It is
used as a place to store reports or documents printed (via the Print
to File option) throughout the system. A document is stored in the
file.
The File drop-down menu also allow you to connect or disconnect

from the service tool. When the service tool is connected, the
Disconnect option is displayed. When the service tool is
disconnected, the Connect option is displayed. This menu also
allows you to select a different ECM if more than one is connected,
and when there is a CAT Data Link connection.
The functions available under the File drop-down menu are:
• New
• Open
• Close
• File Management
• Disconnect/Connect
2-1
• Switch Data Link*
• Select ECM (when there is more than one is ECM
connected)
• Print Setup
• Exit
* This drop-down function can be added in the Preferences option of

the Utilities menu. See "Setting Communication Preferences,"
section 7, page 11, step 5.
Note: The service tool automatically attempts a data link connection

when you first enter the software, through the program group in
Program Manager. If you do not want an automatic data link
connection, press the “Stop Connect” push-button to cancel this
process. This accesses the service tool menu.
If the connection process completes, the service tool identifies the

product and make available the features and functions valid for the
product.
The application continuously displays “connection status” information

throughout the status field on the screen. If a connection cannot be
established or is lost, the service tool provides information about the
connection failure and recommends steps for correcting the problem.
2-2
Creating a New File
Illustration 2-2: New File dialog box
Purpose
The New File function allows you to create a new file that is empty
and ready for storage of documents.
Instructions
To create a new file:
Step 1 Select New... from the File menu. The New File dialog
Step 2 Enter (up to 40 characters) the file name in the New File
text box. The name cannot be the same as any existing
file name.
Step 3 Press “OK” to save the new file name. Press “Cancel” if
you do not want to create a new file.
Note: Notice the words “File Open” are displayed in the status bar at
the bottom of the service tool window. Creating a new file opens that
new file. The words stay there until a file is closed.
2-3
Opening a File
Illustration 2-3: Open menu functions
Purpose
The Open File function allows you to open existing files created from
specific service tool functions when disconnected from a data link. It
is also a way to access these files without going through a specific
function when connected to a data link. These files include:
• Fleet Configuration
• Data Log
• Sea Trial General Information
• Sea Trial Steady State
• Sea Trial Transient
• Snapshot
The Other…option allows you to open an existing file from the

service tool. Any changes made while the file is open are saved to
that file.
Instructions
To open an "Other" file:
Step 1 Select Open... from the File menu, and then select
Other…from the sub-menu. The Open File dialog box is
2-4
Illustration 2-4: Open File dialog box
Step 2 Highlight the file you want to open from the Files list box.
Open Press the “Open” push-button to open the

file. Only one file can be opened at a time.
New File Press “New File” to create a new file within

the Open File dialog box.
Cancel Press “Cancel” to exit the Open File dialog

box without opening a file.
The file you selected is now ready to store documents. Any

documents that are “printed to file” go into the file you just opened.
the bottom of the service tool window. The words stay there until a
file is closed.
2-5
Closing a File
Purpose
The Close File function allows you to close an open file.
Instructions
To close an open file:
Select Close from the File menu.
Note: The Close function is disabled until a file is open.
2-6
File Management
Illustration 2-5: File Management dialog box
Purpose
File Management allows you to manage your service tool files on
your PC.
Accessing
To use the File Management:
Select File Management... from the File menu. The File

Management dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-5).
Screen Layout
The File Management dialog box has the following areas:
File Open This line shows what file, if any, is currently

open.
Files The Files list box displays the file names created
from a PC.
Documents The Document list box displays the documents

for a specific file. Highlighting a file name
displays the documents stored in that file.
2-7
Document Type There are three types of documents stored in
the Documents list. They are Fleet
Configuration, Fleet/Key Configuration, Print
Report, and Snapshot Documents. You can
specify which type of document you want to
display or select “All Documents.”
Description Highlighting a document shows its description.

This description is entered when the document
is saved.
File Operations Press this push-button to display the File

Operations pop-up menu. You can also display
this menu by pressing the right mouse button
with the pointer in the Files list box. The
operations available are:
2-8
Doc Operations Press this push-button to display the Doc
(Document) Operations pop-up menu. You can
also display this menu by pressing the right
mouse button with the pointer in the Document
list box. The operations available are:
Close Press the “Close” push-button to exit the File

Management dialog box. You return to the last
active screen.
2-9
File Operations: New
Illustration 2-6: New File dialog box
Purpose
The New operation in File Management works the same as the New
function from the File menu. It allows you to create a new file that is
empty and ready for storage of documents. A maximum of forty
characters is allowed for the name of the new file. Spaces can be
entered as part of the file name.
Instructions
To create a new file within File Management:
Step 1 Press the “File Operations” push-button or push the right

mouse button with the pointer in the Files list box area. A
pop-up menu is displayed.
Step 2 Select New... from the menu. The New File dialog box is
Step 3 Enter (up to 40 characters) the file name in the New File
text box. The name cannot be the same as any existing
file name.
you do not want to create a new file.
Note: Notice the word “File Open” are displayed in the status bar at
the bottom of the service tool window. Creating a new file opens that
new file. The words stay there until a file is closed.
2-10
File Operations: Open
Purpose
Opening a file from the File Management dialog box works the same
as when you open a file from the File menu. It opens a file to allow
you to print to that file when in the service tool. Any changes made
while the file is open are saved to that file.
Instructions
To open a file within File Management:
Step 1 Highlight the file you want to open from the Files list box.
Press the “File Operations” push-button or push the right
Step 2 Select Open from the menu. The file you selected is now
ready to store documents. Any documents that are
“printed to file” go into the file you just opened.
the bottom of the service tool window. The words stay there until a
file is closed.
2-11
File Operations: Delete
Purpose
The Delete operation allows you to delete a file.
Instructions
To delete a file:
You must first delete all documents in a file before deleting that file.
Once all of the documents are deleted, the following steps can be
performed.
Step 1 Highlight the file that you want to delete from the Files
list box. Press the “File Operations” push-button or push
the right mouse button with the pointer in the Files list
box area. A pop-up menu is displayed.
Step 2 Select Delete from the menu. The “Are you sure…”
message box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-7).
Illustration 2-7: “Are you sure...” message box
Step 3 Press “Yes” if you want to delete the file or “No” if you do
not want to delete the file.
2-12
File Operations: Rename
Illustration 2-8: Rename File dialog box
Purpose
The Rename operation allows you to change the name of a file.
Instructions
To rename a file:
Step 1 Highlight the file that you want to rename from the Files
Step 2 Select Rename... from the menu. The Rename File

dialog box is displayed, with the old file name shown
(Refer to Illustration 2-8).
Step 3 Enter (up to 40 characters) the new file name in the

Enter New File Name text box. The new name cannot be
the same as any existing file name.
you do not want to rename the file.
2-13
File Operations: Export
Illustration 2-9: Export to File dialog box
Purpose
The Export operation allows you to save a service tool file on another
disk drive.
Instructions
To export a file:
Step 1 Highlight the file that you want to export from the Files
Note: To highlight multiple files to export, you can use the Keyboard
Shortcuts. See the Appendix for an explanation.
Step 2 Select Export... from the menu. The Export to file dialog
box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-9). This dialog
box is the standard File Open/File Save dialog box.
Step 3 In the Export to File dialog box, select the location you
want to export the file to. Caterpillar Electronic
Technician is the default destination folder.
The Save as type drop-down list displays only Cat ET

files. Only Cat ET files (*.ET) can be used to export a
file.
2-14
Step 4 Type the name of the file, you want to export, in the File
name text box.
Note: The export name is a new file name to save the Caterpillar
Electronic Technician file on your PC hard disk drive or floppy disk. It
is a separate name from the file name you gave it in the service tool.
Step 5 Press “Save” to export the file to the specified disk file.
The “File export is complete” message box is displayed
(Refer to Illustration 2-10). Press “OK.”
Illustration 2-10: File export is complete message box
Press “Cancel” to exit the Export to File dialog box

without exporting a file. Press “Help” to open online help
for assistance.
Note: You may get an error message box if the file does not export
completely. This message box informs you of the problem.
2-15
File Operations: Import
Illustration 2-11: Import from File dialog box
Purpose
The Import operation allows you to import and read a saved disk file
for use by the service tool.
Instructions
To import a file:
Step 1 Press the “File Operations” push-button or push the right

Step 2 Select Import... from the menu. The Import from File
dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-11). This
dialog box is the standard File Open/File Save dialog
box.
Step 3 Select the file type from the Files of Type drop-down list.
The extension you choose is displayed in the Look in
text box. Only Cat ET files (*.ET) can be used to import a
file.
Step 4 In the Import from File dialog box, select the location
from where the file to be imported is located. All the files,
in the file type you have specified, are displayed in the
Look in text box.
2-16
Step 5 Highlight the file you want to import. The name is
displayed in the File name text box. Press “Open” to
import the document from the specified disk file. Press
“Cancel” to exit the Import from File dialog box without
importing a file. Press “Help” to open online help for
assistance.
OR--
Double click on the file you want to import, in the Look in
text box.
Step 6 The “File import is complete” dialog box is displayed

(Refer to Illustration 2-12). Press “OK.”
Illustration 2-12: File import is complete message box
Note: The import/export file name is part of the operating system.

This name is not displayed in the File Name list box. The File name
originally given to the file in the service tool is displayed in the Files
list box. If this file is already located in the Files list box, you are
asked to assign it a new name.
2-17
Doc Operations: Open
Purpose
The Open operation allows you to open a document. Opening a
document has different results depending on what kind of document
you have highlighted.
Print Report Opening a Print Report displays the

Print Preview screen.
Fleet Configuraton Opening Fleet Configuration

displays the document in the Fleet
Configuration screen.
Fleet/Key Configuration Opening Fleet/Key Configuration

displays the document in the
Fleet/Key Configuration screen.
Snapshot Viewer Opening a Snapshot Viewer

displays the document in the
Snapshot Viewer screen.
Instructions
To open a Print Report document:
Step 1 Highlight the file in the Files list box where the document
you want to open is located.
Step 2 Highlight the Print Report document in the Documents

list box. Press the “Doc Operations” push-button or push
the right mouse button with the pointer in the Documents
list box area. A pop-up menu is displayed.
Step 3 Select Open from the menu. The Print Preview screen
for that document is displayed.
OR--
2-18
Step 2 Double click on the Print Report document in the
Documents list box.
Step 3 The “Do you wish…” message box is displayed. Press

“Yes” to display the Print Preview screen for that
document or “No” to exit the open document operation.
To open a Fleet Configuration document:
Step 2 Highlight the Fleet Configuration document in the

Documents list box. Press the “Doc Operations”
push-button or press the right mouse button with the
pointer in the Documents list box area. A pop-up menu is
displayed.
Step 3 Select Open from the menu. “Loading file…” progress

bar is displayed. The Fleet Configuration message box is
then displayed, with information about the particular file
and document. Press “OK.” The Fleet Configuration
screen is displayed.
OR--
Step 2 Double click on the Fleet Configuration document in the

Documents list box.

“Yes.” to display the “Loading file…” progress bar or “No”
to exit the open document operation.
Step 4 The Fleet Configuration message box is then displayed,

with information about the particular file and document.
Press “OK.” The Fleet Configuration screen is displayed.
Note: For more information about loading a Fleet Configuration from

a file see “Loading Data from a File,” section 6, page 21.
2-19
To open a Fleet/Key Configuration document:
Step 2 Highlight the Fleet/Key Configuration document in the

push-button or press the right mouse button with the
displayed.
Step 3 Select Open from the menu. “Loading file…” progress

bar is displayed. The Fleet/Key Configuration message
box is then displayed, with information about the
particular file and document. Press “OK.” The Fleet/Key
Configuration screen is displayed.
OR--
Step 2 Double click on the Fleet/Key Configuration document in

the Documents list box.

“Yes.” to display the “Loading file…” progress bar or “No”
to exit the open document operation.
Step 4 The Fleet/Key Configuration message box is then

displayed, with information about the particular file and
document. Press “OK.” The Fleet/Key Configuration
Note: For more information about loading a Fleet/Key Configuration

from a file see “Loading Data from a File,” section 5, page 29.
To open a Snapshot Viewer:
Step 2 Highlight the Snapshot Viewer document in the

push-button or push the right mouse button with the
2-20
displayed.
Step 3 Select Open from the menu. The Select Group dialog
box is displayed.
OR--
Step 2 Double click on the Snapshot Viewer document in the

Documents list box.

“Yes” to display the Select Group dialog box or “No” to
exit the open document operation.
Note: For more information see “Snapshot Viewer,” section 5,

page 119.
2-21
Doc Operations: Print
Purpose
The Print operation allows you to print the Print Report documents to
the printer.
Note: You cannot print Fleet Configuration, Fleet/Key

Configuration, or Snapshot Viewer documents within File
Management.
Instructions
To print a document within File Management:
you want to print is located.
Step 2 Highlight the Print Report document in the Documents

list box. Press the “Doc Operations” push-button or push
the right mouse button with the pointer in the Documents
list box area. A pop-up menu is displayed.
Step 3 Select Print from the menu. The “‘Print to Printer’ is

complete” message box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 2-13). Press “OK.”
Illustration 2-13: Printing message box
2-22
Doc Operations: Copy
Illustration 2-14: Copy Document dialog box
Purpose
The Copy operation allows you to make a copy of a document within
the same file.
Instructions
To copy a document:
you want to copy is located.
Step 2 Highlight the document in the Documents list box. Press

the “Doc Operations” push-button or push the right
mouse button with the pointer in the Documents list box
area. A pop-up menu is displayed.
Step 3 Select Copy... from the menu. The Copy Document

dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-14) with
the current document name displayed in the Current
Document Name text box.
Step 4 Enter the new document name in the New Document

Name text box.
Note: The New Document Name text box cannot be left blank and it
cannot have the same name as an existing document name.
Step 5 Press “OK” to copy the document with a new name.

Press “Cancel” if you do not want to copy the document.
2-23
Doc Operations: Delete
Purpose
The Delete operation allows you to delete a document.
Instructions
To delete a document:
you want to delete is located.

Note: To highlight multiple documents to delete, you can use the

Keyboard Shortcuts. See the Appendix for an explanation.
Step 3 Select Delete from the menu. The document is deleted.
2-24
Doc Operations: Move
Illustration 2-15: Move Document to Another File dialog box
Purpose
The Move operation allows you to move a document from one file to
another file.
Instructions
To move a document:
you want to move is located.

Step 3 Select Move... from the menu. The Move Document to

Another File dialog box is displayed with the current file
name displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-15).
Step 4 Select the file that you want to move the document to,
from the “To File” drop-down list. You cannot select the
file in which the document is currently located.
Step 5 Press “OK” to move the document to another file. Press

“Cancel” if you do not want to move the document.
2-25
Doc Operations: Rename
Illustration 2-16: Rename Document dialog box
Purpose
The Rename... operation allows you to change the name of the
document.
Instructions
To rename a document:
you want to rename is located.

Step 3 Select Rename… from the menu. The Rename

Document dialog box is displayed, with the old document
name shown (Refer to Illustration 2-16).
Step 4 Enter (up to 40 characters) the file name in the Enter

New Document Name text box. The new name cannot
be the same as any existing document name.
Step 5 Press “OK” to save the new document name. Press

“Cancel” if you do not want to rename the document.
2-26
Doc Operations: Edit Description
Illustration 2-17: Edit Description dialog box
Purpose
The Edit Description operation allows you to edit the document
description.
Instructions
To edit a document's description:
you want to edit is located.

Step 3 Select Edit Description... from the menu. The Edit

Document Description dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 2-17).
Step 4 Edit the description of the document in text box.
Step 5 Press “OK” to accept the edited description. Press

“Cancel” to if you do not want to edit the description.
2-27
Doc Operations: Export
Illustration 2-18: Export to File dialog box
Purpose
The Export operation allows you to save a service tool document as
a disk file, for use in other applications. For example, you can save
the document as an Excel file, then open it up in the Excel
application for viewing or editing.
Depending on type of document you have selected (Print Report,

Fleet Configuration, Fleet/Key Configuration or Snapshot Document),
you may select a different type of file to export. Below, Table 2-1
illustrates the documents and extensions that they can have.
Type of Document Type of File Extension

Print Document Cat ET Document (*.ET)
Excel Files (*.XLS)
Lotus 123 File (*.WK1)
Fleet Configuration Cat ET Document (*.ET)
Fleet/Key Cat ET Document (*.ET)
Configuration
Snapshot Document Cat ET Document (*.ET)
Table 2-1: Document vs. File Extension
Instructions
To export a document:
you want to export is located.
2-28
Note: To highlight multiple documents to export, you can use the

Keyboard Shortcuts. See the Appendix for an explanation.
Step 3 Select Export... from the menu. The Export to File dialog
box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-18). This dialog
box is the standard File Open/File Save dialog box.
Step 4 In the Export to File dialog box, select the location you
want to export the document to. Caterpillar Electronic
Technician is the default destination.
Step 5 Select the file type from the Save as type drop-down list.
Step 6 Type the name of the document, you want to export, in

the File name text box.
Note: The export name is a new file name to save the Caterpillar
Electronic Technician file on your PC hard disk drive or floppy disk. It
is a separate name from the file name you gave it the service tool.
Step 7 Press “Save” to export the document to the specified

disk file. The “File export is complete” message box is
displayed. Press “OK.”
Press “Cancel” to exit the Export to File dialog box

without exporting a document. Press “Help” to open
online help for assistance.
Note: You may get an error message box if the file does not export
completely. This message box informs you of the problem.
2-29
Doc Operations: Import
Illustration 2-19: Import from File dialog box
Purpose
The Import operation allows you to import and read a saved disk file
for use by the service tool.
Instructions
To import a document:
Step 1 Highlight a document in the Documents list box. Press

Step 2 Select Import... from the menu. The Import from File
dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 2-19). This
dialog box is the standard File Open/File Save dialog
box.
Step 3 Select the file type from the File of type drop-down list.
The extension that you choose is displayed in the File
Name text box.
Step 4 In the Import from Files dialog box, select the location
from where the document to be imported is located. All
the documents, in the file type that you have specified,
are displayed in the text box under the Look in text box.
2-30
Step 5 Highlight the document you want to import from this list
box. The name displays in the File name text box.
Step 6 Press “Open” to import the document from the specified

disk file. The “File import is complete” dialog box is
Press “Cancel” to exit the Import from File dialog box

without importing a document. Press “Help” to open
online help for assistance.
Note: The import/export file name is part of the operating system.

This name is not displayed in the File Name list box. The File name
originally given to the file in the service tool is displayed in the Files
list box. If this file is already located in the Files list box, you are
asked to assign it a new name.
2-31
Connecting to Caterpillar Electronic Technician
Purpose
The Connect function allows you to access a connection, from the
File menu, to initiate data link connection. This function is available
when there is no data link currently active.
When this function is selected, the service tool continues with the
same data link connection procedures used during initial startup of
the application.
When a data link is established, the service tool returns to the main
menu and displays the ECM Summary screen. When a data link
connection is not established, the service tool provides suggested
steps for correcting the problem.
Instructions
To start a connection:
Step 1 Select Connect from the File menu, push the F8 key, or
press the Connect icon from the toolbar (if default is set).
The Connection message box is displayed while the
service tool is attempting to establish communications
with the data link.
When communications are successfully established and

a single ECM is found, the ECM Summary screen is
displayed.
When communications are successfully established and

multiple ECMs are found, the ECM Selector dialog box is
displayed. If the service tool connects to an ECM that is
unsupported by your subscription, the service tool
displays a message and immediately disconnect.
Step 2 Press the “Stop Connect” push-button to cancel all

attempts to communicate with the ECM through the data
link. All functions that require an active data link
connection are disabled. The service tool main screen is
displayed. The status bar is updated with the message
“Disconnected.”
2-32
2-33
2-34
Disconnecting Caterpillar Electronic Technician
Purpose
The Disconnect function allows you to remove the current data link
connection between the service tool and the ECM, and returns you
to the main menu. This function is available when a data link
connection is currently active. All service tool functionality, menus,
and toolbars are updated according to the state of the connection.
Instructions
To disconnect the service tool:
Select Disconnect from the File menu, push the F8 key, or press
the Disconnect icon from the toolbar (if default is set).
Illustration 2-20
2-35
Selecting the ECM
Illustration 2-21 ECM Selector dialog box
Purpose
The Select ECM menu function is only available when there is more
than one ECM connected to the service tool. This function allows you
to select the ECM that the service tool targets as the current ECM.
The service tool's menus and functionality is based on this current
ECM. The name of the current ECM is displayed in the right corner
of the status bar.
Selecting the Select ECM menu function displays the ECM Selector
dialog box. This dialog box displays a list of the ECMs currently
available on the data link. Next to each of the ECM names, in the
Select an ECM list box, there is an icon. If the icon shows a
connection, then the ECM is currently communicating. If the icon
shows a disconnection, then the ECM is not currently
communicating.
Instructions
To select the ECM:
Step 1 Select the Select ECM from the File menu. The ECM
Selector dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration
2-21).
Step 2 Highlight an ECM and press “OK.” As the data is loading

from the ECM, a status bar is displayed.
Press “Cancel” to exit the ECM Selector dialog box.

Press “Help” to open online help for assistance.
2-36
Print Setup
Illustration 2-22: An example of a Print Setup dialog box
Purpose
The Print Setup function displays one of the standard Print Setup
dialog boxes, which allows you to select or change the default
printer. Changing the default printer in this dialog box affects the
default printer for all other applications, including the service tool.
Instructions
To make changes to the printer setup:
Step 1 Select Print Setup... from the File menu. The Print Setup
Step 2 If you want to print to the default printer that has been
setup in your operating system, press the “Default
Printer” radio button. The current default printer is listed
under the Default Printer option. See your PC or printer
manual for information concerning printers.
If you want to print to a different printer press the

“Specific Printer” radio button. Select the printer from the
Specific Printer drop-down list. Only the printers that
have been set up in your operating system are displayed
in this list.
2-37
Step 3 Press the radio button for the desired paper orientation.
Portrait: height is greater than the width.
Landscape: width is greater than the height.
Step 4 Select the paper size to be used from the Size

drop-down list. The drop-down list contains all the paper
size choices for the selected printer.
Step 5 Select the paper source to be used from the Source

drop-down list. The drop-down list contains all the paper
source options available for the selected printer.
Step 6 If you need to make additional technical changes to the

printing environment for the selected printer, press the
“Options” push-button. The Advanced Document
Properties dialog box is displayed. For information on
how to modify the printer environment, consult your PC
or printer manuals.
Within the Advanced Properties dialog box, there is

another “More Options” push-button. Pressing this takes
you to the More Options dialog box.
Note: To connect a printer to a network, press the “Network…”

push-button. The Connect to Printer dialog box is displayed. The
“Network…” push-button is only displayed if your PC is on a network.
Step 7 Press the “OK” push-button. The modifications you have

made in the Print Setup dialog box are saved. Press
“Cancel” to exit the Print Setup without modifying the
printer.
The printer selection made on the Print Setup dialog box

remains in effect for all subsequent reports, until a
different printer is selected.
2-38
Exiting Caterpillar Electronic Technician
Instructions
To exit the service tool:
Step 1 Select Exit from the File menu, push the F9 key, or press
the Exit the Application icon from the toolbar (if default is
set).
Step 2 The “Are you sure…” message box is displayed (Refer

to Illustration 2-23). Press “Yes” to exit the service tool or
“No” to return to the service tool.
2-39
2-40
View Drop-Down Menu
Illustration 3-1: View drop-down menu
Overview
The View drop-down menu functions allow you change the size of
the icons or choose not display the icons on the toolbar. It also
allows you to customize the toolbar and function keys.
The functions available under the View drop-down menu are:
• Toolbar
• Custom
3-1
Changing the Toolbar View
Illustration 3-2: Toolbar menu functions
Purpose
The Toolbar function allows you to change the size of the icons on
the toolbar. The different options available under this menu option
are:
• Large Toolbar
• Small Toolbar
• Hide Toolbar
Instructions
To make toolbar larger:
Select Toolbar from the View menu, and then select Large
Toolbar from the sub-menu. The toolbar is displayed with large
icons.
To make the toolbar smaller:
Select Toolbar from the View menu, and then select Small
Toolbar from the sub-menu. The toolbar is displayed with small
icons.
To remove the toolbar:
Select Toolbar from the View menu, and then select Hide
Toolbar from the sub-menu. The toolbar is removed from the screen.
3-2
Customizing the Toolbar
Illustration 3-3: Toolbar Customization dialog box
Illustration 3-4: Caterpillar Electronic Technician Toolbar in default
Purpose
The Toolbar function allows you to customize the toolbar in the
service tool screen.
Instructions
To customize the toolbar:
Step 1 Select Custom from the View menu, and then select
Toolbar… from the sub-menu. The Toolbar
Customization dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 3-3).
Step 2 Create your toolbar using the push-buttons described

below. When you first enter this dialog box, the top four
push-buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog box are
disabled. Highlighting one of the options in the Toolbar
list box enables all of these push-buttons.
3-3
Note: An icon can only appear on the Toolbar once. The “>”
push-button is disabled when that icon is there.
Step 3 Press “OK” when you are finished creating your

customized toolbar. The program screen shows the
changes you made.

toolbar. Press “Get Default” to set the icons to their
original positions.
Screen Layout
The Toolbar Customization screen has the following areas:
Available Tools
This list box represents the icons that are available in the service
tool.
Toolbar
This list box represents your customized toolbar.
Push-Buttons
> Highlight the icon in the Available Tools list box,
then press the “>” push-button. The icon is in the
Toolbar list box.
< Highlight the icon in the Toolbar list box, then

press the “<” push-button. The icon is in the
Available Tools list box.
To remove a space from the Toolbar list box,

highlight the space and press the “<” push-
button.
Space Before To put a space in before a specific icon in the

toolbar, highlight the icon in the Toolbar list box,
then press the “Space Before” push-button. A
space appears in the Toolbar list box, above the
icon that you highlighted.
Space After To put a space in after a specific icon in the

toolbar, highlight the icon in the Toolbar list box,
then press the “Space After” push-button. A
3-4
space appears in the Toolbar list box, below the
icon that you highlighted.
Up To move an icon up in the order, highlight the

icon in the Toolbar list box, then press the “Up”
push-button.
Down To move an icon down in the order, highlight the

icon in the Toolbar list box, and then press the
“Down” push-button.
3-5
Customizing the Function Keys
Illustration 3-5: Customize Function dialog box in default
Purpose
The Function Keys function allows you to customize the function
keys in the service tool. The function keys are the F “#” keys at the
top of the keyboard.
Note: The F1, F8, and F9 function keys cannot be changed. They
always represent Context Sensitive Help, Connect/Disconnect, and
Exit.
Instructions
To customize the function keys:
Step 1 Select Custom from the View menu, and then select
Function Keys… from the sub-menu. The Customize
Function Keys dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 3-5).
3-6
Step 2 There is a list of drop-down text boxes. Choose an F “#”
text box, and select the service tool function from the
drop-down list that you want to assign to that function
key. The service tool function that you assigned to the
function key is displayed in the text box. Continue to
change the function keys.
Note: You cannot use a service tool function more than once when
assigning them to the function keys.
Step 3 Press “OK” when you have assigned the function keys.
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to save the changes

made to the function keys. Press “Get Defaults” to set
the function keys to their original values. You return to
the last open window.
3-7
3-8
Diagnostics Drop-Down Menu
Illustration 4-1: Diagnostics drop-down menu

Section
Overview 4
The Diagnostics drop-down menu functions allow you to monitor
active and logged diagnostic codes, diagnose the codes for
troubleshooting, run different diagnostic tests, diagnose different
event codes, view the histogram for event codes, and clear any of
the diagnosed codes.
The functions available under the Diagnostics drop-down menu are:
• Active Diagnostic Codes

• Logged Diagnostic Codes
• Diagnostic Tests
• Events
• Reset VIDS Event List
• Input Troubleshooting
4-1
Active Diagnostic Codes
Status Flag Area
Display Area
Illustration 4-2: Active Diagnostic Codes screen
Purpose
The Active Diagnostic Codes function provides information to warn
the vehicle operator of a potential problem and indicates to the
service technician the nature of the problem. The codes that are
diagnosed in this screen are active (occurring as you view them).
Accessing
To run the Active Diagnostic Codes function:
Select Active Diag. Codes from the Diagnostics menu, push the
F3 key (if the default function keys are set), or press the Active
Diagnostic Codes icon from the toolbar (if default is set). The Active
Diagnostic Codes screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-2).
Screen Layout
The Active Diagnostic Codes screen has the following areas:
4-2
Status Flag Area
The service tool displays up to four Status Flag indicators across the
top of the screen. These flags are used to notify you of currently
active conditions, such as Low Oil Pressure, Engine Overspeed, etc.
When a warning condition exists, it is described in the appropriate

flag indicator area. The name of the active ECM is displayed above
the flags.
Display Area
The Active Diagnostic Codes display area has two columns: Code
and Description. The code numbers that appear are used to identify
the diagnostic codes. The Description column informs you of the
problem that is occurring.
Section
The list of codes is grouped according to the ECM from which they 4
are retrieved. The ECM names appear as subtitles in the list. If there
is more than one ECM connected, the subtitles are arranged
alphabetically.
Include All ECMs Check Box

Push-Button
The push-buttons available in the Active Diagnostic Codes screen
are:
• More Info
• Print
Note: The “More Info” push-button is only enabled when diagnostic

procedures are available for that specific code.
Note: See “Printing,” section 1, page 26.
4-3
Logged Diagnostic Codes
Display Area
Illustration 4-3: Logged Diagnostic Codes screen
Purpose
The Logged Diagnostic Codes function provides a list of diagnostic
codes logged by the ECM. These codes are similar to the active
diagnostic codes except they are logged over time.
Accessing
To run the Logged Diagnostic Codes function:
Select Logged Diag. Codes from the Diagnostics menu, push the
F4 key (if the default function keys are set), or press the Logged
Diagnostic Codes icon from the toolbar (if the default is set). The
Logged Diagnostic Codes screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-3).
Screen Layout
The Logged Diagnostic Codes screen has the following areas:
4-4
Display Area
The Logged Diagnostic Codes display area has five columns: Code,
Description, Occ., First, and Last. The code numbers that appear are
used to identify the diagnostic codes. The Description column
informs you of the problem that is occurring. Occ. (occurrences)
column informs you of the number of times that the problem
occurred. The columns marked First and Last indicate the first and
last ECM hour that the problem occurred.
The list of codes is grouped according to the ECM from which they
are retrieved, and they appear ordered chronologically by the most
recent ECM hour of last occurrence. The ECM names appear as
subtitles in the list. On the same line as the ECM subtitle, the number
of ECM diagnostic clock hours is displayed. These hours represent
the time that the ECM has been connected and running. Section
4
Note: For specific gas engines, the time displays in hours, minutes
and seconds.

When the Include All ECMs check box is checked, logged codes
from all available ECMs are retrieved and displayed. When there is a
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Logged Diagnostic Codes screen
are:
• Clear
• More Info
• Print
Note: The “More Info” push-button is only enabled when diagnostic

procedures are available for that specific code.
4-5
Clearing Logged Diagnostic Codes
Purpose
The “Clear” push-button allows you to clear logged diagnostic codes
from the list in the Logged Diagnostic Codes screen.
Instructions
To clear a logged diagnostic code:
Step 1 Highlight one of the logged diagnostic codes from the list
on the Logged Diagnostic Codes screen. This enables
the “Clear” push-button.
Step 2 Press the “Clear” push-button. The “Are you sure…”

Step 3 Press “Yes” to clear the selected code or “No” not to.
You return to the Logged Diagnostic Codes screen.
4-6
Diagnostic Tests
Illustration 4-5: Example of the Diagnostics Tests menu functions

Section
Overview 4
The Diagnostic Tests function allows you to perform a number of
diagnostic tests on the currently selected ECM. Under the Diagnostic
Tests menu option, a sub-menu allows you to choose the specific
test you want to open.
Diagnostic Tests functions currently available on various applications

are:
• Auto Retarder Test

• Compression Brake Solenoid Test
• Cylinder Cutout Test
• End Line Relief Tests
• Engine Speed Test
• Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test
• Injection Actuation Pressure Test
• Injector Solenoid Test
• Main Implement Relief Test
• Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test
• Misfire Detection Test
• Override Parameters Test
• Power Shift Pressure Test
• Special Tests
• System Troubleshooting Settings
• Traction Aid Brake Test
• Transmission Stall Test
• Variable Speed Fan Test (Option B)
• Other Track Type Excavator Hydraulic Tests
4-7
Auto Retarder Test
Display
Area
Status
Parameter Area
Status Line
Illustration 4-6: Auto Retarder Test screen
Purpose
The Auto Retarder Test function allows you verify the operation of
the Auto Retarder Control (ARC) system while the machine is
stationary. The ARC outputs are activated and monitored for correct
operation.
Accessing
To run the Auto Retarder Test function:
Select Diagnostic Tests from the Diagnostics menu, and then

select Auto Retarder Test from the sub-menu. The Auto Retarder
Test screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-6).
Screen Layout
The Auto Retarder Test screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Auto Retarder Test display area has three columns: Description,
Required Condition, and Actual Value. The Description column gives
4-8
the name of the parameter set to run the test. The Required
Condition column displays the value that the parameter must have in
order to run the test. The Actual Value column displays the actual
value of the required condition parameters.
Status Parameter Area

The Auto Retarder Test status parameter area lists the required
parameters and their current values: ARC Control Solenoid and ARC
Pressure Switch Status. The ARC Control Solenoid displays the
position in percentage of the ARC Control Solenoid. The ARC
Pressure Switch Status displays if the status is “High” or “Low.”
Status Line
The Auto Retarder Test status line displays if the test is “On” or “Off.”
Section
Push-Buttons 4
The push-buttons available in the Auto Retarder screen are:
• Start
• Stop
4-9
Starting the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to begin the Auto Retarder Test.
Instructions
To start the Auto Retarder test:
Press the “Start” push-button. The status line that informs you
that the Auto Retarder Test is “On.”
Note: The “Start” push-button is disabled until the test is stopped.
4-10
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the Auto Retarder test.
Instructions
To stop the Auto Retarder test:
Press the “Stop” push-button. The status line informs you that
the Auto Retarder Test is “Off.”
Note: The “Stop” push-button is disabled until the “Start” push-button

is pressed again. Section
4
4-11
Compression Brake Solenoid Test
Display
Area
Illustration 4-7: Compression Brake Solenoid screen
Purpose
The Compression Brake Solenoid Test function allows you to find
brake wiring or solenoid problems when the engine is not running.
This test does not verify proper brake valve actuation.
Accessing
To run the Compression Brake Solenoid Test function:

select Compression Brake Solenoid Test from the sub-menu. The
Compression Brake Solenoid Test screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-7).
Screen Layout
The Compression Brake Solenoid Test screen has the following
areas:
4-12
Display Area
The Compression Brake Solenoid Test display area has two
columns: Compression Brake and Mode. The Compression Brake
column lists the different brake solenoid numbers available. The
Mode column displays the status of the brake solenoid being tested.
The test results are shown as “Open,” “Short,” or “Done.”
Test Results: Description:

Done If the compression brake solenoid test is
complete
Open If the compression brake solenoid is an open
circuit
Short If the compression brake solenoid is short a
circuit Section
4
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Compression Brake Solenoid Test
screen are:
• Test
• Test All
• Stop
• Print
4-13
Testing a Compression Brake Solenoid
Purpose
The “Test” push-button allows you to start an individual test on one
compression brake solenoid.
Instructions
To test a compression brake solenoid:
Highlight the compression brake solenoid that you want to test,

then press the “Test” push-button. The Mode column first displays
the word “Testing,” informing you that the test is being performed.
Once the service tool has finished the test, the test result is
displayed in the Mode column, whether the result is “Open,” “Short,”
or “Done.”
Note: After the “Test” push-button is pressed, it becomes disabled

until the test is done.
4-14
Testing All of the Compression Brake Solenoids
Purpose:
The “Test All” push-button allows you to start the test on all of the
compression brake solenoids, at one time.
Instructions
To test all compression brake solenoids:
Press the “Test All” push-button. The service tool automatically

tests each compression brake solenoid one at a time starting with
Brake Solenoid 1. The Mode column first displays the word “Testing,”
informing you that the test is being performed. Once the service tool Section
has finished the test, a result of “Open,” “Short,” or “Done” is 4
displayed in the Mode column. The test continues until all the
compression brake solenoids displayed on the screen are tested.
Note: After the “Testing All” push-button is pressed it becomes

disabled until the test is done.
4-15
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the Compression Brake
Solenoid Test.
Instructions
To stop a test:
Pressing the “Stop” push-button instantly stops a test for one or

more compression brake solenoids. The results remain in the Mode
column for the tests completed before the “Stop” push-button was
pressed.
Note: The “Stop” push-button is disabled when a test is not in

progress. It becomes enabled when either the “Test” or “Test All”
push-button is pressed.
4-16
Cylinder Cutout Test: CAT Data Link
Display
Section
Area
4
Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 4-8: Cylinder Cutout: CDL screen
Purpose
The Cylinder Cutout function allows you to perform a test to verify
that the injectors are working. This process involves cutting out and
re-powering a particular cylinder. It also monitors the other cylinders
to see if their fuel position increases, as it should. If the fuel position
does not increase, then the cut out cylinder was not working before
cutting it out.
Accessing
To run the Cylinder Cutout function:

select Cylinder Cutout Test from the sub-menu. The Cylinder Cutout
screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-8).
Screen Layout
The Cylinder Cutout screen has the following areas:
4-17
Display Area
The Cylinder Cutout display area has three columns: Cylinder, Mode,
and Fuel Position. The Cylinder column lists the different cylinder
numbers available. The Mode column displays the status of the
cylinder being tested and shows if the cylinder is “Powered” or
“Cutout.” The Fuel Position (Injector Duration) column displays how
much fuel is flowing through the injector.

The Cylinder Cutout status parameter area displays parameter
values received from the current ECM. This area is located at the
right side of the screen. The parameters that are displayed in this
particular test are Engine Speed, Injection Duration, and Fuel
Position.
Note: Warnings may appear at the bottom right side of the screen.
Different flags are displayed, depending on the ECM that the service
tool has targeted as the current ECM.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Cylinder Cutout screen are:
• Change
• Power All
• Start
• Stop
• Print
4-18
Changing the State of the Cylinder
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the mode of the
selected cylinder. Changing the modes allows you to run tests on the
cylinders by cutting out then re-powering a cylinder.
Instructions
To change the state of the cylinder:
Highlight the Cylinder that you want to change then press the
“Change” push-button. The mode changes. You can press the
“Change” push-button again to switch it back. Section
4
Note: More than one parameter can have the same mode at one
time.
4-19
Powering All the Cylinders
Purpose
The “Power All” push-button returns all cylinders to the powered
state.
Instructions
To return all cylinders to the powered mode:
Press the “Power All” push-button. All of the cylinders become

powered.
Note: When one or more cylinder is cutout this push-button becomes

enabled.
4-20
Starting the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to start the test operation. Press
the “Start” push-button and watch the program run the test itself.
Once the test is finished, you can analyze the data to determine if all
of the cylinders are running effectively.
Instructions
To start the test:
Press the “Start” push-button. The automatic testing process

begins. Below is an example of the automatic test process: Section
4
First, the program powers all of the injectors. Then, it cuts
out Cylinder 1. There are messages that are displayed,
under the Fuel Position column, as the test
progresses. These messages are “Waiting,”
“Sampling,” and then the averaged fuel position
value. Once the fuel position value is recorded, the
test continues on to Cylinder 2, etc. The averaged
values remain under the Fuel Position column, for
you to analyze.
Note: The “Start” push-button is disabled until either the “Stop”

push-button is pressed or the test is done.
The “Change” push-button is disabled once the “Start” push-button is

pressed. It becomes enabled when either the “Stop” push-button is
pressed or the test is done.
4-21
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to end the Cylinder Cutout test.
Instructions
To stop the test:
Press the “Stop” push-button. The message “Test Terminated” is

displayed under the Fuel Position column, next to the cylinder
number the test was running on before it was terminated.

is pressed again.
4-22
Cylinder Cutout Test: 3126 HEUI
Display
Area
Section
4
Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 4-9: Cylinder Cutout: 3126 HEUI screen (On Highway Truck)
Purpose
that the injectors are working. This process involves cutting out and
re-powering a particular cylinder. It also monitors the other cylinders
to see if their fuel position increases, as it should. If the fuel position
does not increase, then the cut out cylinder was not working before
cutting it out.
In this example, Fuel Position is used. For some products, Delivered

Fuel Volume replaces Fuel Position.
!WARNING!
DO NOT PROCEED WITH THIS TEST UNLESS YOU

HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THE FOLLOWING
INSTRUCTIONS AND WARNINGS. FAILURE TO
FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OR HEED THE
WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.
4-23
Accessing

Screen Layout
Display Area
and Fuel Position or Delivered Fuel Volume. The Cylinder column
lists the different cylinder numbers available. The Mode column
displays the status of the cylinder being tested and shows if the
cylinder is “Powered” or “Cutout.” The Fuel Position or Delivered
Fuel Volume column displays how much fuel is flowing through the
injector.

The Cylinder Cutout status parameter area displays four parameter
right side of the screen. The parameters that are displayed in this
particular test may include Engine Speed, Fuel Position, Delivered
Fuel Volume, Engine Coolant Temperature, and Cooling Fan, or
Engine Fan Speed. These parameters vary to specific products.
Push-Buttons
• Change
• Power All
• Start/Stop
• Results
• Print
4-24
Purpose
Instructions
4
time.
4-25
Purpose
state.
Instructions
Press the “Power All” push-button. All of the cylinders becomes

powered.
Note: When one or more cylinder is cutout, the “Power All”

push-button becomes enabled.
4-26
Starting the Test
Section
4
Illustration 4-10: Test Conditions screen (On Highway Truck)
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to start the test operation. Once
the test is finished, you can analyze the data to determine if all of the
cylinders are running effectively.
Instructions
To start the test:
Step 1 Press the “Start” push-button. The automatic testing

process begins and the Test Conditions screen is
Note: The “Start” push-button is replaced with the “Stop” push-button

until the “Stop” push-button is pushed or the test is done.
Step 2 When the service conditions are met, press the

“Continue>>” push-button to begin the test. If the
conditions are not met, the Test Aborted screen is
displayed.
4-27
Press the “<<Back” push-button to return to the Cylinder
Cutout screen. Press the “Print” push-button to Print to
File, Print to Printer, or Print Preview.
Note: This test will not run unless all test conditions are met.
Step 3 If the test conditions are met, and the cooling fan is
controlled by the ECM, a WARNING message box is
Illustration 4-11: Cooling Fan Warning message box
Press “OK” to continue the test, or press “Stop” to abort

the test without turning the cooling fan on. If you press
"OK," you return to the Cylinder Cutout screen in the
Automatic Mode (Refer to Illustration 4-12).
4-28
Section
4
Illustration 4-12: Cylinder Cutout screen in Automatic Mode (On Highway

Truck)
The test cycles three times. A progress bar is displayed

in the lower right corner. When the test is complete, the
Test Completed dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Press “OK.” You return to the Cylinder Cutout screen.
4-29
Testing Results
Illustration 4-13: Cylinder Cutout Test Results screen (On Highway Truck)
Purpose
The Cylinder Cutout Test Result function displays the test results in
detail. The Cylinder column lists the cylinder numbers available. The
Status column displays the actual status from the system average.
Instructions
To see the details of the test:
Step 1 Press the “Results” push-button from the Cylinder Cutout

screen. The Cylinder Cutout Test Results screen is
Note: The “Results” push-button is enabled only after the automatic

Cylinder Cutout test has run.
Step 2 Press the “Show Details” push-button to view more test

result details for each cylinder (Refer to Illustration 4-14).
4-30
Section
4
Illustration 4-14: Cylinder Cutout Detailed Test Result screen (On Highway
Truck)

Note: The “Show Details” push-button is replaced with the “Hide

Details” push-button to return to the Cylinder Cutout Test Results
screen.
Step 3 Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen
to view the individual Test Cycle Results, the Cycle Test
Average, and the Status.
4-31
Cylinder Cutout Test:
C-10/C-12/C-15/C-16/3406E/3176B (On Highway Truck)
3176B/3176C/3196/3406E (Marine)
Challenger 75 and 85
Display
Area
Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 4-15: Cylinder Cutout: EUI screen
Purpose
The Cylinder Cutout function allows you to perform an automated
one, four, or five cylinder cutout test to verify that the injectors are
working. This process involves cutting out and re-powering a
particular cylinder. It also monitors the other cylinders to see if their
fuel position increases, as it should. If the fuel position does not
increase, then the cut out cylinder was not working before cutting it
out.
!WARNING!

4-32
Accessing

Screen Layout
Display Area
and Fuel Position. The Cylinder column lists the different cylinder
numbers available. The Mode column displays the status of the
Section
cylinder being tested and shows if the cylinder is “Powered” or
4
“Cutout.” The Fuel Position column displays how much fuel is flowing
through the injector.

right side of the screen. The parameters displayed in this particular
test are Engine Speed, Fuel Position, Engine Coolant Temperature,
and Cooling Fan Status.
Push-Buttons
• Change
• Power All
• Start/Stop
• Results
• Print
4-33
Purpose
Instructions
“Change” push-button again to switch it back.
time.
4-34
Purpose
state.
Instructions

powered.
Note: When one or more cylinder is cutout, the “Power All” Section
push-button becomes enabled. 4
4-35
Starting the Test
Illustration 4-16: Select Cylinder Cutout Test dialog box
Purpose
Instructions
To start the test:

process begins and the Select Cylinder Cutout Test

Step 2 Press the radio button for desired cylinder cutout test in
the Select Cylinder Cutout Test dialog box. There are
hints to help you choose your test.
4-36
Step 3 Press “Continue>>” to continue with the test. The Test
Conditions screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-
17).
Section
4
Illustration 4-17: Test Conditions screen


displayed.

controlled by the ECM, a WARNING message box is
4-37
Press “OK” to continue the test, or press “Stop” to abort

the test without turning the cooling fan on. If you press
"OK," you return to the Cylinder Cutout screen in the
Automatic Mode (Refer to Illustration 4-19).
Illustration 4-19: Cylinder Cutout screen in Automatic Mode
The test cycles two times. A progress bar is displayed in

the lower right corner. When the test is complete, the
Test Completed dialog box is displayed.
4-38
Testing Results
Section
4
Illustration 4-20: Cylinder Cutout Test Results screen
Purpose
Status column displays the actual status from the system average.
Instructions



4-39
Illustration 4-21: Cylinder Cutout Detailed Test Result screen


screen.
Step 3 Use the horizontal scroll bar, at the bottom of the screen,
Average, and the Status.
4-40
Cylinder Cutout Test: 3500 EUI
Display
Area
Section
4
Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 4-22: Cylinder Cutout: 3500 EUI screen
Purpose
that the injectors are working properly. This process involves cutting
out and re-powering a particular cylinder. It also monitors the other
cylinders to see if their injection duration increases, as it should. If
the injection duration does not increase, then the cut out cylinder
was not working properly before cutting it out. This test allows you to
cut out cylinders manually or automatically.
!WARNING!

4-41
Accessing

Screen Layout
Display Area
and Injection Duration. The Cylinder column lists the different
cylinder numbers available. The Mode column displays the status of
the cylinder being tested and shows if the cylinder is “Powered” or
“Cutout.” The Injection Duration column displays how much fuel is
flowing through the injector.

right side of the screen. The parameters displayed in this particular
test are Engine Speed, Injection Duration, Engine Coolant
Temperature, and Engine Fan Bypass.
Push-Buttons
• Change
• Power All
• Start/Stop
• Results
• Print
4-42
Purpose
Instructions
4
time.
4-43
Purpose
state.
Instructions

powered.

4-44
Starting the Test
Purpose
Instructions
To start the test:

process begins and the Test Conditions screen is
displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-23). Section
4
Illustration 4-23: Test Conditions screen

displayed.
4-45
Note: Engine speed automatically adjusts to meet the test condition.
Note: If the engine is in dyno mode, the service tool ignores the
parking brake and transmission test conditions.

controlled by the ECM, the Cooling Fan WARNING
Step 4 Press “OK” to continue the test, or press “Stop” to abort

the test without turning the cooling fan on. If the engine
speed in controlled by the ECM and if you press "OK,"
the Desired Engine Speed WARNING message box is
Illustration 4-25: Desired Engine Speed Warning message box
Step 5 Press “OK” to continue the test, or press “Stop” to abort

the test without increasing the engine speed. If you
4-46
press "OK," you return to the Cylinder Cutout screen in
the Automatic Mode (Refer to Illustration 4-26).
Note: Pressing "Stop" displays the manual Cylinder Cutout Test

screen. (Refer to Illustration 4-22).
Section
4
The test cycles two times. A progress bar is displayed in

the lower right corner. When the test is complete, the
Test Complete dialog box is displayed.
4-47
Testing Results
Illustration 4-27: Cylinder Cutout Test Results screen
Purpose
Injector Status column displays the actual status of the injector.
Instructions



4-48
Section
4
Illustration 4-28: Cylinder Cutout Detailed Test Result screen


screen.
Step 3 Use the horizontal scroll bar, at the bottom of the screen,
Average, and the Injector Status.
4-49
Cylinder Cutout Test: 797 Tandem Engine
Display
Area
Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 4-29: Cylinder Cutout: 797 Tandem Engines screen
Purpose
that the injectors are working properly. This process involves cutting
out and re-powering a particular cylinder. It also monitors the other
cylinders to see if their injection duration increases, as it should. If
the injection duration does not increase, then the cut out cylinder
was not working before cutting it out. This test allows you to cut out
cylinders manually or automatically.
Accessing
Step 1 Select either the Front or Rear Engine Module ECM from
the ECM Selector dialog box.
Step 2 Select Diagnostic Tests from the Diagnostics menu, and

then select Cylinder Cutout Test from the sub-menu. The
Cylinder Cutout screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration
4-29).
4-50
Note: If the service tool does not detect all three ECMs (Rear Engine
Module, Front Engine Module, and Master Engine) the Cylinder
Cutout Test (CAT Data Link) is displayed.
Screen Layout
Display Area
and Injection Duration. The Cylinder column lists the different
“Cutout.” The Injection Duration column displays the time required to
deliver a specific amount of fuel.
Section
Status Parameter Area 4
values. This area is located at the right side of the screen. The
parameters displayed in this particular test are Engine Speed,
Injection Duration, Fuel Position, and Engine Coolant Temperature.
Status Box
If the engine is in cold mode, a status box displays “Cold Mode” in
the lower right corner.
Push-Buttons
• Change
• Power All
• Start/Stop
• Print
4-51
Illustration 4-30: Cylinder Cutout screen in “Manual” mode
Purpose
cylinders by cutting out then re-powering a cylinder. This “manual”
version of the Cylinder Cutout Test provides you the ability to cutout
cylinders individually.
Instructions
Note: More than one cylinder can be cutout at one time.
4-52
Purpose
state.
Instructions

powered.
Note: When one or more cylinder is cutout, the “Power All” Section
push-button becomes enabled. 4
4-53
Starting the Test
Illustration 4-31: Cylinder Cutout Test dialog box
Purpose
Instructions
To start the test:

process begins and the Select Cylinder Cutout Test
4-54
Section
4
Illustration 4-32: Select Cylinder Cutout Test screen
Step 2 Select the radio button for the desired Engine Module
Cylinder Cutout Test in the Select Cylinder Cutout Test
screen.
Step 3 Press “Continue>>” to continue with the test. Press the

“<<Back” push-button to return to the “manual” version
of the Cylinder Cutout Test.
Step 4: If the engine is not at a stable temperature a Warning

Illustration 4-33: Warning message box
Press “Yes” to continue, or “No” to return to the “manual”

version of the Cylinder Cutout Test. After pressing
“Continue>>,” you return to the Cylinder Cutout screen in
the Automatic Mode (Refer to Illustration 4-34).
4-55
The “Stop” push-button displays when the automatic test

is running allowing you to terminate the test.
Step 5 When the test is complete, the Test Completed dialog

box is displayed. Press “OK.” You return to the Cylinder
Cutout screen.
Once the test is finished, you can analyze the data to

determine if all of the cylinders are running effectively.
The “Restart” push-button allows you to restart the test
operation.
4-56
End Line Relief Test
Status Parameter
Area
Status Line
Section
4
Instruction
Area
Illustration 4-35: End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests screen
Purpose
The End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests function adjusts the relief
pressure on specific valves. These tests set a specific range of
pressure necessary to activate the relief valves.
Accessing
To run the End Line Relief Test:

then select End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests from the
sub-menu. A warning message box is displayed. Press
“OK.” The Select Components to Test dialog box is
4-57
Illustration 4-36: Select Components to Test dialog box
Step 2 Check/Uncheck which valves you want to test by clicking

on the relief valve check boxes. By default, all the valves
are checked.
Step 3 Press the “Begin” push-button. The End Line Relief

Diagnostic Tests screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-35).
Screen Layout
The End Line Relief Test screen has the following areas:

The End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests status parameter area lists the
required parameters and their current values: Parking Brake,
Steering/Trans Lock Switch, Engine Speed, and Hydraulic Oil
Temperature.
Status Line
The End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests status line is located in the
center of the screen. It displays messages regarding the process of
the diagnostic test.
Instruction Area
The End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests instruction area describes the
step-by-step procedure for the diagnostic test. The step you need to
perform is dark; all other steps are gray.
4-58
Push-buttons
The push-buttons available in the End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests
screen are:
• Next>
• Cancel
Section
4
4-59
Continuing the Test
Purpose
The “Next>” push-button allows you to work through the step-by-step
procedures of the End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests.
Instructions
To run the End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests:
Step 1 Once the first condition is met, press the “Next>”

push-button. When the condition is met, the service tool
places a check mark in the box to the left of the
completed step.
If the condition is not met, the service tool responds by

staying at that step.
Step 2 Continue to do each step. The Status Line aids with

each step. As each step is completed, the service tool
places a check mark in the box and darkens the next
step.
Step 3 When the final step is completed the service tool selects
the next test checked in the Select Components to Test
dialog box. When all the tests are complete, the End
Line Relief Diagnostic Tests status box is displayed with
the results of each test (Refer to Illustration 4-37).
Illustration 4-37: End Line Relief Diagnostic Tests status box
4-60
Step 4 Press “Restart” to return to the End Line Relief
Diagnostic Tests screen. Press “Cancel” to exit the End
Line Relief status box and return to the service tool.
Section
4
4-61
Canceling the Test
Illustration 4-38: Main Implement Relief Test screen
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the current component
test being run.
Instructions
To cancel the test:
Press the “Cancel” push-button. The status line informs you that
the Service Test was unsuccessful (Refer to Illustration 4-38). You
are instructed to select another option in the service tool.
4-62
Engine Speed Test
Status Line
Instruction
Area
Control Area
Section
4
Illustration 4-39: Engine Speed Test screen
Purpose
The Engine Speed Test function allows you to change the engine
speed, except for the high and low idle. This function is useful to
measure noise level.
Accessing
To run the Engine Speed Test function:
Select Diagnostics Test from the Diagnostics menu, and then

select Engine Speed Test from the sub-menu. The Engine Speed
Screen Layout
The Engine Speed Test screen has the following areas:
Status Line
The Engine Speed Test status line displays messages regarding the
process of the diagnostic test.
4-63
Instruction Area
The Engine Speed Test instruction area describes the step-by-step
procedure for the diagnostic test.
Control Area
The Engine Speed control area allows you to increase or decrease
the engine speed. The horizontal slide bar shows you the parameter
range. The engine speed value is above the slide bar. The
parameter reference numbers are to the left and right of the slide
bar. A vertical slider indicates where the current value falls. The
buttons used in this area are:
• <<button – decreases the engine speed rapidly

• <button – decreases the engine speed
• >button – increases the engine speed
• >>button – increases the engine speed rapidly
Note: These arrow buttons vary the engine speed. The single arrow
buttons change the speed by 20 RPM. The double arrow buttons
change the speed by one speed dial setting.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Engine Speed Test screen are:
• Start
• Stop
• Begin Sweep
• End Sweep
4-64
Starting/ Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to start the Engine Speed Test.
The “Stop” push-button allows you to end the test operation.
Instructions
To start the test:
Step 1 Make sure the engine is running. Press the “Start”

push-button. The Engine Speed Test begins.
Section
Step 2 You can manipulate the Engine Speed manually with the 4
arrow buttons underneath the slider bars.
Note: After this push-button is pressed, it becomes disabled until the

test is stopped.
To stop the test:
Press the “Stop” push-button. The Engine Speed Test ends. If

the “Stop” push-button is pressed before the “End Sweep” push-
button, the test aborts and the status line reads “Service Test
Unsuccessful.”
Note: This push-button is disabled until the test is started.
4-65
Beginning/Ending the Sweep
Purpose
The “Begin Sweep” push-button sweeps the engine speed through a
range automatically.
The “End Sweep” push-button stops the sweeping of the engine

speed.
Instructions
To begin the sweep:
Press the “Begin Sweep” push-button. The sweep begins at the

high idle side (right side), then sweep down to the low idle side (left
side). The status line reads “Test Active.” This sweeping continues
until the “End Sweep” push-button is pressed.
Note: The “Begin Sweep” push-button is disabled until the “End

Sweep” push-button is pressed.
To end the sweep:
Press the “End Sweep” push-button. The sweeping of the engine

speed stops. The status line reads “Service Test Successful.”
Note: The “End Sweep” push-button is disabled until the sweep is

started.
4-66
Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Section
Area 4
Illustration 4-40: Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test screen
Purpose
The Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test function allows you to
perform mechanical hydraulic test procedures. This could include
checking and setting the relief pressures and measuring function
times.
!WARNING!
ALL ADVANCED IMPLEMENT CONTROL FEATURES

WILL BE TURNED OFF IN THIS SERVICE MODE.
Accessing
To run the Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test:

then select the Implement Hydraulic Service Mode from
the sub-menu. A warning message box is displayed
4-67
Illustration 4-41: Warning message box
Step 2 Press "OK." The Implement Hydraulic Service Mode

Screen Layout
The Implement Hydraulic Service Mode screen has the following
areas:

The Implement Hydraulic Service Mode status parameter area lists
the required parameters needed for the test and their current values.
Status Line
The Implement Hydraulic Service Mode status line is located in the
the diagnostic test.
Instruction Area
The Implement Hydraulic Service Mode instruction area describes
the step-by-step procedure for the diagnostic test. The step you need
to perform is dark; all other steps are gray.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Implement Hydraulic Service Mode
screen are:
• Next>
• Cancel/Restart
4-68
Continuing the Test
Purpose
procedures of the Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test.
Instructions
To run the Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test:
Step 1 Once the first setup condition is met, press the “Next>”
completed step. Section
4

step.
Step 3 When the final step is completed, the Implement

Hydraulic Service Mode status box is displayed with the
results of the test. A status line is located in the bottom
of the screen. It displays messages regarding the status
of the diagnostic test selected.
Press “Finish” to exit the Implement Hydraulic Service

Mode status box and return to the service tool. Press
"Restart" to return to the Implement Hydraulic Service
Mode screen.
4-69
Canceling the Test
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the Implement Hydraulic
Service Mode Test.
Instructions
To cancel the test:
Step 1 Press the “Cancel” push-button. The status line informs

you that the Test was unsuccessful. The Implement
Hydraulic Service Mode status screen is displayed.
Step 2 Press "Restart" return to the Implement Hydraulic

Service Mode Test screen. Press "Finish" to exit the
Implement Hydraulic Service Mode Test status box and
return to the service tool.
4-70
Injection Actuation Pressure Test
Setup Condition
Status Area
Parameter Area
Section
4
Status Line
Illustration 4-42: Injection Actuation Pressure Test screen
Purpose
The Injection Actuation Pressure Test function checks for leaks on all
hydraulic components. This test allows you to change the desired
pressure and then view the actual pressure results.
Accessing
To run the Injection Actuation Pressure Test function:

select Injection Actuation Pressure Test from the sub-menu. The
Injection Actuation Pressure Test screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-42).
Screen Layout
The Injection Actuation Pressure Test screen has the following
areas:
4-71
Setup Condition Area
The Injection Actuation Pressure Test setup condition area has three
columns: Description, Required Condition, and Actual Value. The
Description column gives the name of the parameter set to run the
test. The Required Condition column displays the value that the
parameter must have in order to run the test. The Actual Value
column displays the actual value of the required condition
parameters.

The Injection Actuation Pressure Test status parameter area lists the
required parameters and their current values: Injection Actuation
Pressure, Desired Injection Actuation, and Injection Actuation Output
(ATA) or Injector Actuation Current (CAT Data Link). The Injection
Actuation Output (ATA) or Injector Actuation Current (CAT Data Link)
status column displays the percentage of current driving the pressure
flow.
Status Line
The Injector Actuation Pressure Test status line displays if the test is
“On” or “Off.”
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Injection Actuation Pressure Test
screen are:
• Start
• Stop
• Step Up
• Step Down
4-72
Starting the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to begin the Injection Actuation
Pressure Test.
Instructions
To start the Injection Actuation Pressure test:
Press the “Start” push-button. The status line informs you that
the Injector Actuation Test is “On.”
Note: The “Start” push-button is disabled until the “Stop” push-button Section
is pressed. 4
4-73
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop testing for the Injection
Actuation Pressure test.
Instructions
To stop the Injection Actuation Pressure test:
the Injector Actuation Test is “Off.”

is pressed again.
4-74
Stepping Up the Desired Pressure
Purpose
The “Step Up” push-button allows you to increase the desired
pressure of the injection actuation pressure system. This push-button
may or may not be available based on the current ECM.
Instructions
To increase the desired pressure of the system:
Once the test has started, press the “Step Up” push-button.
Notice that the Desired Injection Actuation pressure value increases
each time that you press the “Step Up” push-button. Once the value Section
is at its maximum, the “Step Up” push-button becomes disabled until 4
you step down the value.
4-75
Stepping Down the Desired Pressure
Purpose
The “Step Down” push-button allows you to decrease the pressure of
the injection actuation pressure system. This push-button may or
may not be available based on the current ECM.
Instructions
To decrease the pressure of the system:
Once the test has started, press the “Step Down” push-button.
Notice that the Desired Injection Actuation pressure value decreases
each time that you press the “Step Down” push-button. Once the
value is at its minimum value, the “Step Down” push-button becomes
disabled until you step up the value.
4-76
Injector Solenoid Test (ATA)
Display
Area
Section
4
Illustration 4-43: Injector Solenoid Test (ATA) screen
Purpose
The Injector Solenoid Test function allows you to verify operation of
the injector solenoid on one or all cylinders at the same time. This
test is used to monitor the different injectors when you have an
American Trucking Association (ATA) connection.
Accessing
To run the Injector Solenoid Test:

select Injector Solenoid Test from the sub-menu. The Injector
Solenoid Test screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-43).
Screen Layout
The Injector Solenoid Test screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Injector Solenoid Test display area has three columns: Cylinder,
Mode, and Test Result. The Cylinder column lists the different
4-77
“Cutout.” The Test Result column displays the information, whether
they are “Open,” “Short,” or “OK,” from cutting out and powering the
cylinders.
Push Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Injector Solenoid Test screen are:
• Change
• Power All
• Start
• Stop
• Print
4-78
Purpose
selected cylinder.
Instructions
Section
Note: The “Change” push-button is enabled at all times. 4
4-79
Powering All Cylinders
Purpose
state.
Instructions
Press the “Power All” push-button.

4-80
Starting the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to start the test on all of the
powered cylinders.
Instructions
To start the test:
Press the “Start” push-button. The testing procedure begins. The

result of the test (for all powered cylinders “Open,” “Short,” or “OK”)
is displayed, under the Test Result column as the test progresses
through the operation. Section
4
Note: After the “Start” push-button is pressed, it becomes disabled
until the test is stopped.
4-81
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the Injector Solenoid test.
Instructions
To stop the test:
Press the “Stop” push-button.
Note: After the “Stop” push-button is pressed, it is disabled until you

restart the test. You can stop the test at any point during the testing
process.
4-82
Injector Solenoid Test (CAT Data Link)
Display
Area
Section
4
Illustration 4-44: Injector Solenoid Test (CAT Data Link) screen
Purpose
The Injector Solenoid Test function allows you to verify operation of
the injector solenoid on one or all cylinders at the same time. This
test is used to monitor the different injectors when you have a CAT
Data Link (CDL) connection.
Accessing
To run the Injector Solenoid Test:

select Injector Solenoid Test from the sub-menu. The Injector
Solenoid Test screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-44).
Screen Layout
The Injector Solenoid Test screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Injector Solenoid Test display area has two columns: Cylinder
and Mode. The Cylinder column lists the different cylinder numbers
4-83
available. The Mode column displays the status of the cylinder being
tested from cutting out to powering. The test results are shown as
“Open,” “Short,” or “Done.”
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Injector Solenoid Test screen are:
• Test
• Test All
• Stop
• Print
4-84
Testing a Cylinder
Purpose
The “Test” push-button allows you to start an individual test on one
cylinder.
Instructions
To test the cylinder:
Highlight the cylinder that you want to test, then press the “Test”
push-button. The Mode column first displays the word “Testing,”
informing you that the test is being performed. Once the service tool
has finished the test, the test result is displayed in the Mode column, Section
whether the result is “Open,” “Short,” or “Done.” 4
Note: After the “Test” push-button is pressed, it becomes disabled

until the test is done or an error has occurred.
4-85
Testing All of the Cylinders
Purpose:
The “Test All” push-button allows you to start the Injector Solenoid
Test on all of the cylinders, at one time.
Instructions
To test all cylinders:
Press the “Test All” push-button. The service tool automatically

runs through each cylinder one at a time starting with Cylinder 1. The
Mode column first displays the word “Testing,” informing you that the
test is being performed. Once the service tool has finished the test, a
result of “Open,” “Short,” or “Done” is displayed in the Mode column.
It then continues to Cylinder 2 until all the cylinders displayed on the
screen are tested.
Note: After the “Testing All” push-button is pressed it becomes

disabled until the test is done, or an error has occurred.
4-86
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the Injector Solenoid test.
Instructions
To stop a test:
Pressing the “Stop” push-button instantly stops a test for one or

more cylinders. The results remain in the Mode column for the tests
completed before the “Stop” push-button was pressed.
Note: The “Stop All” push-button is disabled when a test is not in Section
progress. It becomes enabled when either the “Test” or “Test All” 4
4-87
Main Implement Relief Test
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Purpose
The Main Implement Relief Test function adjusts the main relief valve
pressure.
Accessing
To run the Main Implement Relief Test:
Select Diagnostics Tests from the Diagnostics menu, and then

select Main Implement Relief Test from the sub-menu. The Main
Implement Relief Test screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-45).
Screen Layout
The Main Implement Relief Test screen has the following areas:

The Main Implement Relief Test status parameter area lists the
required parameters and their current values: Parking Brake,
Steering/Trans Lock Switch, Engine Speed, and Hydraulic Oil
Temperature.
4-88
Status Line
The Main Implement Relief Test status line is located in the center of
the screen. It displays messages regarding the process of the
diagnostic test.
Instruction Area
The Main Implement Relief Test instruction area describes the
Push-buttons
The push-buttons available in the Main Implement Relief Test screen
are:
Section
• Next> 4
• Cancel/Restart
4-89
Continuing the Test
Purpose
procedures of the Main Implement Relief Test.
Instructions
To run the Main Implement Relief Test:
Step 1 Once the first condition is met, press the “Next>”

completed step.


step.
4-90
Step 3 When the final step is complete, the “Cancel”
push-button changes to the “Restart” push-button (Refer
to Illustration 4-46).
Section
4
4-91
Canceling the Test
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the Main Implement
Relief Test.
Instructions
To cancel the test:
the Service Test was unsuccessful. The “Cancel” push-button
changes to the “Restart” push-button (Refer to Illustration 4-47).
4-92
Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test
Status Parameter
Area
Status Line
Section
4
Instruction
Area
Illustration 4-48: Main/Tilt Pump Relief Diagnostic Test
Purpose
The Main/Tilt Pump Relief Diagnostic Test Function allows you to
detect the highest constant pressure for each system. These
diagnostic tests set a pressure necessary to activate the relief
valves.
Accessing
To run the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Diagnostic Test:

then select Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check from the
sub-menu. The Select Components to Test dialog box is
4-93
Illustration 4-49: Select Components to Test dialog box
Step 2 Check/Uncheck which valves you want to test by clicking

on the relief valve check boxes. By default, all the valves
are checked.
Step 3 Press the “Begin” push-button. The Main/Tilt Pump

Relief Check Test screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-48). Press “Cancel” to exit the Select
Components to Test dialog box and return to the service
tool.
Screen Layout
The Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test screen has the following
areas:

Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test status parameter area lists the
required parameters and their current values: Engine Speed, Parking
Brake, Implement Lockout Solenoid Status, Main/Tilt Hydraulic Pump
Relief Pressure, and Hydraulic Oil Temperature.
Status Line
Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test status line is located in the center
of the screen. It displays messages regarding the process of the
diagnostic test.
Instruction Area
Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test instruction area describes the
4-94
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test
screen are:
• Next>
• Cancel
Section
4
4-95
Continuing the Test
Purpose
procedures of the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test.
Instructions
To run the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test:
Step 1 Once the set-up conditions are met, press the “Next>”
places a checkmark in the box to the left of the
completed step.
If the conditions are not met, the service tool responds

by staying at that step.
Note: Once the Set-up Main Pump Relief Check Test Conditions are
met and the “Next” push-button is pressed, a message box is
displayed to aid you with the second step. Press “OK.”

places a checkmark in the box and darkens the next
step.
Step 3 When the final step is completed a test information

Illustration 4-50: Test Information message box
4-96
Press “OK.” The service tool selects the next test
checked in the Select Components to Test dialog box
and the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test is displayed.
Step 4 When the test is complete, the Main/Tilt Pump Relief

Check Test status box is displayed with the results of
each test (Refer to Illustration 4-51). A status line is
located in the bottom of the screen. It displays messages
regarding the status of the diagnostic test selected.
Section
4
Illustration 4-51: Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test status box
Press “Continue” to proceed to the next Pending test or

if there are no pending tests, press “Restart” to return to
the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test screen.
Press “Cancel” to exit the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check

Test status box and return to the service tool.
4-97
Canceling the Test
Illustration 4-52: Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test screen
Purpose
test being run.
Instructions
To cancel the test:

you that the Service Test was unsuccessful. the service
tool either starts the next test, or if all of the tests are
complete, displays Pump Relief Check Tests status box
Step 2 If the Main/Tilt Pump Relief Check Test screen displays,

press “Restart” to return to the Select Components To
Calibrate screen. Press “Cancel” to exit the Main/Tilt
Pump Calibration status box and return to the service
tool.
4-98
Misfire Detection Test
Cylinder
Selection Area
Legend Area
Section
4
Graph
Area
Status
Illustration 4-53: Misfire Detection screen Parameter Area
Purpose
The Misfire Detection function allows you to determine if a single
cylinder is misfiring. This is determined by a graphical display of a
specific parameter for the selected cylinder. This selected parameter
is dependent on the engine and what parameter best displays
whether a cylinder is misfiring.
In this example, exhaust post temperature is used. For other

engines, unfiltered combustion time is an example of the type of
parameter that represents a misfire.
If the service tool is unable to read the data, "Unavailable" is

displayed in the Status Parameter Area.
Accessing
To run the Misfire Detection function:

select Misfire Detection from the sub-menu. The Misfire Detection
4-99
Screen Layout
The Misfire Detection screen has the following areas:
Cylinder Selection Area

The Misfire Detection cylinder drop-down lists the different cylinder
numbers available. Selecting a new cylinder number causes the
graph to redraw.
Legend Area
The Misfire Detection legend area displays the selected cylinder
number before the graphed parameter's name.
Graph Area
The Misfire Detection area displays the time in seconds on the x-axis
(30 seconds is default) and the graphed parameter for the selected
cylinder's on the y-axis. The trace automatically centers on the
graph.

The Misfire Detection status parameter area displays parameter
values received from the available ECMs. This area is located at the
right side of the screen.
The parameters selected to display in the status parameter area are

dependent on the engine and are conditions relative to the specific
engine when viewing a misfire.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Misfire Detection screen are:
• Start/Stop
• Hold/Resume
• Settings…
• Switch Bank
• Print
The "Switch Bank" push-button is available for some engines and

allows you to switch back and forth from the odd and even banks of
the cylinders when testing a 12 or 16 cylinder engine. The "Switch
Bank" push-button is disabled when testing a 6 or 8 cylinder engine.
The odd bank displays cylinder #1 by default.
4-100
Starting the Test
Purpose
The "Start" push-button allows you to start the test operation.
Instructions
To start the Misfire Detection test:
Step 1 Select the cylinder to be tested from the Misfire

Detection cylinder drop-down list.
Step 2 Press the "Start" push-button. The graph begins to draw.

Section
Note: The “Start” push-button is replaced with the “Stop” push-button 4
Note: Pressing the "Stop" push-button freezes the graph on the

screen.
4-101
Pausing the Display
Purpose
The “Hold” push-button allows you to freeze the graph, so that you
can view the status of the parameters at a particular instance.
Note: If you select another cylinder after pressing the "Hold,"

push-button, the graph resumes drawing.
Instructions
To pause the display:
Step 1 Press the “Hold” push-button from the Misfire Detection

screen. The service tool immediately stops updating the
graph. The “Hold” push-button changes to the “Resume”
push-button.
Step 2 Press the “Resume” push-button to have the service tool

continue updating the display.
4-102
Setting the Graph
Section
4
Illustration 4-54: Settings dialog box
Purpose
The “Settings…” push-button allows you to change the time range of
the x-axis and change the temperature range of the y-axis. It also
allows you to change the look of the graph.
Note: The y-axis setting is only available for some engines and this
area does not display when the setting cannot be changed.
The Misfire Detection graph in the Settings dialog box displays the
graph as you make the setting changes. Pressing "OK" transfers the
settings from the Misfire Detection Settings dialog box graph to the
Misfire Detection screen.
Instructions
Step 1 Press the “Settings…” push-button. The Settings dialog

4-103
Step 2 Enter the time (x-axis), in seconds, from the Time Range
text box.
OR--
Adjust the time using the slider.
Step 3 Enter the temperature (y-axis) in the Temperature

Range text box.
OR--
Adjust the temperature using the slider.
Note: The y-axis setting is only available for some engines and this
area does not display when the setting cannot be changed.
Step 4 Select the Show Grid on Graph check box, to display

grid lines on the graph area.


positions.
Note: Pressing the "Default Settings" push-button restores the

settings back to the original stored values in the service tool.
4-104
Override Parameters Test
Section
Display Area 4
Illustration 4-55: Override Parameter screen
Purpose
The Override Parameters function views and changes the override
parameter’s “Value” and “Mode.” This function puts parameters in
and out of override mode.
The parameters, that are changed to override mode, stay in this

mode until you disable them in the Override Parameters screen or
turn off the ECM. Turning off the ECM or changing to a different
service tool function (unless the Dyno Mode Test is active) resets the
ECM parameters back to their normal settings.
Accessing
To run the Override Parameters function:

select Override Parameters from the sub-menu. The Override
Parameters screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-55).
Screen Layout
The Override Parameters screen has the following areas:
4-105
Display Area
The Override Parameters display area has four columns:
Description, Value, Unit, and Mode. The Description column gives
the name of the parameter set to run the test. The Value column
displays the status of the current parameter. The Unit column
displays the type of unit in which the value is measured. The Mode
column displays if the parameter is in “Normal” or “Override.”
Note: Some of the applications may include a Status Parameter

Area, above the display area. This area lists the required parameters
and their values received from the current ECM.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Override Parameters screen are:
• Change
• Disable Override
• Disable All Overrides
• Print
Note: When an unavailable parameter (read only) is selected, the

“Change” push-button is disabled.
4-106
Changing Parameter Values
Illustration 4-56: Change Parameter Value dialog box
Purpose Section
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the selected 4
parameter’s value.
Note: For specific parameters, a valid range of the parameter is

included under the current value.
Instructions
To change the selected parameter:
Step 1 Highlight the parameter you want to change and press

the “Change” push-button. The Change Parameter
Value dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-56).
Step 2 Select the New Value from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the new value. The “Are you
sure…” message box is displayed. Press “Yes” if you
want to change this parameter or “No” not to.
Press “Cancel” to exit the dialog box without saving the

new value. You return to the Override Parameter screen.
4-107
Disabling Override Parameters
Purpose
The “Disable Override” push-button allows you to take the selected
parameter out of override mode.
Instructions
To disable an override parameter:
Step 1 Highlight the parameter that is in override mode. This

enables the “Disable Override” push-button.
Step 2 Press the “Disable Override” push-button. The “Please

wait…” message displays. Then, you return to the
Override Parameters screen.
4-108
Disabling All Override Parameters
Purpose
The “Disable All Overrides” push-button allows you to take all
parameters out of override mode.
Instructions
To disable all override modes:
Press the “Disable All Override” push-button. The “Please

wait…” message displays. Then, you return to the Override
Parameters screen.
Section
4
4-109
Power Shift Pressure Test
Status Line
Instruction
Area
Control Area
Illustration 4-57: Power Shift Pressure Test
Purpose
The Power Shift Pressure Test function allows you to check that the
proportional reducing valve is activating with a current signal from
the controller.
This function also allows the power shift pressure signal to remain
constant at a desired pressure level. The constant power shift
pressure signal is necessary to allow testing and adjusting
procedures to be performed to line relief valves.
Accessing
To run the Power Shift Pressure Test function:
Select Diagnostics Test from the Diagnostics menu, and then

select Power Shift Pressure Test from the sub-menu. The Power
Shift Pressure Test screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-57).
Screen Layout
The Power Shift Pressure Test screen has the following areas:
4-110
Status Line
The Power Shift Pressure Test status line displays messages
regarding the process of the diagnostic test.
Instruction Area
The Power Shift Pressure Test instruction area describes the
step-by-step procedure for the diagnostic test.
Control Area
The Engine Speed control area allows you to increase or decrease
the engine speed. The horizontal slide bar shows you the parameter
range. The engine speed value is above the slide bar. The
parameter reference numbers are to the left and right of the slide
bar. A vertical slider indicates where the current value falls. The
buttons used in this area are: Section
4
• <button – decreases the engine speed
• >button – increases the engine speed
The Power Shift Pressure control area allows you to increase or

decrease the power shift pressure. The horizontal slide bar shows
you the parameter range. The power shift pressure value is above
the slide bar. The parameter reference numbers are to the left and
right of the slide bar. A vertical slider indicates where the current
value falls. The buttons used in this area are:
• <<button – decreases the power shift pressure rapidly

• <button – decreases the power shift pressure
• >button – increases the power shift pressure
• >>button – increases the power shift pressure rapidly
Note: These arrows vary the power shift pressure. The single arrow
buttons change the pressure by 10 kPa (1.5 PSI). The double arrow
buttons change the pressure by 200 kPa (29 PSI).
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Power Shift Pressure Test screen
are:
• Start
• Stop
• Begin Sweep
• End Sweep
4-111
Starting/ Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to start the Power Shift Pressure
Test.
The “Stop” push-button allows you to end the test operation.
Instructions
To start the test:
Step 1 Make sure the engine is running. Press the “Start”

push-button. The Power Shift Pressure Test begins.
Step 2 You can manipulate the Power Shift Pressure and/or the
Engine Speed manually with the arrow buttons
underneath the slider bars.
Note: After this push-button is pressed, it becomes disabled until the

test is stopped.
To stop the test:
Press the “Stop” push-button. The Power Shift Pressure Test

ends. If the “Stop” push-button is pressed before the “End Sweep”
push-button, the test aborts and the status line reads “Service Test
Unsuccessful.”
Note: This push-button is disabled until the test is started.
4-112
Beginning/Ending the Sweep
Purpose
The “Begin Sweep” push-button sweeps the power shift pressure
through a range automatically.
The “End Sweep” push-button stops the sweeping of the power shift
pressure.
Instructions
To begin the sweep:
Press the “Begin Sweep” push-button. The sweep begins varying Section
the pressure within the entire range. The sweeping continues back 4
and forth until the “End Sweep” push-button is pressed.
Note: The “Begin Sweep” push-button is disabled until the “End

Sweep” push-button is pressed.
To end the sweep:
Press the “End Sweep” push-button. The sweeping of the power

shift pressure stops. The status line reads “Service Test Successful.”
Note: The “End Sweep” push-button is disabled until the sweep is

started.
4-113
Special Tests
Display Area
Illustration 4-58: Special Tests screen
Purpose
The Special Tests function allows you to select a specific diagnostic
test that you may want to trigger. The tests that appear in the list
depend on the current ECM.
Accessing
To run the Special Tests function:
Select Diagnostic Tests from the Diagnostic menu, and then

select Special Tests from the sub-menu. The Special Tests screen is
Screen Layout
The Special Tests screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Special Tests display area has two columns: Description and
State. The Description column gives the name of the parameter set
4-114
to run the test. The State column displays if the parameter is “Not
Installed,” “Active,” or “Not Active.”
The Special Tests display area contains all of the available special
tests for the currently selected ECM. Each ECM has one or more
special tests displayed. However, you can only select one test at a
time.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Special Tests screen are:
• Start
• Stop
• Stop All
Section
4
4-115
Starting the Test
Illustration 4-59: “Are you sure...” message box.
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to begin the testing process for
the chosen special test.
Instructions
To start the selected test:
Step 1 Highlight one of the parameters from the list on the

Special Test screen. This enables the “Start”
push-button.
Step 2 Press the “Start” push-button. The “Are you sure…”

Step 3 Press “Yes” if you want to start the testing or “No” if you
do not to start the test. You return to the Special Tests
screen.
Note: The “Start” push-button is disabled until the “Stop” push-button

is pressed.
4-116
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the special test in
progress.
Instructions
To stop a test:
Step 1 Highlight the parameter you want to stop testing. This

enables the “Stop” push-button. Only the tests that have
started can be stopped.
Section
Step 2 Press the “Stop” push-button. The test stops, and the 4
state changes.

is pressed again.
4-117
Stopping All the Tests
Purpose
The “Stop All” push-button allows you to stop all of the special tests.
Instructions
To stop all tests:
Press the “Stop All” push-button. All of the tests that are running
stop.
Note: When one or more tests are active, the “Stop All” push-button
is enabled. It becomes disabled after you stop all of the tests.
4-118
System Troubleshooting Settings
Display Area
Section
4
Illustration 4-60: System Troubleshooting Setting screen
Purpose
The System Troubleshooting Settings function views and changes
the troubleshooting parameters “Value” and “Mode.” This function
puts parameters in and out of override mode.
The parameters that are changed to override mode, stay in this

mode, until you disable them in the System Troubleshooting Settings
screen or turn off the ECM. Turning off the ECM resets the ECM
parameters back to their normal settings.
This Diagnostic Tests function is only available with the ATA

connection.
Accessing
To run the System Troubleshooting Settings function:

select System Troubleshooting Settings from the sub-menu. The
System Troubleshooting Settings screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-60).
4-119
Screen Layout
The System Troubleshooting Settings screen has the following
areas:
Display Area
The System Troubleshooting Settings display area has four columns:
Description, Value, Unit and Mode. The Description column gives the
name of the parameter set to run the test. The Value column
displays the type of unit in which the value is measured. The Mode
column displays if the parameter is in “Normal” or “Override.”
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the System Troubleshooting Settings
screen are:
• Change
• Print

4-120
Purpose Section
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the selected 4

Instructions

Step 2 Select the New Value from the drop-down list.

new value. You return to the System Troubleshooting
Setting screen.
4-121
Purpose
Instructions
Step 1 Highlight the parameter that is in override mode. This

enables the “Disable Override” push-button.

wait…” message displays. Then, you return to the
System Troubleshooting Settings screen.
4-122
Traction Aid Brake Test
Illustration Area
Section
4
Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 4-62: Traction Aid Brake Test screen
Purpose
The Traction Aid Brake Test function allows you to perform the Step,
Bleed, and Ramp tests on a selected brake line. This test allows a
service worker to manually turn on the brake and monitor it.
Note: If the machine speed is over 3 mph, the test will not work. This
keeps the brake from overheating.
Accessing
To run the Traction Aid Brake test:

select Brake Test from the sub-menu. The Traction Aid Brake Test
Screen Layout
The Traction Aid Brake Test screen has the following areas:
4-123
There are four status parameter boxes: Left Front Brake Test, Right
Front Brake Test, Left Rear Brake Test, and Right Rear Brake Test.
Each box has four status lines: Brake Location, Test Status, Current
Test Icon, and Desired Pressure Value.
The Brake Location is displayed at the top of the box. The Test
Status line displays if the test is Bleed, Ramp, Step, or No Test. The
Current Test Icon is a visual representation of the test. The desired
pressure value is measured in PSI (kPa).
Illustration Area
The Brake Illustration is located in the center of the screen. It is a
visual representation of the brakes that are being tested. An
Illustration number is displayed on the tire for the brake names:
#1: Left Front Brake Test

#2: Right Front Brake Test
#3: Left Rear Brake Test
#4: Right Rear Brake Test
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Traction Aid Brake Test screen
are:
• Stop
• Stop All
• Bleed
• Ramp
• Step
4-124
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the brake test, one brake
at a time.
Instructions
To stop the brake test one brake at a time:
Step 1 Press the Brake Illustration tire number or push the

corresponding keyboard key number of the brake you
want to test. The selected brake line is highlighted.
Section
Step 2 Press the “Stop” push-button. The selected test stops. 4

is pressed again.
4-125
Stopping All Tests
Purpose
The “Stop All” push-button allows you to stop all of the brake tests at
once.
Instructions
To stop all of the brake tests at once:
Press the “Stop All” push-button. All of the tests that are running
stops.
Note: The “Stop All” push-button becomes disabled until the “Start”
push-button is pressed again.
4-126
Bleed Testing
Purpose
The “Bleed” push-button allows you to apply constant pressure,
allowing the brake to bleed.
Instructions
To run the bleed test:
Section
Step 1 Press the Brake Illustration tire number or push the 4
corresponding keyboard number of the brake you want
to test. The selected brake line is highlighted.
Step 2 Press the “Bleed” push-button. The solenoid for that

brake is turned on and the Current Test Icon is
displayed. The value that is displayed in the designated
brake’s test status box does not change.
4-127
Ramp Testing
Purpose
The “Ramp” push-button allows you to gradually increase brake line
pressure from “minimum” to “maximum” and decrease it back down
to “minimum.”
Instructions
To run the ramp test:
Step 1 Press the Brake Illustration tire number or push the

Step 2 Press the “Ramp” push-button. The solenoid for that

displayed. The new value is displayed in the designated
brake’s test status box.
4-128
Step Testing
Purpose
The “Step” push-button allows you to repeatedly apply “minimum,”
and then “maximum” pressure on the brake line.
Instructions
To run the step test:
Section
Step 1 Press the Brake Illustration tire number or push the 4
Step 2 Press the “Step” push-button. The solenoid for that

displayed. The new value is displayed in the designated
brake’s test status box.
4-129
Transmission Stall Test
Status
Parameter Area
Instruction Area
Status Line
Illustration 4-63: Transmission Stall Test screen for a Track Type Loader
Purpose
The Transmission Stall Test function provides the means for stalling
the transmission by electronically locking the parking brake and
attempting to move the machine.
Accessing
To run the Transmission Stall Test function:
Step 1 Select Diagnostics Tests from the Diagnostics menu,

and then select Transmission Stall from the sub-menu.
An attention message box is displayed.
Step 2 Press “OK.” The Transmission Stall Test screen is

4-130
Screen Layout
The Transmission Stall Test screen has the following areas:

The Transmission Stall Test status parameter area lists the required
parameters and their values: Engine Speed, Absolute Charge Oil
Pressure, Hydraulic Oil Temperature, Transmission Lever Position
Status, and Parking Brake Lockout.
Status Line
The Transmission Stall Test status line is located in the center of the
screen. It displays messages regarding the process of the diagnostic
test.
Section
Instruction Area 4
The Transmission Stall Test instruction area describes the
Push-Button
The push-buttons available in the Transmission Stall Test screen
are:
• Next>
• Cancel
• Hold/Resume
4-131
Continuing the Test
Purpose
The “Next>” push-button allows you to work your way through the
step-by-step procedures of the Transmission Stall Test.
Instructions
To run the Transmission Stall Test:
push-button. When the conditions are met, the service
tool places a check mark in the box to the left of the
completed step.

by keeping the step number at one.
Step 2 The ECM determines if the transmission lever is in the

park position and advance the step number. If the ECM
determines the transmission lever is not in the correct
position, it displays an alert on the Status Line and not
advance to Step 3.
Step 3 When you press the “Next>” push-button, the parking

brake electronically locks. A message box is displayed
once you lock the parking brakes (Refer to Illustration
4-64).
Note: This message box does not display for all products.
Illustration 4-64: Parking Brake Warning message box
Step 4 Press “OK” to continue the test.
4-132
Step 5 Perform the Stall Test. Once you have completed the
test, press the “Next>” push-button. the service tool
checks the box.
Step 6 Press the “Next>” push-button, the service tool

electronically unlocks the parking brake. A warning
message box is displayed telling you the parking brake
has been electronically unlocked (Refer to Illustration
4-65).
Note: This message box does not display for all products.
Section
4
Illustration 4-65: Parking Brake Warning message box
Step 7 Press “OK.” The Transmission Stall Test status box is

Illustration 4-66: Transmission Stall Test status box
Step 8 Press “Restart” to run the diagnostic test again. Press

“Finish” to return to the service tool.
4-133
Canceling the Test
Illustration 4-67: Transmission Stall Test status box
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to cancel the Transmission
Stall Test.
Instructions:
To cancel the test:
Step 1 Press the “Cancel” push-button. The Transmission Stall

Test status dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 4-67).
Step 2 Press “Restart” to run the diagnostic test again. Press

“Cancel” to return to the service tool.
4-134
Holding the Test
Purpose
The “Hold” push-button allows you to freeze the status parameter, so
that you can record data when performing the transmission stall test.
Instructions
To hold the test:
Step 1 Press the “Hold” push-button from the Transmission Stall

Diagnostic Tests screen. The “Hold” push-button
changes to the “Resume” push-button.
Section
Step 2 Press the “Resume” push-button to have the service tool 4
continue updating the status parameters display.
Note: The “Hold/Resume” push-button button works as a

locking/unlocking device on the status parameter display. This
feature is used when performing the stall test.
4-135
Variable Speed Fan Test (Option B)
Status Setup Condition

Parameter Area Area
Status Line
Illustration 4-68: Variable Speed Fan Test (Option B) screen
Purpose
The Variable Speed Fan Test (Option B) function determines the
performance of the fan by increasing or decreasing the value of the
Desired Fan Speed. It can then be determined if the fan is
functioning properly by analyzing the actual Fan Speed and the
Percent Fan Output. Certain parameters must be met before you are
able to adjust the Desired Fan Speed to assure that there is no
damage to the engine.
Accessing
To run the Variable Speed Fan (Option B) function:

select Variable Speed from the sub-menu. The Variable Speed Fan
(Option B) screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-68).
Screen Layout
The Variable Speed Fan Test (Option B) screen has the following
areas:
4-136
Setup Condition Area
The Variable Speed Fan Test setup condition area has three
columns: Description, Required Condition, and Actual Value. The
Description column gives the name of the parameter set to run the
test. The Required Condition column displays the value that the
parameter must have in order to run the test. The Actual Value
column displays the actual value of the parameters.
Once these conditions are met, the "Start" push-button becomes

active.

The Variable Speed Fan Test status parameter area lists necessary
status parameters to run this test and their current values: Fan
Speed, Desired Fan Speed, and Percent Fan Output. Section
4
Status Line
The Variable Speed Fan Test status line displays the current state of
the test. Listed below are possible conditions of the test and their
descriptions.
Conditions of the Test: Description:

Ready The test is ready to be started.
Not Active: Engine Speed The Engine Speed is higher than the
Too High required condition.
Not Active: Engine Speed The Engine Speed is lower than the
Too Low required condition.
Not Active: Vehicle Speed Vehicle Speed present when it

Present should be zero.
Not Active: Engine Coolant Engine Coolant Temperature is

Temperature Too High higher than the required condition.
Active: Low The test is started, all of the

requirements are met, and the fan is
at low speed.
Active: High The test is started, all of the

at high speed.
4-137
Active: Fan Off The test is started, all of the
off.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Variable Speed Fan Test (Option
B) screen are:
• Start
• Stop
• Increase
• Decrease
• Print
4-138
Starting the Test
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to begin the Variable Speed Fan
Test.
Note: The status line displays "Ready" when all conditions have
been met and the test is ready to be started.
Instructions
To start the Variable Speed Fan Test:
Press the “Start” push-button. The status line informs you of the Section
state of the test. 4
Note: The “Start” push-button is disabled until the “Stop” push-button

is pressed.
4-139
Stopping the Test
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the Variable Speed Fan
Test.
Note: The status line displays "Ready" when all conditions have
been met and the test has been stopped.
Instructions
To stop the Variable Speed Fan Test:
the test is "Ready."

is pressed again.
4-140
Increasing the Desired Fan Speed
Purpose
The “Increase” push-button allows you to increase the Desired Fan
Speed.
Instructions
To increase the Desired Fan Speed:
Press the “Increase” push-button. Notice that the Desired Fan

Speed increases each time you press the “Increase” push-button.
The status line indicates if the fan speed is at the "Low," "Medium,"
"High," or "Fan Off." Once the value is at its maximum, the “Increase” Section
push-button becomes disabled until you decrease the value. 4
Note: The "Increase" push-button is disabled until the "Start"

4-141
Decreasing the Desired Fan Speed
Purpose
The “Decrease” push-button allows you to decrease the Desired Fan
Speed.
Instructions
To decrease the Desired Fan Speed:
Press the “Decrease” push-button. Notice that the Desired Fan

Speed decreases each time you press the “Decrease” push-button.
The status line indicates if the fan speed is at the "Low," "Medium,"
"High," or "Fan Off." Once the value is at its minimum, the
“Decrease” push-button becomes disabled until you increase the
value.
Note: The "Decrease" push-button is disabled until the "Start"

4-142
Other Track Type Excavator Hydraulic Tests
Purpose: Attachment Valves Pressure Test

The Attachment Valve Pressure Test allows the attachment valves
command signal to remain constant at a desired pressure level. The
attachment valves command signal is necessary to allow testing and
adjusting procedures to be performed to line relief valves.
Purpose: F1 Type Valve Flow Command Test

The F1 Type Valve Flow Command Test allows the F1 type valve
command signal to remain constant at a desired pressure level. The
F1 type valve command signal is necessary to allow testing and
adjusting procedures to be performed to line relief valves. Section
4
Purpose: Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure Test
The Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure Test allows the flow
limitation pressure valve command signal to remain constant at a
desired pressure level. The constant flow limitation pressure valve
command signal is necessary to allow testing and adjusting
Purpose: Negative Flow Control Stabilizer Pressure Test

The Negative Flow Control (NFC) Stabilizer Pressure Test allows the
NFC Pressure Stabilizer Valve command signal to remain constant
at the desired pressure level. The constant NFC Pressure Stabilizer
Valve command signal is necessary to allow testing and adjusting
Purpose: NFC Pressure Reducer Pressure Test

The NFC (Negative Flow Control) Pressure Reducer Pressure Test
allows the NFC pressure reducer valve command signal to remain
constant at a desired pressure level. The NFC pressure reducer
valve command signal is necessary to allow testing and adjusting
Purpose: Variable Relief Valve Pressure Test

The Variable Relief Valve Pressure Test allows the variable relief
valve command signal to remain constant at a desired pressure
level. The variable relief valve command signal is necessary to allow
testing and adjusting procedures to be performed to line relief valves.
4-143
Accessing
To run a diagnostic test function:
Select Diagnostics Tests from the Diagnostics menu, and then

select the desired diagnostic test function from the sub-menu. The
selected diagnostic test screen is displayed.
Note: Some of the tests display a Select Components to Test dialog

box. Check/Uncheck which tests you want to run and press “Begin.”
By default, all components available are selected.
Screen Layout
Note: See "Power Shift Pressure Test," section 4, page 110, for an
explanation of the Screen Layout, Starting/Stopping the Test, and
Beginning/Ending the Sweep.
4-144
Events
Illustration 4-69: Example of Events menu functions

Section
Overview 4
Events allow you to view information tracked by the ECMs, which is
typically used for warranty verification information and for reviewing
how the equipment has been operated.
An example of an event tracked for a 3176 engine is Engine

Overspeed. During normal operation of an engine, this event may
occur a few times. However, a high number of occurrences of this
type of an event may indicate user operation problems.
Clearing any event codes logged by the onboard electronics may

require proper password authorization.
Event functions currently available on various applications are:
• Active Events
• Logged Events
• Critical Events
• Shift Count Matrix
• Counters
4-145
Active Event Codes
Status Flag
Area
Display Area
Illustration 4-70: Active Event Codes screen
Purpose
The Active Event Codes function provides information about events
currently occurring. These codes are similar to the active diagnostic
codes, except that the event represents the symptom of an
operational problem. These codes indicate to the manager or
technician how the machine or equipment is being operated.
Accessing
To run the Active Event Codes function:
Select Events from the Diagnostics menu, and then select Active
Event Codes from the sub-menu or press the Active Event Codes
icon from the toolbar (if added to the toolbar). The Active Event
Codes screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-70).
Note: To add the Active Event Codes icon to the toolbar, see
"Customizing the Toolbar," section 3, page 3
.
4-146
Screen Layout
The Active Event Codes screen has the following areas:
Status Flag Area


the flags.
Display Area
The Active Event Codes display area has two columns: Code and
Description. The code numbers that appear are used to identify the Section
events. The Description column informs you of the event that is 4
occurring.
Warning category indicator immediately follows the code number and

is in parentheses. It is a number ranging from 1 to 3, where 3 is the
most severe, and it indicates the severity of the associated code
number. The warning category provides an indication to the type of
behavior and/or actions, which must be taken by the operator, or by
the control system for some engine applications, to address the
severity of the associated situation.
The list of codes is grouped according to the ECM from which they
are retrieved. They appear in chronological order by the most recent
ECM hour of last occurrence. The ECM names appear as subtitles in
the list. If there is more than one ECM connected, the subtitles are
arranged alphabetically.

Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Active Event Codes screen are:
• Print
4-147
Logged Event Codes
Display
Area
Illustration 4-71: Logged Event Codes screen
Purpose
The Logged Event Codes function provides a list of event codes
logged by the ECM. These codes are similar to the logged diagnostic
codes, except that the event represents the symptom of the
operational problem. These codes indicate to the manager or
technician how the machine/equipment is being operated.
Accessing
To run the Logged Event Codes function:
Select Events from the Diagnostics menu, and then select

Logged Event Codes from the sub-menu, or press the Logged Event
Codes icon from the toolbar (if default is set). The Logged Event
Codes screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-71).
Screen Layout
The Logged Event Codes screen has the following areas:
4-148
Display Area
The Logged Event Codes display area groups the codes according
to the ECM from which they are retrieved. They appear in
chronological order by the most recent ECM hour of last occurrence.
The ECM names appear as subtitles in the list. If there is more than
one ECM connected, the subtitles are arranged alphabetically. On
the same line as the ECM subtitle, the number of ECM diagnostic
clock hours is displayed. These hours represent the time that the
ECM has been connected and running.
The Logged Event Codes screen has five columns: Code,

Description, Occ., First, and Last. The code numbers that appear are
used to identify the events. The Description column informs you of
the symptom that is occurring. The Occ. (occurrences) column
informs you of the number of times that the symptom occurred. The Section
columns marked First and Last indicate the first and last ECM hour 4
when the problem occurred.
Note: For specific gas engines, the time displays in hours, minutes
and seconds.
Note: On some ECMs, a warning category indicator may

immediately follow the code number and is in parentheses. It is a
number ranging from 1 to 3, where 3 is the most severe, and it
indicates the severity of the associated code number. The warning
category provides an indication to the type of behavior and/or
actions, which must be taken by the operator, or by the control
system for some engine applications, to address the severity of the
associated situation.

When the Include All ECMs check box is checked, logged codes
from all available ECMs are retrieved and displayed. When there is a
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Logged Event Codes screen are:
• Clear
• View Histogram
• Print
4-149
Clearing Logged Event Codes
Illustration 4-72: “Are you sure…” message box.
Purpose
The “Clear” push-button allows you to clear logged event codes from
the Logged Event Codes screen.
Instructions
To clear a logged event code:
Step 1 Highlight one of the logged event codes from the list on
the Logged Event Codes screen. This enables the
“Clear” push-button.

Step 3 Press “Yes” to clear the selected code or “No” not to.
You return to the Logged Event Codes screen.
4-150
Viewing the Histogram
Section
4
Illustration 4-73: Event Histogram screen.
Purpose
The “View Histogram” push-button allows you to view a histogram for
a logged event code. When the highlighted code has an event
histogram available, the “View Histogram” push-button is enabled.
Note: Not all logged events have histograms.
Instructions
To view the histogram:
Step 1 Highlight the logged code that has an event histogram

available. The “View Histogram” push-button becomes
enabled.
Step 2 Press the “View Histogram” push-button. The Event

Histogram screen is displayed with the data for the
selected code (Refer to Illustration 4-73).
4-151
Step 3 Press the “Return” push-button to return to the Logged
Event Codes screen. This closes the Event Histogram
screen.
Press the “Print” push-button to Print to Printer or Print

Preview.
4-152
Critical Events (ATA)
Display Area
Section
4
Illustration 4-74: Critical Events screen
Purpose
The Critical Events function provides "special" logged events
containing the following information: When the event started (real
time), how long it was active, the extreme value, and the average
value. A single event code can be logged multiple times.
Accessing
To run the Critical Events function:

Critical Events from the sub-menu. The Critical Events screen is
Screen Layout
The Critical Event screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Critical Events display area has five columns: Description, Start
Time, Elapsed, Extreme, and Average. The Description column
4-153
displays the name of the critical events. The Start Time column
displays the date and time that the event occurred. The Elapsed
column displays the time that the event was active. The Extreme
column displays the extreme value that the event reached. The
Average column displays the average value while the event was
active.

When the Include All ECMs check box is checked, critical codes from
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Critical Events screen are:
• Clear
• Clear All
• Print
Note: The “Clear All” push-button is disabled in this version of the

service tool.
4-75:
4-154
Clearing a Critical Event
Purpose
The “Clear” push-button allows you to clear critical event from the
Critical Events screen.
Instructions
To clear a critical event:
Step 1 Highlight one of the events from the list on the Critical
Event screen. This enables the “Clear” push-button.
Step 2 Press the “Clear” push-button. The “Are you sure...” Section
message box is displayed. 4
Step 3 Press “Yes” to clear the event or “No” not to. You return
to the Critical Events screen.
4-155
Shift Count Matrix
Display Area
Illustration 4-76: Shift Count Matrix screen
Purpose
The Shift Count Matrix function allows you to see the number of
times the operator shifts from one gear to another gear. The
information is read from the ECM.
Accessing
To run the Shift Count Matrix function:
Select Events from the Diagnostics menu, and then select Shift
Count Matrix from the sub-menu. The Shift Count Matrix screen is
Screen Layout
The Shift Count Matrix screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The columns display the gears the operator shifts “To.” The rows
display the gears the operator shifts “From.” The data filling the
4-156
matrix represents the number of times the operator shifts. The
symbols are as follows:
• N= Neutral
• R= Reverse
• 1= First gear
• 2= Second gear
• and so on
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Shift Count Matrix screen are:
• Reset
• Print
Section
Note: See “Printing,” section 1, page 26. 4
4-157
Resetting the Data
Purpose
The “Reset” push-button allows you to reset the data in the Shift
Count Matrix. The data in the ECM and the data displayed is reset to
zero.
Instructions
To reset the data:
Step 1 Press the “Reset” push-button. The “Are you sure...”

message box is displayed.
Step 2 Press “Yes” to reset the data or “No” not to. You return
to the Shift Count Matrix screen.
4-158
Counters
Display Area
Section
4
Illustration 4-77: Counters screen
Purpose
The Counters screen allows you to view the total count of
parameters listed. This count helps you analyze factors related to the
use of the truck or machine.
Instructions
To run the Counters function:

Counters from the sub-menu. The Counters screen is displayed
Screen Layout
The Counters screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Counters display area has two columns: Description and Value.
The Description column gives the name of the parameter. The Value
column displays the status of the current parameter.
4-159
Push-buttons
The push-buttons available in the Counters screen are:
• Clear
• Print
4-160
Clearing the Counter
Illustration 4-78: Are you sure...” message box.
Purpose
The “Clear” push-button allows you to clear the counter of the Section
parameter from the Counters screen. 4
Instructions
To clear the counter:
Step 1 Highlight one of the parameters from the list on the

Counters screen. This enables the “Clear” push-button.

Step 3 Press “Yes” if you want to clear the selected parameter’s

count or “No” not to. You return to the Counters screen.
4-161
Reset VIDS Event List
Illustration 4-79: Diagnostic drop-down menu
Purpose
The Reset VIDS (Vital Information Display System) Event List
function allows you to reset VIDS Logged Events.
Instructions
To reset the VIDS Event list:
Step 1 Select Reset VIDS Event List from the Diagnostics

menu. The reset VIDS Logged Events message box is
Illustration 4-80: Reset VIDS Logged Events message box
Step 2 Press “Yes” to clear the VIDS Logged Events or “No” not
to. You return to the Reset VIDS Logged Events screen.
4-162
Input Troubleshooting
Status Flag
Area
Display
Area Section
4
Illustration 4-81: Input Troubleshooting screen
Purpose
The Input Troubleshooting function allows you to monitor and
diagnose problems with various inputs on the ECM. This function is
only available for inputs that are configured to receive data from both
a terminal and the J1939 data link.
Accessing
To run the Input Troubleshooting function:
Select Input Troubleshooting from the Diagnostics menu. The

Troubleshooting screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 4-80).
Screen Layout
The Input Troubleshooting screen has the following areas:
Status Flag Area

4-163
flag indicator area. The name of the ECM, which is the source of the
status flag condition, is displayed above the flags.
Display Area
The Input Troubleshooting display area has four columns: the first
column, Description, Value, and Unit. The first column indicates
whether any diagnostic faults are present for the parameter. The
Description column gives the name of the parameter with its terminal
and J1939 Data Link below the parameter’s name. The Value
column displays the status value for the parameter and its inputs.
The Unit column displays the type of unit in which the value is
measured.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Input Troubleshooting screen are:
• Hold/Resume
• Print
4-164
Pausing the Display
Purpose
The “Hold” push-button allows you to freeze the display, so that you
Instructions
Step 1 Press the “Hold” push-button from the Input

Troubleshooting screen. The service tool immediately
stops updating the status parameters. The “Hold” push-
button changes to the “Resume” push-button. Section
4
4-165
4-166
Information Drop-Down
Illustration 5-1: Information drop-down menu
Overview
The Information drop-down menu functions allow you to receive
information about the ECM. This includes specific ECM data and
service tool software information. It allows you to receive specific
information about parameters that you wish to monitor.
The functions available under the Information drop-down menu are:
• Status
• ECM Summary
• Current Totals
• History
• Data Log
• Sea Trial
• Real Time Graphing
• Snapshot
• Prognostics Download
• Trip/Job Segment
• Trip/Job Histogram
• Custom Data
• Trip/Job/Driver Reset
5-1
Status
Status Flag
Area
ECM Title
Area
Display
Area
Illustration 5-2: Status screen
Purpose
The Status function monitors ECM data as it occurs. When running
the Status tool for the first time, you must select a group of
parameters to monitor.
Accessing
To run the Status function:
Select Status from the Information menu, push the F2 key (if the
default function keys are set), or press the Status Tool icon from the
toolbar (if default is set). The Status screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-2).
Note: The Select Group dialog box is displayed the first time you use
this tool.
5-2
If the Select Group dialog box is displayed:
Step 1 Select a group from the Select a group list box. As you
select a group, the parameters for that group are
displayed in the Parameters list box.
Note: Using the up and down arrows (↑ and ↓) on the keyboard, you
can consecutively view each group and its parameters in the Select
Group dialog box. If a group is created, you can choose that group
by selecting the first letter of its name.
Step 2 Press “OK” to accept the selected group. The group data
that you selected is displayed in the Status screen
Press “Cancel” to leave this screen without choosing a

group.
Note: In the Status screen, you can view each group consecutively
by using the “Page Up” and “Page Down” keys. You can view a
specific default group by selecting the key number corresponding to
that Group (the key number for groups 1 through 9, ALT plus the key
number for groups 10 through 19, or the 0 (zero) key for the
<TEMPORARY GROUP>.
Screen Layout
The Status screen has the following areas:
Status Flag Area:


the flags.
ECM Title Area

The ECM title area displays the ECM name and the group you have
chosen. This area is located in the upper left-hand corner of the
screen below the Status Flags.
5-3
Display Area
The Status display area is located in the center of the screen, and
the grid format displays the description, value, and unit of predefined
ECM parameters. The Description column gives the name of the
parameter. The Value column displays the status of the selected
parameter. The Unit column displays the type of unit in which the
value is measured. If Active Diagnostic Codes are present for On
Highway truck sensors, another column displays, between the
Description and Value columns, to indicate a problem with the
specific parameter.
If there are more parameters to view than what is shown in the

display area, a vertical scroll bar displays at the right side of the
screen.
Note: If the service tool is unable to read the data, “Unavailable,”

"Not Installed," or "Not Available" is displayed.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Status screen are:
• Groups…
• Zoom In/Zoom Out
• Hold/Resume
• Print
5-4
Selecting a Group
Illustration 5-3: Select Group dialog box
Purpose
The “Groups…” push-button allows you to display the Select Group
dialog box. This dialog box displays available default groups of
parameters to monitor, and provides access for creating, changing,
and deleting groups. This dialog box allows you to reassign a group
in the service tool.
The Maintain Groups dialog box allows you to assign parameters to

a new group that you are creating. It also allows you to change
parameters in a group you created and/or in the Temporary Group.
Instructions
To select a group:
Step 1 Press the “Groups…” push-button from the Status

screen. The Select Group dialog box is displayed (Refer
Step 2 Highlight a group from the Select a group list box and
press “OK.” The Status screen is displayed showing the
selected group and its parameters.
5-5
by selecting the first letter of its name. If there is more than one
group with the same first letter, continually pressing the letter scrolls
through those groups consecutively.
To create a new group (with one ECM):

screen. The Select Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Press the “New” push-button to create a new group. The

Maintain Groups dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-4).
Illustration 5-4: Maintain Groups dialog box
Step 3 Highlight a parameter in the Available parameters list

box and press the “>” push-button. This moves
parameters, one at a time, from the Available
Parameters list box to the Group list box, (highlighting a
parameter in the Group list box and pressing the “<”
push-button moves it back).
A maximum of ten parameters can be added to the

Groups list box.
Step 4 Press the “Save As” push-button. The Save Group

5-6
Illustration 5-5: Save Group dialog box
Step 5 Enter the group name in the Enter Group Name text box.
Step 6 Press “OK” if you want to save the new group name.
You return to the Select Group dialog box.
5-7
Press “Cancel” if you want to leave the Save Group
dialog box without assigning a name. You return to the
Maintain Group dialog box.
To create a new group (with multiple ECMs):

Step 2 Press the “New” push-button to create a new group. The

Maintain Groups dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-6).
Step 3 Highlight an ECM in the Available ECMs list box.

Parameters list box to the Group list box, (highlighting a
parameter in the Group list box and pressing the “<”
When finished, you can select a different ECM and then

select from its Available parameters. A maximum of ten
parameters can be added to the Groups list box.
5-8
Step 5 Press the “Save As” push-button. The Save Group
Step 6 Enter the group name in the Enter Group Name text box.
Step 7 Press “OK” if you want to save the new group name.
You return to the Select Group dialog box.
Press “Cancel” if you want to leave the Save Group

Maintain Group dialog box.
To change a group:

Step 2 Highlight either the Temporary Group or a group that you

created from the Select a group list box and press
“Change.” The Maintain Groups dialog box is displayed.
Note: Groups that are already in the Select a group dialog box as
default cannot be changed.

box and press the “>” push-button to move the
parameters, one at a time to the Group list box. Highlight
a parameter in the Group list box and press the “<”
push-button to move it back to the Available parameters.
Step 4 Press “OK” when you are finished making changes in

the Maintain Groups dialog box. The “Do you want to
save the current group…” message box is displayed
Illustration 5-7: “Do you want to save...” message box
Step 5 Press “Yes” to save the group as a different name. The

Save Group dialog box is displayed. Enter the new
5-9
group name in the Enter Group Name text box and press
“OK.”
Press “No” to keep the same group name (displayed

above the Groups list box). You return to the Select
Group dialog box.
To delete a group:
Step 1 Press the “Groups…” push-button. The Select Group

Step 2 Highlight a group from the Select a group list box and
press “Delete.” The “Are you sure...” message box is
Note: The temporary group or groups that are already set in the
Select a group dialog box as default cannot be deleted.
Step 3 Press ”Yes” if you want to delete the group or “No” if you
do not want to delete the group. You return to the Select
Group dialog box.
To exit a screen at any time:
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to make any changes. You

return to the “Status” screen.
5-10
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Illustration 5-9: Status screen in “Zoom In”
Purpose
The “Zoom In” push-button allows you to display values in larger text
for increased visibility. The “Zoom Out” push-button allows you to
return the parameter values to normal size text.
If there are more parameters to view than what is shown in the

display area, a vertical scroll bar displays at the right side of the
screen.
Instructions
To zoom in and out of the display:
Step 1 Press the “Zoom In” push-button from the Status screen.
The display text increases (Refer to Illustration 5-9).
Step 2 Press the “Zoom Out” push-button to return to the

normal text display mode.
5-11
Pausing the Display Parameters
Purpose
Instructions
Step 1 Press the “Hold” push-button from the Status screen.

The service tool immediately stops updating the Status
tool. The “Hold” push-button changes to the “Resume”
push-button.

5-12
ECM Summary
Available
ECMs List box
Service Tool
Information
Area
Data Area
Illustration 5-10: ECM Summary screen
Purpose
The ECM Summary screen allows you to view all of the useful ECM
and service tool software information. This screen is automatically
displayed each time that you start the service tool or establish a new
connection through the Connect function under the File menu. It can
also be seen at any time by choosing ECM Summary from the
Information menu or by pressing the ECM Summary icon from the
toolbar (if default is set).
When you are reporting problems or requesting help for the service
tool, you need to give the information that is displayed on the ECM
Summary screen.
Accessing
To run the ECM Summary function:
Select ECM Summary from the Information menu, or press the

ECM Summary icon from the toolbar (if default is set). The ECM
Summary screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-10).
5-13
Screen Layout
The ECM Summary screen has the following area:
Available ECMs List Box

The Available ECMs list box displays the description of each ECM on
the data link. The ECMs are listed alphabetically. The default
highlighted is the ECM that is currently selected. You can only select
one ECM at a time.
Data Area
The ECM summary data area is located in the center of the screen. It
displays a summary of descriptive parameters that identify the
currently selected ECM. The left side of this area displays the
parameter name, and the right side displays the data information for
each parameter.
Service Tool Information Area

The service tool information area is located on the right of the
screen. It displays the service tool software version, serial number,
and subscription information.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the ECM Summary screen is:
• Print
5-14
Current Totals
Display Area
Illustration 5-11: Totals screen
Purpose
The Totals screen allows you to view the current total values for the
different parameters listed. These totals help you analyze many
important factors related to the use of the truck or machine.
Accessing
To run the Totals function:
Select Current Totals from the Information menu. The Totals

Screen Layout
The Current Totals screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Current Totals display area has three columns: Description,
Value, and Unit. The Description column gives the name of the
parameter set to run the test. The Value column displays the status
5-15
of the current parameter. The Unit column displays the parameter
units.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Current Totals screen are:
• Change
• Print

5-16
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the selected

Instructions

Step 2 Enter the new value in the New Value text box.

new value. You return to the Totals screen.
5-17
History
Illustration 5-13: Information drop-down menu functions
Overview
The History function displays historical records of information and
changes that have been made within the ECM. Under the History
menu option, a sub-menu allows you to choose the specific records
you want to open.
History functions currently available on various applications are:
• Rating History
• Parameter History
5-18
Rating History
Display Area
Illustration 5-14: Rating History screen
Purpose
The Rating History displays the history of various engine ratings. The
ECM records the horsepower, torque, duration, and the service tool
serial number at the time of the rating change.
Accessing
To run the Rating History function:
Select History from the Information menu, and then select Rating
from the sub-menu. The Rating History screen is displayed
(Illustration 5-14).
Screen Layout
The Rating History screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Rating History display area has five columns: Description,
Original Setting, Present Setting, Previous Setting, and Highest
Setting. The Description column gives the name of the parameter set
5-19
to run the test. The Settings columns display the status of the
parameter in its original, present, previous, or highest setting.
“Not Available” is displayed for rating information that has not been
recorded by the ECM. Use the horizontal scroll bar, at the bottom of
the screen, to display additional ratings.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Rating History screen is:
• Print
5-20
Parameter Change History
Display Area
Illustration 5-15: Parameter Change History screen
Purpose
The Parameter Change History function displays historical records of
parameter changes that have been made on the ECM. These items
are listed with the most recently changed parameter at the top.
Accessing
To run the Parameter Change History function:
Select History from the Information menu, then choose

Parameter History from the sub-menu. The Parameter Change
History screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-15).
Screen Layout
The Parameter Change History screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Parameter Change History display has four columns: ECM
Hours, Service Tool, Description, and New Value. The ECM Hours
column displays the hours that the ECM has been active. The
5-21
Service Tool column displays the serial number of the service tool
that last changed the parameter. The Description column gives the
name of the parameter set to run the test. The New Value column
displays the status of the new parameter.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Parameter Change History screen
is:
• Print
5-22
Illustration 5-16:
Illustration 5-17:
5-23
Data Log
Illustration 5-18: Data Log menu functions
Overview
The Data Log functions allow you to record data of a selected
group(s) of parameters from the ECM as it occurs. This data is saved
as a *.sdf file. After you record the data, you may view the logged
data graphically or export the data as a *.txt file. As a Comma
Separated Value text file, the data can be imported into other
applications (for example Excel or Lotus 123).

Data Log functions currently available on various applications are:
• Recorder
• Viewer
Selecting the Viewer option is an alternative method for running the

Data Log Viewer function. For instructions on using the Viewer
option, see "Data Log Viewer," section 1, page 11.

"Not Installed," or "Not Available" is inserted into the file.
5-24
Data Log Recorder
Status Line
Area
Settings Panel
Area
Illustration 5-19: Data Log Recorder screen
Purpose
The Data Log Recorder function allows you to capture or log
performance data for multiple ECMs, which aids in diagnosing
potential problems. This function allows you the flexibility to define a
sample rate and the duration of the sample.
Accessing
To run the Data Log Recorder function:
Select Data Log from the Information menu, and then select
Recorder from the sub-menu. The Data Log Recorder screen is
Note: The Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed the
first time you use this tool. See "Setting Up Data Log Recorder,"
section 5, page 30.
5-25
Screen Layout
The Data Log Recorder screen has the following areas:
Status Line Area

The Data Log Recorder status line area displays instructions and
messages regarding the process of the log. It also displays the time
remaining for the current sample.
Settings Panel Area

The Data Log Recorder settings panel area displays the settings,
which were defined in the Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box.
The Selected ECM Parameter area lists all the ECMs selected for
logging with its selected parameters.
Note: If using other functions while recording, the Status bar (bottom
of the screen) displays "The new Data Log file is now available."
when the log is complete.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Data Log Recorder screen are:
• Start/Stop
• Settings…
• Graph
• Export
• Print
Note: The "Graph" push-button is an alternative method for running

the Data Log Viewer function. See "Data Log Viewer," section 1,
page 11.
5-26
Using Data Log Recorder
Instructions
To use Data Log Recorder:
Step 1 Press the "Settings…" push-button. The Data Log

Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed.
Note: The Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed the
first time you try to use this tool.
Step 2 On the General tab, enter the settings to run Data Log
Recorder. If desired, enter the conditions on the
Auto-Trigger tab.
Note: For more information of the Data Log Recorder Settings dialog
box, see "Setting up Data Log Recorder," section 5, page 30.
Step 3 Press "OK" to accept the settings and/or conditions. The

Data Log Recorder screen is displayed with the settings
listed in the Settings Panel (Refer to Illustration 5-20).
Press "Cancel" to exit the Data Log Recorder Settings

dialog box without saving the settings. Press "Help" to
open online help for assistance.
5-27
Illustration 5-20: Data Log Recorder screen
The "Please wait…" message displays. Then, if a

Pre-Trigger is set, "Buffering…" displays on the status
line.
Step 4 Press the "Start" push-button. The data log process

begins and the status of the remaining logging time is
displayed on the status line. When the test is finished,
the status line again reads, "Please Click 'Start' to Start
Logging" and the Status bar (bottom of the screen)
displays "The new Data Log file is now available."
Note: The "Start" push-button is replaced with the "Stop"

push-button until "Stop" is pressed or the test is done.
If the sample rate is less than 20 samples per minute you may use
other service tool functions while logging. If the rate is 20 samples
per minute or faster, a dialog box is displayed stating you cannot
leave Data Log Recorder.
Step 5 To view the data, press "Graph" in the Data Log

Recorder screen. The Select Parameters dialog box of
the Data Log Viewer function is displayed.
OR--
5-28
Select Data Logger from the Information menu, and then
select Data Log Viewer from the sub-menu. The Select
Parameters dialog box of the Data Log Viewer function
is displayed.
Note: For more information of the Data Log Viewer function, see
"Data Log Viewer," section 1, page 11.
5-29
Setting up Data Log Recorder
Illustration 5-21: Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box with General Tab
displayed
Instructions
To set up Data Log Recorder/General tab:

Recorder screen. The Data Log Recorder Settings
Step 2 Select the General tab (Refer to Illustration 5-21).
Step 3 By default, the file name is saved by the date the log is
taken and saved in the datalog folder. If you want to
save the Data Log File on a drive other than the default
drive, enter the new location and/or file name in the Log
File text box.
OR--
Press the "Browse..." push-button to display the Save As
dialog box. See "Changing the Default File," section 5,
page 34.
5-30
Step 4 Select the rate you want the sample taken in the Sample
Rate drop-down list. Select either the per hour or per
minute radio button.
Step 5 Enter how long you want the sample to be collected in

the Duration text box. Select either the hour or minute
radio button.
Step 6 Enter the amount of time before the trigger point in the
Pre-Trigger text box by pressing the up and down arrows
next to the text box, entering in the information with the
keyboard, or use the up and down arrows (↑ and ↓) on
the keyboard to increase or decrease the value by one.
Note: The pre-triggering feature allows you to start recording data

before logging starts. This allows you to see what the data values
are just before the starting point. The default value for pre-trigger is
five seconds (5). If you do not want a pre-trigger, change the value to
zero (0) in the Pre-Trigger text box.
Note: The trigger point in Auto-Trigger is when the condition is met;

otherwise, it is when the "Start" push-button is pressed.
Step 7 Highlight an ECM from the ECM Parameter area. Press

the “Add...” push-button. The Select Group dialog box is
displayed.
Note: For more information on the Select Group dialog box, see
“Selecting a Group,” section 5, page 5.
Step 8 Highlight a group from the Select a Group text box.

Press “OK.” You return to the Data Log Recorder
Settings dialog box.
To clear one group
Highlight the ECM from the ECM Parameter area. Press the
“Clear” push-button. “Not Defined” is displayed in the Group column
for the selected ECM.
5-31
To set up Data Log Recorder/Auto-Trigger tab:

Recorder screen. The Data Log Recorder Settings
Step 2 Select the Auto-Trigger tab (Refer to Illustration 5-22).
Illustration 5-22: Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box with Auto-Trigger
Tab displayed
Step 3 Check the Enable Auto-Trigger check box to activate the

auto-trigger mode and allow you to set up the conditions.
Note: The active triggering feature (Auto-Trigger) allows you to start

recording data based on specific conditions.
Step 4 In the Condition 1 area, select the ECM from the

drop-down list.
Step 5 Select the parameter for the selected ECM from the
drop-down list.
Step 6 Select the comparison action from the drop-down list.
Step 7 Depending on the parameter you select, enter the value

of the comparison in the text box or select the value from
the drop-down list.
5-32
Step 8 If two conditions are desired, select either the "AND" or
"OR" radio button.
Step 9 In the Condition 2 area in the same manner or you set

up the Condition 1 area.
5-33
Changing the Default File
Illustration 5-23: Save As dialog box
Purpose
The “Browse…” push-button allows you to save Data Log Recorder
files on a drive other than the default drive. By default the file name
is saved by the date the log was taken and is saved in the datalog
folder. The service tool also adds an incremental number, beginning
with "_00" after the date.
This dialog box is also displayed if the file already exits and you
choose not to overwrite the data when you are in the Data Log
Recorder main screen.
Instructions
To change the Data Log Recorder file location and/or name:
Step 1 In the Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box, press the
"Browse…" push-button. The Save As dialog box is
Step 2 Select the location where you want to save the file.
This data is saved as a *.sdf file
5-34
Step 4 Type in the name of the file in the File name text box.
Step 5 Enter any comments or information about the file in the

Comments text box.
Step 6 Press “Save” to accept the changes. Press “Cancel” to

exit without saving the file. You return to the Data Log
Recorder screen.
To change an existing file name:
Step 1 If a file name already exits, a message box is displayed

Illustration 5-24: Data Log Recorder message box
Step 2 Press "No" if you do not want to replace the file. The
Save As dialog box is displayed. By default, the date and
the next incremental number is displayed in the File
name text box.
Press "Yes" if you want to replace the file. The Data Log
Recorder screen displays, counting down the remaining
time on the status line. Press “Cancel” to exit without
saving the log.
Step 3 Press the "Save" push-button to accept the file name.

You return to the last active screen.
5-35
Sea Trial
Illustration 5-25: Sea Trial menu functions
Overview
The Sea Trial drop-down contains necessary functions to allow the
recording of marine engine data during sea trials. This includes
general vessel information, steady state operational information, and
recording transient accelerations.
Sea Trial functions currently available on various applications are:
• General Information
• Steady State
• Transient
5-36
Sea Trial General Information
Wizard Area
Tree Area
Illustration 5-26: Sea Trial General Information screen
Purpose
Whenever a Sea Trial test is run, the Computer Aided Marine
Performance Analysis Report (CAMPAR) must be completed. The
goal of the Sea Trial General Information feature is to provide an
automated way of gathering and storing this information through the
service tool. This service tool downloads some of the information
from the ECM. You are then prompted to manually enter the
remaining information. Upon completion of a form, the data
contained in the report is saved to a file. You have the option of
printing the report data.
Note: You can open or create a report without a data link

connection. However, you need to connect to a data link to record
information retrieved from the ECM. For example, the information
under the Setup folder can only be entered when connected to an
ECM.
Accessing
To open Sea Trial General Information:
5-37
Step 1 Select Sea Trial from the Information menu, and then
select General Information from the sub-menu. A Sea
Trial General Information message box is displayed
Illustration 5-27: Sea Trial General Information message box
Step 2 Press the "Yes" push-button if you want to open an

existing report. See "Editing an Existing Sea Trial
General Information Report," section 5, page 51.
Press "No" if you want to create a new report. See

"Creating a New Sea Trial General Information Report,"
section 5, page 48.
Screen Layout
The Sea Trial General Information screen has the following areas:
Tree Area
The tree area is located on the left side of the screen. This area
outlines each of the Sea Trial General Information report sections:
General
Setup
Vessel Data
Vessel Type
Engine Information
Pre-Test Data
Comments
Under each folder of the tree, the different parts of the section are
listed. Selecting any folder or page from the tree area with
your mouse displays the desired selection of the Sea Trial General
Information report in the wizard area.
5-38
After you select an area in the tree, you can use the up and down
arrows (↑ and ↓) on the keyboard to move up and down the tree. As
you move through the tree, the area of the screen that is associated
with the item selected in the tree displays in the wizard area.
Wizard Area
The wizard area is located on the right side of the screen. This is
where the Sea Trial General Information report information can be
entered. All fields are limited to 40 characters, except the comments
screen and the address fields in the General section. Each section of
the report is a separate screen in the wizard.
There are three push-buttons in the wizard area to assist you in

navigating through the screens:
<Back Returns you to the previous report section.
Next> Displays the next report section on the list.
Finish This push-button is enabled when you are in the

Comments screen and an engine is selected in
the Setup screen.
Within a section, the Tab key moves the cursor between fields.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available on the Sea Trial General Information
screen are:
• Save
• Load
• New
• Print
Note: The Print to File option is disabled in the Print Document

dialog box.
5-39
Creating a New Sea Trial General
Information Report
Purpose
The Sea Trial General Information wizard assists in creating a new
report. After saved, the report can be imported into other
applications, for example Excel. The report stores, by default, with a
*.txt extension in the <Caterpillar Electronic Technician
directory>Sea Trial\General Information directory.
For example: C: Program Files\Caterpillar Electronic Technician\Sea

Trial\General Information
Instructions
To create a new report:
Press "No" to create a new report. A blank Sea Trial

General Information screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-29).
OR--
Press the "New" push-button from the Sea Trial General
Information screen. A blank Sea Trial General
Information screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-
29).
5-40
Step 2 Enter the information requested in the seven screens of

the Sea Trial General Information report.
Note: An explanation of navigating through the wizard area screens

is located in the screen layout section of "Sea Trial General
Information," section 5, page 38.
Step 3 When the report is complete, press the "Finish"

push-button in the Comments screen of the wizard to
save the form. If the form is not complete, a message
Note: The "Finish" push-button is enabled when you are in the

Comments screen and an engine is selected in the Setup screen.
OR--
Press the "Save" push-button from the Sea Trial General
Information screen. If the form is not complete, a
5-41
Step 4 Press "Yes" to continuing saving the form. The Save As

Press "No" if you do not want to save the form. You

return to the Sea Trial General Information screen.
Step 5 By default, the report is saved by the date the log is

taken and saved in the General Information folder.
If you want to save the report in a different location,

select the location where you want to save the file. If you
want to save the report file by a different file name, enter
the file name in the Log File text box.
Step 6 Press "Save" to accept the report. Press "Cancel" to exit

without saving the file. You return to Sea Trial General
Information screen.
Note: Refer to "Saving the Sea Trial General Information Report,"

section 5, page 47.
5-42
Editing an Existing Sea Trial General
Information Report
Purpose
After you save a report, the information can be changed at any time.
You do not need a data link connection to retrieve a report.
By default, the file name is saved by the date the report was created
or altered. For example, if you started the report on November 10,
2000, the default file name would be GenInfo2000Nov10.txt. If you
altered the report later, the service tool names the file to a new file
name. If you want to save the report to the same file name as it was
previously, select its current name in the Save As dialog box.
Note: While loading an existing report, two warning boxes may

display:
If you select a data file which was created from an older version of
Sea Trial General Information, a warning box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-32).
Illustration 5-32: Sea Trial General Information warning box
If you are connected to an ECM other than the one listed in the
report, a warning box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-33).
5-43
Instructions
To edit an existing report:
Press the "Yes" push-button if you want to open an

existing report. The Open dialog box is displayed (Refer
OR--
Press the "Load" push-button from the Sea Trial General
Information screen. The Open dialog box is displayed
Illustration 5-35: Sea Trial General Information Open dialog box
Step 2 Select a file and press "Open." You return to the Sea
Trial General Information screen with the selected report
displayed in the wizard (Refer to Illustration 5-36).
5-44
Step 3 Enter changes and/or additional information in the

report.
Step 4 When the report is complete, press the "Finish"

push-button in the Comments screen of the wizard to
save the form. If the form is not complete, a warning box
Note: The "Finish" push-button is enabled when you are in the

Comments screen and an engine is selected in the Setup screen.
OR--
Press the "Save" push-button from the Sea Trial General
Information screen. If the form is not complete, a
warning box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-37).
5-45
Step 5 Press "Yes" to continuing saving the form. The Save As
Press "No" if you do not want to save the form. You

return to the Sea Trial General Information screen.
The name you want to the

report saved as displays in
the File name text box.
Step 6 Select the report's current file name in the Save As text
box to overwrite the file with its new changes. The
selected name displays in the File name text box.
Step 7 Press the "Save" push-button. You return to the Sea

Trial General Information screen with the current report
displayed in the wizard.
Note: Refer to "Saving the Sea Trial General Information Report,"

section 5, page 47.
5-46
Saving the Sea Trial General Information
Report
Overview
You can save a Sea Trial General Information report two ways.
Either by pressing the "Finish" push-button in the Comments screen
of the wizard or pressing the "Save" push-button in the Sea Trial
General Information screen
This report is saved as a comma separated value *.txt file that can
be imported into other applications (for example Excel or Lotus 123).
By default, the file is saved in the Sea Trial\General Information
folder of Caterpillar Electronic Technician.
By default, the file name is "GenInfo" followed by the date. For

example in Illustration 5-39, GenInfo2000Nov17_1.txt means:
GenInfo General Information

2000Nov17 Date log was taken (November 17, 2000)
_1 Second log recorded on that day
Note: If you are saving a report for the first time, see "Creating a
New Sea Trial General Information Report, section 5, page 40. If you
are saving an edited report, see "Editing an Existing Sea Trial
General Information Report," section 5, page 43.
5-47
Printing the Sea Trial General Information Report
Overview
Printing from the text file:
This report is saved as a comma separated value *.txt file that can
be imported into other applications (for example Excel or Lotus 123).
By default, the file is saved in the Sea Trial\General Information

folder of Caterpillar Electronic Technician. The report stores, by
default in the <Caterpillar Electronic Technician directory>Sea
Trial\General Information directory.

Trial\General Information
For an explanation of how to export a Comma Separated Value text

file to an Excel spreadsheet, refer in the Appendix to "Comma
Separated Value," section 10, page 5.
Printing from the "Print" push-button:

You can print your report to a file to File Management, a printer, or to
the screen. The report includes the source of data, time, and date of
report generation, creation date, and the last date the report was
modified. You cannot update a report from File Management.
For instructions on using the "Print" push-button in Sea Trial General

Information, see "Printing," section 1, page 26.
5-48
Sea Trial Steady State
Illustration 5-40: Sea Trial Steady State menu functions
Overview
Steady State options allow the recording of marine engine data
during sea trials. Steady State options currently available on various
marine applications are:
• Settings
• Recorder
• Viewer
Selecting the Settings option displays the Steady State Recorder

Settings dialog box. This dialog box also displays when you select
the Recorder option because you must setup specific requirements
for a test or choose an existing setup file before running a test.
The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder function allows you to capture
engine performance data to help diagnose problems. The captured
data can be compared with past performance data imported into the
CAMPAR (Computer Aided Marine Performance Analysis Report)
program or can be graphed within the service tool.
Data is captured while the engines are at relatively consistent

speeds. If the speed varies more than twenty RPM, the data is
5-49
considered questionable in value. The operator must consider this
when choosing the time and location for using this feature.

5-50
Sea Trial Steady State Settings
Purpose
The "Settings…" push-button allows you to display the Steady State
Recorder Settings dialog box. This dialog box also displays when
you select the Settings option from the Steady State sub-menu.
This screen allows you to set up specific requirements for a test. This
must be done before running the test in order to create a customized
test that meets your needs. You can choose parameters you want to
capture both electronically and manually, the file name and the
storage location, the ECM parameter you would like to monitor on
the screen during the test, and comments about the settings file.
To use the Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box you must
connect to an ECM. Then, you can create and store settings for
future use. Each settings file is saved as *.set.
Instructions
To set up a Sea Trial Steady State Settings file:
Step 1 Press the "Settings…" push-button from the Sea Trial

Steady State Recorder screen. The Steady State
Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-41).
OR—
Select the Settings option from the Steady State sub-
menu. The Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box is
OR—
Select the Recorder option from the Steady State sub-
menu. The Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box is
5-51
Illustration 5-41: Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box
Step 2 Highlight a file from the Steady State Settings Files list
box. You can view the details of the highlighted setting
file in the Settings Details list box.
When checked, the Show Default Settings Location

check box displays the path for the settings file.
To view the details, highlight one of the setting detail

options: Comments, Data File, ECM Parameters,
Manual Parameters, or Monitored ECM Parameter. As
you highlight the setting choice, the current values for
that choice display in the text box to the right of the
settings detail choices.
Comments Displays comments entered

about the selected settings file.
Data File Displays where the test

log/data file is stored and its
name.
5-52
ECM Parameters Displays parameter values
read from the ECM.
Manual Parameters Displays parameters that must

be read and entered manually
by the technician.
Monitored ECM This parameter is a one you

Parameters can select to monitor on the
screen during the test. If no
parameter is selected, Fuel
Consumption Rate is selected
by default.
can consecutively view the details of each setting in the Settings
Details text box.
Step 3 Press "OK." The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder

screen is displayed and ready to begin the recording
process. Press "Cancel" to exit the screen without
selecting a settings file. You return to the Sea Trial
Steady State Recorder screen.
Note: The "Browse" push-button displays the Open dialog box. This
allows you to select a steady state file from a different location than
the default location. See "Selecting a Steady State Settings File,"
section 5, page 59. To create a new steady state setting, see
"Creating a New Steady State Settings File," section 5, page 54. To
modify an existing steady state setting, see "Modifying a Steady
State Settings File," section 5, page 56.
5-53
Creating a New Steady State Settings File
Purpose
The Steady State Recorder wizard assists in creating a new settings
file or modifying an existing settings file. The settings file stores, by
default, with a *.set extension in the <Caterpillar Electronic
Technician directory>Sea Trial\Steady State\Settings directory.

Trial\Steady State\ Settings
Instructions
To create a new steady state settings file:

Steady State Recorder screen. The Sea Trial Steady
State Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed.
OR—
menu. The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder Settings
OR—
Step 2 Press the "New…" push-button. Steady State Recorder

Setup wizard is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-42).
5-54
Illustration 5-42: Steady State Recorder Setup wizard box–Data File Setup
Step 3 Enter the information requested on the six setup

screens.
Note: Refer to "Understanding the Steady State Recorder Setup

Screens," section 5, page 60 for information on understand the
different areas of the wizard and to help navigate you through the
screens.
Step 4 When setup screens are complete, press the "Finish"

push-button to save the settings to a file. If the
information is not complete, a message box informs you
what information needs to be included.
Press "Cancel" to exit the setup wizard and return to the

Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box.
5-55
Modifying a Steady State Settings File
Purpose
The Steady State Recorder wizard assists in creating a new settings
file or modifying an existing settings file. The settings file stores, by
default, with a *.set extension in the C: Program Files\Caterpillar
Electronic Technician\Sea Trial\Steady State\Settings directory.
Instructions
To change a steady state settings file:

Steady State Recorder screen. The Sea Trial Steady
State Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-43).
OR—
OR—
5-56
Illustration 5-43: Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box
Step 2 Highlight a file from the Steady State Settings Files list
box. You can view the details of the highlighted setting
file in the Settings Details list box.
Step 3 Press the "Modify…" push-button. The Steady State

Recorder Setup wizard is displayed (Refer to Illustration
5-44).
5-57
The settings file selected to be modified displays in the

file folder.
Step 3 Select the settings screen you wish to modify. After you
make the changes, select the Settings Summary screen
to review these changes.
Step 4 Press "Finish" to save the settings changes. Press

"Cancel" to exit the setup wizard without making
changes to the settings file. You return to the Steady
State Recorder Settings dialog box.
5-58
Selecting a Steady State Settings File
Illustration 5-45: Open dialog box
Overview
The "Browse…" from the Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box
displays the Open dialog box (Refer to Illustration 5-45). This allows
you to select a steady state settings file (*.set) from a different
location than the default location and add this file to the Steady State
Settings Files list box.
5-59
Understanding the Steady State Recorder Setup
Screens
Tree Area
Wizard Area
Screen Layout
The Steady State Recorder Setup wizard has the following areas:
Tree Area
The tree area is located on the left side of the screen. In this area is
a list of setup screens which must be complete before data can be
captured. When creating a new settings file, the folder for these
screens reads "New Steady State Setting." The setup screens that
must be completed are Data File, ECM Parameters, Manual
Parameters, Monitored ECM Parameter, Comments, and Setting
Summary.
When a setup screen needs information, a file icon ( ) displays in

front of that item. When the information for an item is complete, a
check box icon ( ) displays in front of the setup screen name. The
name of the screen that currently displays in the wizard area is
highlighted.
5-60
Wizard Area
The wizard area is located on the right side of the screen. This area
allows you to customize the settings before capturing data. Once
complete, these settings can be saved as a *.set file.
Setup screens These screens are where you enter the

information before data can be captured. Refer
to the setup screen name for help on entering
the information for the different dialog boxes.
Push-buttons An option to navigate through the setup screens.

The "<Back" push-button returns you to the
previous setup screen. The "Next>" push-button
displays the next setup screen on the list.
Navigating though the setup screens

There are two ways to select a setup screen to view, from the tree
area or using the wizard.
Tree Use your mouse to select an item from the list in the tree
area. The screen associated with this item displays to
the right of the tree. Or, use the up and down arrows
(↑ and ↓) on the keyboard, to display the screen
associated with the item.
Wizard The push-buttons at the bottom of the screen

consecutively displays the setup screens.
Note: Remember, the information that you are saving through the
setup screens is only settings information. Data Captured from the
test is stored in the selected file (*.ssd) when you run the test.
5-61
Using the Data File Setup Screen
Data File Setup

Screen
Illustration 5-47: Steady State Recorder-Data File Setup screen
Purpose
The Data File Setup screen displays the file name and location for
saving steady state data files, which allow you to change the default
data file path and/or file name. A steady state data file must have the
extension *.ssd.
By default, the file is saved in the Sea Trial\Steady State\DataLog

folder of Caterpillar Electronic Technician.
Note: If the service tool is not installed in the default location

C:\Program Files\Caterpillar Electronic Technician, you must press
the "Browse…" push-button and locate the service tool's location.
By default, the file name is "SSLog" followed by the date. For

example in Illustration 5-49, SSLogSep1200_0.ssd means:
SSLog Steady State Log

Sep1200 Date log was taken (September 12, 2000)
_0 First log recorded on that day
5-62
Note: This item is checked in the tree area because the data file
name is chosen by default.
Instructions
To change file location and/or name:
Step 1 In the Steady State Recorder-Data File Setup screen,

press the "Browse…" push-button. The Save As dialog
Note: It may be helpful for you to name the file by the vessel name
and serial number.
Step 4 Press "Save" to accept the changes. Press "Cancel" to

exit without saving the file. You return to the Steady
State Recorder-Data File Setup screen.
OR—
In the Steady State Recorder-Data File Setup screen, type in the
new file name in the Name text box.
Note: When you press "Finish" or "Save As…" in the Steady State
Recorder-Settings Summary screen, and have used the same *.ssd
file name, a message box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-49)
asking if you want to overwrite this file.
5-63
Illustration 5-49: Steady State Recorder message box
Press "Yes" to use the same file name. The Save Settings dialog box
is displayed. Press "No" if you do want to change the file name. You
return to the Data File Setup screen to change the name.
5-64
Using the ECM Parameters Setup Screen
ECM Parameter
Setup Screen
Illustration 5-50: Steady State Recorder-ECM Parameters Setup screen
Purpose
The ECM Parameters Setup screen allows you to setup the ECM
group of parameters for the data capture. These are parameters for
which the values are read from the ECM.
Instructions
To select a group:
Step 1 Highlight an ECM in the ECM Parameter Groups area.
Step 2 Press the "Groups…" push-button. The Select Group

Note: For more information on the Select Group dialog box see
"Selecting a Group," section 5, page 5. The Select Group dialog box
for Steady State Recorder includes the name of the selected ECM
under the title bar.
Step 3 Highlight a group from the Select a group text box. Press
"OK." You return to the ECM Parameter Setup screen.
5-65
If multiple ECMs are available, you can select a different
ECM and then select the "Groups…" push-button in
order to select its parameters.
Note: If you select the Apply All Groups to All ECMs check box, the
groups listed for the ECMs will apply to all ECMs. This applies
whether one group has been selected for one ECM or if all ECMs
have defined groups. "Not Defined" displays in the group cell when
Apply All Groups to All ECMs is checked.
To clear one group:
Highlight the ECM from the ECM Parameter Groups area. Press
the “Clear” push-button. “Not Defined” is displayed in the Group
column for the selected ECM.
5-66
Using the Manual Parameters Setup Screen
Manual
Parameter
Setup Screen
Illustration 5-51: Steady State Recorder-Manual Parameters Setup screen
Purpose
The Manual Parameters Setup screen allows you to setup the
manual groups for the data capture. The technician must read and
enter these parameters manually. These manual readings should be
entered in the Sea Trial Steady State Recorder main screen after the
capture has been made. These manual parameters cannot be added
or changed after exiting Steady State Recorder.
Note: The process for choosing manual parameters is exactly the

same as choosing ECM parameters.
Instructions
To select a group:
Step 1 Highlight an ECM in the ECM Parameter Groups list box.
Step 2 Press the "Groups…" push-button. The Select Group

5-67
Illustration 5-52: Select Group dialog box
Step 3 Highlight a group from the Select a group text box. Press
"OK." You return to the ECM Parameter Setup screen.
If multiple ECMs are available, you can select a different

ECM and then select the "Groups…" push-button in
order to select its parameters.
Note: If you select the Apply All Groups to All ECMs check box, the
groups listed for the ECMs will apply to all ECMs. This applies
whether one group has been selected for one ECM or if all ECMs
have defined groups. "Not Defined" displays in the group cell when
Apply All Groups to All ECMs is checked.
To clear one group:
Highlight the ECM from the ECM Parameter Groups area. Press
the “Clear” push-button. “Not Defined” is displayed in the Group
column for the selected ECM.
5-68
Maintaining a Group-Manual Parameters
Illustration 5-53: Maintain Groups dialog box for Manual Parameters
Purpose
You can create a custom group to monitor if you do not wish to use a
default group. Custom groups can also be changed or deleted.
Creating, changing, and deleting manual parameter groups are
similar to creating, changing, and deleting ECM parameters. See
"Selecting a Group," section 5, page 5 for information on navigating
through the Select Group dialog box.
Note: The Select Group dialog box for Steady State Recorder
includes the name of the selected ECM under the title bar. When
creating a group, only one ECM may be selected at a time.
The Maintain Groups dialog box for Manual Parameters allows you
to do the following:
• Change the unit value for a CAMPAR "900" default

parameter
• Create manual descriptions and specify the unit value for
Custom Channels A through E.
For Manual Parameters, the CAMPAR Number is included in the

Available Parameters list box.
5-69
Instructions
To change the unit value for a CAMPAR "900" default parameter:
Step 1 Press the "New" push-button in the Select Group dialog

box. The Maintain Groups dialog box is displayed (Refer
Step 2 Highlight a parameter in the Available parameter list box

and press the ">" push-button. This moves the
parameter from the Available Parameters list box to the
Group list box (Refer to Illustration 5-54).
Illustration 5-54: Maintain Group dialog box
Step 3 In the Group list box, select the new value from the Unit
drop-down list (Refer to Illustration 5-55).
5-70
Note: Continue to select parameters to create a group.
To create a manual parameter description/unit (Custom Channel):
Step 1 Press the "New" push-button in the Select Group dialog

box. The Maintain Groups dialog box is displayed (Refer
Step 2 In the Available Parameters list box, scroll down until the
CAMPAR number changes to letters. This is the area
where you can create your own manual parameter
description (Refer to Illustration 5-56).
5-71
Step 3 Highlight a lettered CAMPAR Number and press the ">"

push-button. This moves the parameter from the
Available Parameters list box to the Group list box.
Step 4 In the Group list box, select the "User Defined Data" cell
and type in the new description (Refer to Illustration 5-
57).
5-72
If needed, in the unit cell, type in the desired value.
Continue to select parameters to create a group.
5-73
Using the Monitored Parameters Setup Screen
Monitored
Parameter
Setup Screen
Illustration 5-58: Steady State Recorder-Monitored Parameter Setup screen
Purpose
The Monitored Parameters Setup screen allows you to select one
status parameter to display in the Status Parameter area. The last
parameter selected displays in the Status Parameter area the next
time the settings file is used. If no parameter is selected, Fuel
Consumption Rate is selected by default.
Note: Engine Speed and Active Diagnostic Codes present always

display in the status parameter area.
Instructions
To select a status parameter for display:
Step 1 Highlighting the parameter in the Selected Parameter list

box and pressing the “<” push-button.

box and press the “>” push-button. This will move the
Selected Parameter list box.
5-74
Note: This item is checked in the tree area because the Fuel
Consumption Rate parameter is chosen by default.
5-75
Using the Comments Screen
Comments
Screen
Illustration 5-59: Steady State Recorder-Comments screen
Purpose
The Comments screen allows you to record information regarding
the settings file that you created. These comments can help you
identify a settings file such as information about why it was created
or for what type of test the settings were made. The comments are
saved with the settings file and not with the data file.
Instructions
To enter comments about the settings file:
Type any comments or information about the settings in the

Comments text box.
Note: Press the "Clear" push-button to clear all comments. The “Are
you sure…” message box is displayed. Press “Yes” if you want to
clear the comments or “No” if you want to keep the comments. You
return to the Steady State Recorder-Comments screen.
5-76
Using the Settings Summary screen
Settings
Summary
Screen
Illustration 5-60: Steady State Recorder-Setting Summary screen
Purpose
The Settings Summary screen allows you to view a summary of all of
the current settings and save these settings. These settings can be
saved as an existing setting file or as a new settings file.
Instructions
To save a new settings file:
Step 1 After reviewing the settings, press the "Finish"

push-button. The Save Settings dialog box is displayed
OR—
Press the "Save As…" push-button. The Save Settings
5-77
Illustration 5-61: Save Settings dialog box
Step 2 Type in the name of the settings file in the Setup Name
text box.
Step 3 Press "OK." You return to the Steady State Recorder-

Settings Summary screen.
Press "Cancel" if you do not want to save the settings.

You return to the Steady State Recorder-Settings
Summary screen.
To save a modified settings file:
Step 1 After reviewing the settings, press the "Finish"

push-button. You return to the Steady State Recorder
Settings dialog box with your changes saved.
OR--
Press the "Save As…" push-button. The Save Settings
Step 2 Type in the name of the settings file in the Setup Name
text box.
Step 3 Press "OK." You return to the Steady State Recorder-

Settings Summary screen.
Press "Cancel" if you do not want to save the settings.

You return to the Steady State Recorder-Settings
Summary screen.
5-78
Sea Trial Steady State Recorder
Purpose
The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder function allows you to capture
engine performance data to help diagnose problems. The captured
data can be compared with past performance data imported into the
CAMPAR (Computer Aided Marine Performance Analysis Report)
program or can be graphed within the service tool.
Data is captured while the engines are at relatively consistent

speeds. If the speed varies more than twenty RPM, the data is
considered questionable in value. The operator must consider this
when choosing the time and location for using this feature.
Accessing
To run a steady state log:
Step 1 Select Sea Trial from the Information menu. From the
sub-menu select Steady State and then Recorder. The
Steady State Recorder Settings dialog box is displayed.
Note: To set up a Sea Trial Steady State Settings file, see "Sea Trial
Steady State Settings" section 5, page 51.
Step 2 Select a steady state settings file. Press "OK." As the file
is loading, the "Please wait…" message displays. Then,
the Sea Trial Steady State Recorder dialog box is
5-79
Status
Parameter Area
Capture Area
Illustration 5-62: Sea Trial Steady State Recorder screen
Screen Layout
The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder screen has the following areas:

The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder status parameter area lists the
parameters required to be monitored during the test and its current
values for all detected ECMs.
The parameters listed are Engine Speed, Active Diagnostic Codes

Present, and a user defined parameter. If no parameter is selected
for the "user defined parameter," Fuel Consumption Rate is selected
by default. See "Using the Monitored Parameters Setup Screen,"
section 5, page 89.
The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder status parameter area also
lists, across the top, all ECMs on the data link.
Capture Area
The Sea Trial Steady State Recorder capture area displays the data
for each capture simultaneously. The data displayed is grouped by
the parameter and the ECM. After capturing the data, a column is
added to the spreadsheet detailing the parameter's readings. The
engine speed for each capture is listed at the top of the column.
5-80
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Sea Trial Steady State Recorder
screen are:
• Start
• Delete
• Settings…
• Comments…
• Active Codes
• Export
Note: "See Displaying Active Diagnostic and Event Codes,"

section 1, page 9. 3406E, 3176, and 3196 engines (ATA data link)
do not support active codes. "Unavailable" displays in the description
area in the Active Codes dialog box.
5-81
Using Sea Trial Steady State Recorder
Illustration 5-63: Sea Trial Steady State Recorder
Overview
Once you have selected a settings file, you are ready to begin
capturing information from the ECM to display on the Sea Trial
Steady State Recorder screen.
When data is being captured, each parameter is sampled ten times

and averaged. If there is a large number of parameters to be
sampled, they are tested in groups of ten until the log is complete.
This could take approximately five seconds for each ten parameters
sampled.
Instructions
To capture data:
Step 1 In the Sea Trial Steady State Recorder screen, press the
"Start" push-button. A progress bar is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-64).
5-82
Illustration 5-64: Sea Trial Steady State Recorder screen with progress bar
You can cancel the data capturing process at any time,

by pressing the "Cancel" push-button. The "Are you
sure…" message box is displayed. Press "Yes" to cancel
the capture or "No" not to cancel.
Step 2 When the data has been successfully captured, a

message box is displayed suggesting you enter the
manual parameter readings (Refer to Illustration 5-65). It
is recommended that you enter this data after each
capture to avoid data-entry confusion.
Note: If the data is not entered before the Sea Trial Steady State
Recorder screen is closed or if the data link connection is lost or the
ECM powers down (engine is turned off) you will not be able to add
or edit this information within the service tool.
After a successful data log capture, the information is automatically

saved in the data log file.
5-83
Illustration 5-65: Enter Manual Parameter reading message box
Press "OK." You return to the Steady State Recorder

screen (Refer to Illustration 5-66).
A column is added to the spreadsheet detailing the

parameter's readings. Note that the engine speed for
each capture is listed at the top of the column.
Step 3 Parameters that have data which needs to be entered

manually, display with a gray field in the cell. Type the
manual readings into the cell. Continue to enter the
manual reading by scrolling down. This information is
recorded with the data file.
5-84
Step 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each data capture. When
each subsequent capture is complete, a new column is
added (Refer to Illustration 5-67).
Remember, once you exit the Sea Trial Steady State

Recorder screen, data information can no longer be
entered or changed.
Note: To exit the Sea Trial Steady State Recorder screen, select
another service tool function.
5-85
Deleting a Capture
Instructions
To delete an entire column of captured data:
Step 1 Place your cursor in one of the cells of the column

(capture) you wish to delete.
Step 2 Press the "Delete" push-button. The Are you sure…”

message box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-68) with
the selected column highlighted.
Illustration 5-68: "Are you sure…" message box
Step 3 Press “Yes” if you want to delete the column or “No” if

you want to keep the column.
5-86
Adding Comment to the Capture
Illustration 5-69: Comments dialog box
Purpose
The "Comments…" push-button allows you to enter information
about the data file (*.ssd). The comments are saved with the data file
and not with the settings file.
Instructions
To add a comment to the data file:
Step 1 Press "Comments…" from the Sea Trial Steady State

Recorder screen. The Comments dialog box is displayed
Step 2 Type any comments or information about the data file in

the Steady State Test Comments text box.
Step 3 Press "OK" to accept the comments. Press "Cancel" to

exit the Comments dialog box without entering
comments. You return to the Sea Trial Steady State
Recorder screen.
Press "Clear" to clear all comments. The "Are you

sure…" message box is displayed. Press "Yes if you
want to clear the comments or "No" if you want to keep
the comments. You return to the Comments dialog box.
5-87
Sea Trial Transient
Illustration 5-70: Sea Trial Transient menu functions
Overview
The Sea Trial Transient functions allow you to record data of a
selected group(s) of parameters from the ECM as it occurs. This
data is saved as a *.sdf file. After you record the data, you may view
the logged data graphically or export the data as a *.txt file. As a
Comma Separated Value text file, the data can be imported into
other applications (for example Excel or Lotus 123).

Sea Trial Transient functions currently available on various

applications are:
• Recorder
• Viewer

5-88
"Not Installed," or "Not Available" is inserted into the file.
5-89
Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder
Status Line
Area
Settings Panel
Area
Illustration 5-71: Sea Trial Transient Data Logger screen
Purpose
The Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder function allows you to
capture or log multiple engine performance data, which aids in
diagnosing potential problems. This function allows you the flexibility
to define a sample rate and the duration of the sample.
Note: When using Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder with an
ATA data link, a dialog box displays asking if you want to switch to
CAT Data Link. Press "Yes." The Connection message box is
displayed. Then, Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder screen is
displayed.
Accessing
To run the Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder function:
Select Sea Trial from the Information menu, and then select
Transient from the sub-menu. The Sea Trial Transient Data Log
Recorder screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-71).
5-90
Note: The Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog
box is displayed the each time you try to use this tool. See "Setting
Up Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder," section 5, page 94.
Screen Layout
The Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder screen has the following
areas:
Status Line Area

The Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder status line area displays
instructions and messages regarding the process of the log.
Settings Panel Area

The Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder settings panel area
displays the settings, which was defined in the Sea Trial Transient
Data Logger Settings dialog box. It also displays the time remaining
for the current sample.
The Selected ECM Parameter area lists all the ECMs selected for
logging with its selected parameters.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Sea Trial Transient Data Log
Recorder screen are:
• Start/Stop
• Settings…
• Graph
• Export
• Print
Note: The "Graph" push-button is an alternative method for running

the Data Log Viewer function. See "Data Log Viewer," section 1,
page 11.
5-91
Using Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder
Instructions
To use the Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder:
Step 1 Press the "Settings…" push-button. The Sea Trial

Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box is
displayed.
Note: The Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog
box is displayed the each time you try to use this tool.
Step 2 On the Setup tab, enter the settings to run Sea Trial
Transient Data Log Recorder. If desired, enter
comments and/or information on the Log File Comments
tab.
Note: For more information of the Sea Trial Transient Data Log
Recorder Settings dialog box, see "Setting up Sea Trial Transient
Data Log Recorder," section 5, page 99.
Step 3 Press "OK" to accept the settings. The Sea Trial

Transient Data Log Recorder screen is displayed with
the settings listed in the Settings Panel (Refer to
Illustration 5-71).
Press "Cancel" to exit the Sea Trial Transient Data Log

Recorder Settings dialog box without saving the settings.
Press "Help" to open online help for assistance.
Step 4 The "Please wait…" message displays. Press the "Start"

push-button. The data log process begins and the status
of the remaining logging time is displayed on the status
line (Refer to Illustration 5-72).
5-92
Illustration 5-72: Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder screen
When the test is finished, the status line again reads,

"Please Click 'Start' to Start Logging" and the Status bar
(bottom of the screen) displays "The new Data Log file is
now available."
Note: The "Start" push-button is replaced with the "Stop"

push-button until "Stop" is pressed or the test is done.
If the sample rate is less than 20 samples per minute you may use
other service tool functions while logging. If the rate is 20 samples
per minute or faster, a dialog box is displayed stating you cannot
leave Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder.
Step 5 To view the data, press "Graph" in the Sea Trial

Transient Data Log Recorder screen. The Select
is displayed.
OR--
Select Data Logger from the Information menu, and then
select Data Log Viewer from the sub-menu. The Select
is displayed.
5-93
Note: For more information of the Data Log Viewer function, see
"Data Log Viewer," section 1, page 11.
5-94
Setting up Sea Trial Transient Data Log
Recorder
Illustration 5-73: Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box
with Setup Tab displayed
Instructions
To set up Sea Trial Transient Data Log Settings/Setup tab:

Transient Data Logger screen. The Sea Trial Transient
Data Logger Settings dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select the Setup tab (Refer to Illustration 5-73).
Step 3 By default, the file name is saved by the date the log is
taken and saved in the datalog folder. If you want to
save the Data Log File on a drive other than the default
drive, enter the new location and/or file name in the Log
File text box.
OR--
Press the "Browse..." push-button to display the Save As
dialog box. See "Changing the Default File," section 5,
page 97.
5-95
Step 4 Select the rate you want the sample taken in the Sample
Rate drop-down list. Select either the per hour or per
minute radio button.
Step 5 Enter how long you want the sample to be collected in

the Duration text box. Select either the hour or minute
radio button.
Step 6 Highlight an ECM from the ECM Parameter area. Press

the “Add …” push-button. The Select Group dialog box is
displayed.
Note: For more information on the Select Group dialog box, see
“Selecting a Group,” section 5, page 5.
Step 7 Highlight a group from the Select a Group text box.

Press “OK.” You return to the Data Log Recorder
To clear one group
Highlight the ECM from the ECM Parameter area. Press the
“Clear” push-button. “Not Defined” is displayed in the Group column
for the selected ECM.
To set up Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings/Log File

Comments tab:

Transient Data Log Recorder screen. The Sea Trial
Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Select the Log File Comments tab (Refer to Illustration

5-74).
5-96
Illustration 5-74: Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box
with Log File Comments Tab displayed
Step 3 Enter any comments or information about the log in the

Log File Comments text box.
Clear Text Erases all text on the screen,

leaving the text box area blank.
Default Questions Erases all text on the screen, and

displays the default questions.
Note: Information and/or comments added in the Log File Comments

text box of the Save As dialog box also display in the Log File
Comments tab of the Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder
5-97
Purpose
The “Browse…” push-button allows you to save Sea Trial Transient
Data Log Recorder files on a drive other than the default drive. By
default the file name is saved by the date the log was taken and is
saved in the datalog folder. The service tool also adds an
incremental number, beginning with "_00" after the date.
This dialog box is also displayed if the file already exits and you
choose not to overwrite the data when you are in the Sea Trial
Transient Data Log Recorder main screen.
Instructions
To change the Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder file location
and/or name:
Step 1 In the Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings

dialog box, press the "Browse…" push-button. The Save
As dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-75).
5-98
This data is saved as a *.sdf file
Step 5 Enter any comments or information about the log in the

Log File Comments text box.
Clear Text Erases all text on the screen,

leaving the text box area blank.
Default Questions Erases all text on the screen, and

displays the default questions.
Note: Information and/or comments added in the Log File Comments

tab of the Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder Settings dialog box
also display in the Log File Comments text box of the Save As dialog
box.

exit without saving the file. You return to the Data Log
Recorder screen.

Illustration 5-76: Data Log Recorder message box
Step 2 Press "No" if you do not want to overwrite the file. The
Save As dialog box is displayed. By default, the date and
the next incremental number is displayed in the File
name text box.
5-99
Press "Yes" if you want to overwrite the file. The Sea
Trial Transient Data Log Recorder screen displays,
counting down the remaining time on the status line.
Press “Cancel” to exit without saving the log.
Step 3 Press the "Save" push-button to accept the file name.

You return to the last active screen.
5-100
Real Time Graphing
ECM Title
Area Error Status
Text Box
Legend Area
Graph
Area
Illustration 5-77: Real Time Graphing screen
Purpose
Real Time Graphing monitors ECM data and displays it in graphical
form as it occurs. When running Real Time Graphing for the first
time, you must select a set of parameters to graph.
Accessing
To run the Real Time Graphing function:
Select Real Time Graphing from the Information menu. The Real
Time Graphing screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-77).
Note: The Select Graph Set dialog box is displayed the first time you
try to use this tool.
If the Select Graph Set dialog box is displayed:
Step 1 Select a set from the Select Graph Set list box. As you
select a graph set, the parameters for that set are
5-101
can consecutively view each set and its parameters in the Select
Graph Set dialog box. If a set is created, you can choose that set by
selecting the first letter of its name.
Step 2 Press “OK” to accept the selected set. The set data that
you selected is displayed in the Real Time Graphing
screen.

set.
Screen Layout
The Real Time Graphing screen has the following areas:
ECM Title Area

The ECM title area displays the name of the graph set you have
chosen.
Error Status Text Box

The Error Status Text Box displays errors that occur while retrieving
the parameter value. If more than one error occurs, the text box
changes to a drop-down list for viewing all errors. “No Error Present”
displays if there are no errors. “Unable to plot value” displays if the
selected parameter cannot be plotted.
Note: To view the list status errors in the text box, press the up and
down arrows next to the text box or use the up and down arrows
(↑ and ↓) on the keyboard.
Legend Area
The Real Time Graphing legend area displays the selected
parameters and is above the graph. These parameters are displayed
with the corresponding line color. These colors cannot be changed.
Parameters with an error will display an asterisk to indicate the
parameter error is listed in the Error Status text box.
parameters may be selected. These parameters display in the line
color.
5-102
Graph Area
The Real Time Graphing area displays the time in seconds on the
x-axis (ten seconds is default) and the minimum and maximum
values for each parameter on the y-axis. State parameters (for
example, the only status is “On” or “Off”), initially display with dashed
lines until the graph begins to trace the state parameter's value.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Real Time Graphing screen are:
• Graph Sets
• Settings…
• Hold/ Resume
• Print
5-103
Selecting a Graph Set
Illustration 5-78: Select Graph Set dialog box
Purpose
The “Graph Sets” push-button allows you to display the Select Graph
Set dialog box. This dialog box provides access for creating,
changing, and deleting graph sets.
The Maintain Graph Sets dialog box allows you to assign parameters
to a new set that you are creating. It also allows you to change
parameters in a graph set and/or in the Temporary Set.
Note: Some ECMs may contain defined default graph sets. These
graph sets cannot be altered.
Note: Pressing “OK” in the Select Graph Set dialog box causes the
graph to redraw.
Instructions
To select a graph set:
Step 1 Press the “Graph Sets” push-button from the Real Time
Graphing screen. The Select Graph Set dialog box is
Step 2 Highlight a graph set from the Select Graph Set list box
and press “OK.” The Real Time Graphing screen is
displayed showing the selected set and its parameters.
5-104
can consecutively view each set and its parameters in the Select
Graph Set dialog box. If a graph set is created, you can choose that
set by selecting the first letter of its name. If there is more than one
graph set with the same first letter, continually pressing the letter
scrolls through those graph sets consecutively.
To create a new set (with one ECM):
displayed.
Step 2 Press the “New” push-button to create a new set. The

Maintain Graph Sets dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-79).
Illustration 5-79: Maintain Graph Sets dialog box

box and press the “>” push-button. This will move
Parameters list box to the Set list box, (highlighting a
parameter in the Set list box and pressing the “<”
push-button will move it back).
5-105
A maximum of six parameters can be added to the Set
list box. A warning box displays if you try to enter more
than the maximum number of parameters.
Step 4 Press the “Save As” push-button. The Save Graph Set
Illustration 5-80: Save Graph Set dialog box
Step 5 Enter the graph set name in the Enter Graph Set Name
text box.
Step 6 Press “OK” if you want to save the new graph set name.
You return to the Select Graph Set dialog box.
Press “Cancel if you want to leave the Save Graph Set

Maintain Graph Sets dialog box.
To create a new set (with multiple ECMs):
displayed.
Step 2 Press the “New” push-button to create a new set. The

Maintain Graph Sets dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-81).
5-106
Illustration 5-81: Maintain Graph Sets dialog box

Parameters list box to the Set list box, (highlighting a
parameter in the Set list box and pressing the “<”
When finished, you can select a different ECM and then

select from its Available parameters. A maximum of six
parameters can be added to the Set list box.
Step 5 Press the “Save As” push-button. The Save Graph Set
Step 6 Enter the graph set name in the Enter Graph Set Name
text box.
Step 7 Press “OK” if you want to save the new graph set name.
You return to the Select Graph Set dialog box.
Press “Cancel” if you want to leave the Save Graph Set

Maintain Graph Set dialog box.
5-107
To change a set:
displayed.
Step 2 Highlight either the Temporary Set or a set that you

created from the Select Graph Set list box and press
“Change”. The Maintain Graph Sets dialog box is
displayed.
Note: Sets that are already in the Select Graph Set dialog box as
default cannot be changed.

box and press the “>” push-button to move the
parameters, one at a time to the Set list box. Highlight a
parameter in the Set list box and press the “<”
push-button to move it back to the Available parameters.
Step 4 Press “OK” when you are finished making changes in

the Maintain Graph Sets dialog box. The “Do you want to
save the current graph set…” message box is displayed.
Step 5 Press “Yes” to save the set as a different name. The

Save Graph Set dialog box is displayed. Enter the new
set name in the Enter Graph Set Name text box and
press “OK.”
Press “No” to keep the same set name (displayed above

the Set list box). You return to the Select Graph Set
dialog box.
To delete a set:
Step 1 Press the “Graph Sets” push-button. The Select Graph

Set dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Highlight a set from the Select Graph Sets list box and
press “Delete”. The “Are you sure…” message box is
displayed.
Note: The temporary group or groups that are already set in the
Select a group dialog box as default cannot be deleted.
5-108
Step 3 Press “Yes” if you want to delete the graph set or “No if
you do not want to delete the graph set. You return to
the Select Graph Set dialog box.
To leave a screen at any time:
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to make any changes. You will
return to the Real Time Graphing screen.
5-109
Illustration 5-82: Graph Settings dialog box
Purpose
The “Settings…” push-button allows you to change the time range of
the x-axis and change the displaying range of the status parameter
of the y-axis. It also allows you to change the look of the graph.
Changing the graph settings causes the graph to redraw.
Note: If a parameter’s range cannot be changed, the value is

grayed.
Instructions
Step 1 Press the “Settings…” push-button. The Graph Settings

dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-82)
Step 2 Select the time, in seconds, from the X-Axis Range

drop-down list. Ten seconds is default.
Step 3 In the Y-Axis Range area, the status parameters are

listed with their minimum and maximum default values.
5-110
To limit the range, double click on the cell and enter a
new value.
Note: If you enter a value that is out of the minimum or maximum

range, a message box is displayed stating that the value is out of
range for the selected parameter. The range for the selected
parameter adjusts automatically to a value within the range.
Step 4 In the Options area, check the options you want to

display on the Real Time Graphing screen.
Show Grid displays grid lines on the graph area. Show

Symbols displays symbols on the graph lines
corresponding to the symbol above the parameter.


positions.
5-111
Pausing the Display
Purpose
The “Hold” push-button allows you to freeze the graph, so that you
Note: If you change a graph set after pressing the “Hold”

push-button, the graph remains paused until “Resume” is pressed.
Instructions
Step 1 Press the “Hold” push-button from the Real Time Graph
screen. The service tool immediately stops updating the
graph. The “Hold” push-button changes to the “Resume”
push-button.

5-112
Snapshot
Illustration 5-83: Snapshot menu functions
Overview
The Snapshot functions allow you to record and then view snapshot
data retrieved from the ECM. The documents recorded save in File
Management
The Snapshot functions currently available on various applications

are:
• Recorder
• Viewer
5-113
Snapshot Recorder
ECM Title
Area
Display
Area
Illustration 5-84: Snapshot Recorder screen
Purpose
The Snapshot Recorder function allows you to view the activity of a
group of parameters from the ECM and then select a trigger point.
Note: Triggering a Snapshot (pressing the Trigger push-button)

causes the ECM to record a limited set of status parameters. This
set of status parameters depends on the ECM.
Instructions
To run the Snapshot Recorder function:
Select Snapshot from the Information menu, and then select

Recorder from the sub-menu. The Snapshot Recorder screen is
Note: The Select Group dialog box is displayed the first time you use
this function unless a group has been assigned somewhere else in
the service tool. Once you choose a group, the Snapshot Recorder
5-114
If the Select Group dialog box is displayed:
Step 2 Press “OK” to accept the selected group. The group data
that you selected is displayed in the Snapshot Recorder
screen (Refer to Illustration 5-84).

group.
Note: In the Snapshot Recorder screen, you can view each group
consecutively by using the “Page Up” and “Page Down” keys. You
can view a specific default group by selecting the key number
corresponding to that Group (the key number for groups 1 through 9,
ALT plus the key number for groups 10 through 19, or the 0 (zero)
key for the <TEMPORARY GROUP>).
Screen Layout
The Snapshot Recorder screen has the following areas:
ECM Title Area

The ECM title area displays the ECM group and ECM name that you
have chosen. This area is located in the upper left-hand corner of the
screen.
Display Area
The Snapshot Recorder display area is located in the center of the
screen, and displays the values, units, and descriptions of the ECM
parameters for the group you have chosen. When a parameter is not
supported by the current ECM, or if an error occurred while reading
the data, a value of “Unavailable” is displayed.
5-115
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Snapshot Recorder screen are:
• Groups…
• Zoom In/Zoom Out
• More
• Setup
• Trigger
Note: See “Selecting a Group,” section 5, page 5.
Note: The “Setup” push-button is disabled at this time.
5-116
Triggering and Reading a Snapshot
Instructions
To set a trigger:
Step 1 Press the “Trigger” push-button in the Snapshot

Recorder screen.
Step 2 Select Snapshot from the Information menu, and then

select Viewer from the sub-menu. The Select ECM
Snapshot dialog box is displayed with the Current ECM
selected in the Select Source drop-down.
Step 3 Select the External Trigger Snapshot from the Snapshot

text box. The ECM Trigger Date and Time displays in the
message box.
Note: See "Snapshot Viewer," section 5, page 119 for more

information on viewing snapshots.
5-117
Zoom In/Zoom Out
Purpose
The “Zoom In” push-button allows you to display values in larger text
for increased visibility. The “Zoom Out” push-button allows you to
return the parameter values to normal size text. A maximum of five
parameters in larger text can be displayed on the screen. Groups
with more than five parameters are divided in two subgroups.
Instructions
To zoom in and out of the display:
Step 1 Press the “Zoom In” push-button from the Snapshot

Recorder screen. The displayed text increases.
Step 2 Press the “Zoom Out” push-button to return to the

normal text display mode.
5-118
Displaying More Parameters
Purpose
The “More” push-button is enabled when the “Zoom In” push-button
is activated, with more than five parameters in a group. The “More”
push-button toggles between two sets of parameters: the first five
parameters and the remaining parameters.
Instructions
To see more parameters:
Press the “More” push-button after the “Zoom In” push-button is

pressed. This toggles you between the two sets of parameters.
5-119
Snapshot Viewer
Purpose
The Snapshot Viewer function allows you to display snapshot data
retrieved from the ECM. This data is collected in the ECM and is
made up of status parameters.
The Snapshot Viewer screen displays the retrieved data in either

data or chart format.
Accessing
To run the Snapshot Viewer function:
Select Snapshot from the Information menu, and then select

Viewer from the sub-menu. The Select ECM Snapshot dialog box is
displayed.
Note: Depending on how you want to view the data, Select Group
dialog box (viewing data) or the Select Snapshot Chart Items
(viewing graph) dialog box is displayed.
5-120
Snapshot Viewer Data
ECM Title
Area
Display
Area
Control Area
Illustration 5-85: Snapshot Viewer data screen
Purpose
The “View Data” push-button in Snapshot Viewer chart screen allows
you to switch from the Snapshot Viewer chart screen to the
Snapshot Viewer data screen.
The "View Data" push-button in the Select ECM Snapshot dialog box
allows you to view the Snapshot Viewer data after selecting a group.
Instructions
To switch to the data screen from the chart screen:
Press the "View Data" push-button from the Snapshot Viewer

chart screen. The Snapshot Viewer data screen is displayed (Refer
Note: If a group is not assigned before pressing the “View Data”

push-button, the Select Group dialog box is displayed.
5-121
To view the data from the Select ECM Snapshot dialog box:
Step 1 Press the "View Data" push-button from the Select ECM
Snapshot dialog box. As the data is loading from the file,
the "Please wait…" message displays. The Select Group
Step 3 Press "OK" to accept the selected group. The Snapshot

View data screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-2).
Note: In the Snapshot Viewer data screen, you can view each group
consecutively by using the “Page Up” and “Page Down” keys. You
can view a specific default group by selecting the key number
corresponding to that Group (the key number for groups 1 through 9,
ALT plus the key number for groups 10 through 19, or the 0 (zero)
key for the <TEMPORARY GROUP>).
Screen Layout
The Snapshot Viewer data screen has the following areas:
ECM Title Area

The identification name of the snapshot is displayed under the
toolbar at the very top of the Snapshot Viewer data display area.
Underneath the identification name is the selected group you have
chosen with the ECM name listed below.
Display Area
The Snapshot Viewer data display area is located in the center of the
screen and displays the values, units, and descriptions of the ECM
parameters for the group you have chosen. A value of “Unavailable”
is displayed if the ECM has a parameter that cannot be included in
the snapshot or if an error occurs while reading the data.
5-122
Control Area
The frame scrolling and position control areas allow you to display
the current frame position relative to all frames. The following three
text items surround these two areas:
• The trigger point V (shown above the scroll bar).

• The time before and after the trigger point (shown to the left
and right of the scroll bar).
• The frame numbers relative to the total number of frames
(shown to the left of the VCR-style buttons).
To use the frame scroll bar, press the right or left scroll bar arrows.
The arrows allow you to increase or decrease the frame number by
one. By clicking the pointer in the actual scrolling area, before or
after the scroll box, the frames increases or decreases by ten.
The position control area allows you to move through the different
frame positions with VCR-style buttons. The buttons used in this
area are:
• << button - fast-reverse continuous

• < button - reverse continuous
• |< button - reverse one position and stop
• || button - pause
• >| button - forward one position and stop
• > button - forward continuous
• >> button -- fast-forward continuous
Note: The left and right arrows (← and →) on the keyboard can be
used for the Ι< and >Ι buttons on the Snapshot Viewer chart screen.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Snapshot Viewer screen are:
• View Chart
• Snapshots…
• Groups…
• Save…
• Print
5-123
Note: The push-buttons specific to the data screen are "View Chart"
and "Groups." The push-buttons common between the data screen
and the chart screen are "Snapshots," "Save," and "Print."
Note: See “Selecting a Group,” section 5, page 5.
Note: See ”Printing,” section 1, page 26.
5-124
Snapshot Viewer Chart
Legend Area
Graph
Area
Illustration 5-86: Snapshot Viewer chart screen
Purpose
The “View Chart” push-button, in the Snapshot Viewer data screen,
allows you to switch from the Snapshot Viewer data screen to the
Snapshot Viewer chart screen.
The “View Chart” push-button, in the Select ECM Snapshot dialog

box allows you to view the Snapshot Viewer chart screen after
selecting parameters.
Instructions
To view the Snapshot Viewer chart screen:
Step 1 Press the “View Chart” push-button from the Snapshot

Viewer data screen. The Select Snapshot Chart Items
OR--
Press the “View Chart” push-button from the Select ECM
Snapshot dialog box. The Select Snapshot Chart Items
5-125
Step 2 Select parameters for viewing from the Available
parameters list box.
Note: See "Selecting Snapshot Chart Items," section 5, page 103.
Step 3 Press "OK." The Snapshot Viewer chart screen is

Screen Layout
The Snapshot Viewer chart screen has the following areas:
Legend Area
The Snapshot Viewer chart legend area, above the graph, displays
the identification name of the snapshot. The parameters display with
the corresponding line color and symbol.
parameters may be selected.
Graph Area
The Snapshot Viewer chart graphing area displays the time on the
x-axis and the minimum and maximum values for each parameter on
the y-axis. State parameters (for example, the only status is “On” or
“Off”), display with dashed lines until the graph begins to trace the
state parameter's value.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Snapshot Viewer screen are:
• View Data
• Snapshots…
• Group Items…
• Save…
• Print
Note: The push-buttons specific to the chart screen are "View Data"
and "Group Items." The push-buttons common between the data
screen and the chart screen are "Snapshots," "Save," and "Print."
Note: See ”Printing,” section 1, page 26.
5-126
Selecting an ECM Snapshot
Purpose
The “Snapshots…” push-button allows you to change the snapshot
you are viewing from the ECM. Pressing this push-button displays
the Select ECM Snapshot dialog box. The Select ECM Snapshot
dialog box allows you to view the data or graph screen. The Current
ECM allows you to clear one or all of the snapshots listed.
The Select ECM Snapshot dialog box also appears when you first
enter the Snapshot Viewer function from the Information menu. At
this point you can define whether you want to view the Snapshot
Viewer data screen or the Snapshot Viewer chart screen.
Note: The Select Source defaults to the Current ECM option if the
service tool is connected to an ECM. The Select Source defaults to
the File option if there is no data link connection.
Instructions for Selecting the Current ECM
Illustration 5-87: Select ECM Snapshot dialog box – Current ECM
5-127
To view the data screen:
Step 1 Select Current ECM from the Select Source drop-down

list.
Step 2 Highlight the snapshot that you want to view from the
Snapshots list box. Press the “View Data” push-button.
The Select Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 Highlight a group from the Select a group list box. Press
“OK.” The Snapshot Viewer – data screen is displayed.
Note: See "Selecting a Group," section 5, page 5.
To view the graph screen:

list.
Snapshots list box. Press the “View Graph” push-button.
The Select Snapshot Chart Items dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Once you select the parameters press “OK.” The

Snapshot Viewer – graph screen is displayed.
To clear a snapshot:

list.
Step2 Highlight the snapshot from the Snapshot list box. Press
the “Clear” push-button. The selected snapshot is
cleared from the dialog box.
To remove all snapshots:

list.
5-128
Step 2 In the Snapshot list box press the “Clear All”
push-button. All of the snapshots in the list box are
removed.
To leave the screen at anytime:

return to the service tool screen.
Instructions for Selecting the Current a File
Illustration 5-88: Select ECM Snapshot dialog box – File
To view the data screen:
Step 1 Select File from the Select Source drop-down list.
Step 2 Highlight the file from the Files list box.
Snapshots list box. Press the “View Data” push-button.
The Select Group dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Highlight a group from the Select a group list box. Press
“OK.” The Snapshot Viewer data screen is displayed.
5-129
To view the graph screen:
Step 1 Select File from the Select Source drop-down list.
Step 2 Highlight the file from the Files list box.
Snapshots list box. Press the “View Graph” push-button.
The Select Snapshot Chart Item dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Once you select the parameters press “OK.” The

Snapshot Viewer chart screen is displayed.
To leave the screen at anytime:

return to the service tool screen.
5-130
Selecting Snapshot Chart Items
Illustration 5-89: Select Snapshot Chart Items dialog box
Purpose
The “Group Items…” push-button allows you to change the
parameters that are displayed in the charts. Pressing this
push-button displays the Select Snapshot Chart Items dialog box.
The Select Snapshot Chart Items dialog box allows you to move the
available parameters from the Available parameters list box to the
Selected parameters list box. The parameters listed in the Available
parameter list are the ones that are displayed in chart form on the
Snapshot Viewer chart screen.
Note: Up to six parameters can be displayed in the Snapshot Viewer

chart screen.
Instructions
To select group items:
Step 1 Press the “Group Items…” push-button from the

Snapshot Viewer graph screen. The Select Snapshot
Chart Items dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration
5-89).
5-131
Parameters list box to the Selected parameters list box
(highlighting a parameter in the Selected parameters list
box and pressing the “<” push-button moves it back).
A maximum of six parameters can be added to the

Selected parameters list box.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the selected parameters. The

Snapshot Viewer chart screen is displayed.
Press “Cancel” to exit the Select Snapshot Chart Items

dialog box. You return to the Snapshot Viewer chart
screen without making changes.
5-132
Saving a Snapshot to a File
Purpose
The “Save...” push-button allows you to save the snapshot to a file.
Instructions
To save a snapshot:
Step 1 Press the “Save...” push-button. The Print New

Document to File dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-90).
Illustration 5-90: Print New Document to File dialog box
Note: If you do not have a file open, a dialog box asks you to open a
file, create a new file, or cancel. Choose the appropriate button to
continue.
Step 2 If you want to change the default name, enter a

document name in the Enter a document name text box.
Step 3 If you wish, enter a document description in the text box.
Step 4 Press the “OK” push-button. Press “Cancel” to exit the

Print New Document To File dialog box. You return to
the Snapshot Viewer screen.
5-133
Prognostics Download
File Location
Area
Download
Information Area
Illustration 5-91: Prognostics Download screen
Purpose
The Prognostics Download function allows you to quickly and easily
download the prognostics data available from the ECM. This
information can be downloaded as a VIMS Merge file (*.hs_ and
*.cu_) or as a text file (*.txt). When downloaded as a VIMS Merge
file, the information can then be imported for analysis into VIMSpc99.
If saving the information as a VIMS Merge file, cumulative totals and

available histograms are recorded from the download. If saving the
information in a text file, diagnostic codes, cumulative totals, and
available histograms are recorded from the download.
When information is downloaded and analyzed at regular intervals,

certain types of histograms and cumulative data can be valuable in
identifying repairs before failure. Repairs before failure provide lower
repair cost and improved machine availability.
All of the data in Prognostic Download is available through other

service tool functions such as Logged Diagnostic Codes or Events.
5-134
Prognostic Download gathers the information into one place for your
convenience.
Accessing
To run the Prognostics Download function:
Select Prognostics Download from the Information menu. The

Prognostics Download screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-
91).
Screen Layout
The Prognostics Download screen has the following areas:
File Location Area

The Prognostics Download File Location Area displays the file name
and location for saving the download information.
By default, the download information is saved in a format to import

into VIMSpc99. Cumulative files are saved with a *.cu_ extension.
Histogram files are saved with a *.hs_ extension.
By default, the file name is saved by Engine Serial Number, date,

and time the log was downloaded. For example,
XXX12345010108163513 means:
XXX12345 Engine Serial Number

010108 Date log was taken (January 8, 2001)
163513 Time log was taken to the second (4:35:13PM)
By default, the file is saved in the downloads folder of Caterpillar

Electronic Technician.
Note: If you want to save the Download File on a drive other than the
default drive, change the file name, or save the download as a text
file, press the "Browse…" push-button to display the Save As dialog
box.
Download Information Area

The Download Information Area displays the diagnostic codes,
cumulative totals, and available histograms from the download.
5-135
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Prognostics Download screen are:
• Browse
• Download
5-136
Purpose
The “Browse…” push-button allows you to set the Download File on
a drive other than the default drive, change the file name, or change
the file type. By default, the file is saved in the downloads folder and
the file name is saved by Engine Serial Number, date, and time the
log was downloaded.
Note: If a file already exits, a warning box displays asking if you want
to overwrite the file.
Instructions
To change the download file location and/or name:
Step 1 In the Prognostics Download screen, press the

"Browse…" push-button. The Save As dialog box is

exit without saving the file. You return to the Prognostics
Download screen.
5-137

Illustration 5-93: Save As message box
Step 2 Press "No" if you do not want to overwrite the file. The
Save As dialog box is displayed.
Press "Yes" if you want to overwrite the file. The

Prognostics Download screen displays.
5-138
Downloading a File
Illustration 5-94: Prognostics Download progress bar
Purpose
The "Download" push-button allows you begin the downloading
process.
Instructions
To begin a download:
Step 1 Press the "Download" push-button. The Prognostics

Download progress bar is displayed (Refer to Illustration
5-94).
Press "Stop" to stop the downloading process. The

service tool stops the downloading process. No partial
file is saved.
Note: The "Stop" push-button is disabled when downloading a

histogram.
Step 2 When the download is complete, you return to the

Prognostics Download screen. The Status Bar reads,
"The Prognostics File has been downloaded
successfully."
Note: An error displays if a histogram is found on the ECM that the

service tool does not recognize. If this occurs, the histogram is not
compatible with the VIMS Merge file format. To view this data: Install
the latest version of the service tool, view the histogram through
Histogram Viewer, or save the download file as a text file.
5-139
Trip or Job Segment
Illustration 5-95: Trip Segment screen
Purpose: Overview
The Trip Segment or Job Segment function allows you to view
performance parameters and totals accumulated, and print the data.
Different parameters are displayed for the data analysis. Sometimes
this function is referred to as job data, instead of segment data. From
the menu, you can choose which data you want to analyze.
Trip Segment functions currently available on various applications

are:
• Driver
• Fleet
• Current (Field)
• Previous
• Rolling
• Lifetime
• Job
• Trip
5-140
Job Segment functions currently available on various applications
are:
• Driver
• Fleet
Purpose: Driver
The displayed Driver data is collected from the time the engine is
turned on until it is turned off.
Purpose: Fleet
The displayed Fleet data is collected from the time the fleet job
begins. This data is ongoing until it is reset again. Therefore, the
data is a collection of overall fleet work, not just one driver.
Purpose: Current (Field)

The displayed Current data is the latest collection of data since the
current totals were reset. This information is then compared with the
previous totals.
Purpose: Previous
The displayed Previous data is the reset current field totals (deleting
the former previous field totals). This function allows you to compare
the tractors performance on two different fields. Each time this data
is taken, the “new” previous field totals overwrites the “old” previous
field totals.
Purpose: Rolling
The displayed Rolling data is collected work throughout a particular
period. These rolling totals are independent of the field totals.
Purpose: Lifetime
The displayed Lifetime data is collected work throughout the lifetime
of the machine. Lifetime parameters cannot be reset.
Purpose: Job
The displayed Job data is the latest collection of data since the job
totals were reset. Once the job is reset, this information is deleted.
Purpose: Trip
The displayed Trip data is the latest collection of data since the trip
totals were reset. Once the trip is reset, this information is deleted.
5-141
Accessing
To run the Trip Segment or Job Segment data:
Select Trip Segment or Job Segment from the Information menu,

and then select an option from the sub-menu. The selected Trip or
Job Segment screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-91).
Screen Layout
The Trip Segment or Job Segment screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Trip or Job Segment display area has three columns:
Description, Value, and Unit. The Description column gives the name
of the parameter set to run the test. The Value column displays the
status of the current parameter. The Unit column displays the
parameter units.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Trip or Job Segment screen are:
• Print
5-142
Trip or Job Histogram
Illustration 5-96: Information drop-down menu
Purpose
The Trip Histogram or Job Histogram function views two-dimensional
and three-dimensional histograms. A histogram is a graphical or
charted representation of the parameters’ data over time.
Instructions
To view a Trip Histogram or Job Histogram:
Step 1 Select the Trip Histogram… or the Job Histogram… from

the Information menu. If there is more than one
histogram, the Trip or Job Histograms Selector dialog
box is displayed with all of the available histograms
5-143
Illustration 5-97: Trip Histogram Selector dialog box
The Trip or Job Histograms Selector dialog box allows

you to choose which histogram to view. Different
histograms can be selected, depending on what units
that you want to compare.
Step 2 Highlight the histogram from the Select Trip or Job

Histograms list box.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the Trip Histogram that you have
chosen. The Trip Histogram screen is displayed with
your chosen units.
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to select a histogram.

You return to the Trip or Job Histogram screen.
5-144
Viewing the Histogram: Two-dimensional
Illustration 5-98: Example of a Histogram screen/two-dimensional
Screen Layout
The Trip or Job Histogram screens have the following areas:
Graph Layout
Two-dimensional histograms compare two parameters selected by
the ECM. These values display using a bar graph.
A histogram example compares the Total Time vs. Engine Coolant

Temperature. Total Time, measured in seconds, is seen on the
vertical axis. Engine Speed, measured in degrees Fahrenheit, is
seen on the horizontal axis.
5-145
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available on this two-dimensional screen are:
• Histograms…
• Print
The “Histograms...” push-button displays the Trip Histogram Selector

dialog box or the Job Histogram Selector dialog box.
5-146
Viewing the Histogram: Three-dimensional
Illustration 5-99: Example of a Trip Histogram screen/three-dimensional
Screen Layout
The Trip or Job Histogram screen has the following areas:
Graph Layout
Three-dimensional histograms compare three parameters selected
by the ECM. These values display in a tabular chart.
A histogram example compares the Total Time vs. Engine Speed

and Vehicle Speed. Engine Speed is measured in RPMs and is
shown in the columns of the chart. Vehicle Speed, measured in
MPH, is shown in the rows of the chart. Total Time, measured in
hours, is the data that makes up the histogram chart.
View Options Drop-Down List

The View Options drop-down list allows you to choose what standard
of measurement to use in the chart. This drop-down list only appears
for three-dimensional histograms.
5-147
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Trip Histogram are:
• Histograms…
• Print
The “Histograms…” push-button displays the Trip Histograms

Selector dialog box.
5-148
Custom Data
Display
Area
Illustration 5-100: Custom Data screen
Purpose
The Custom Data function allows you to create specific data reports.
These settings allow you to program into the ECM a standard of
measurement for monitoring. After you have chosen a standard, you
assign the measurements and the conditions that are measured. The
Custom Data function displays all the reports in a scrollable window.
Note: You may have to provide passwords in the Enter Customer

Passwords dialog box the first time that you define a custom report.
Accessing
To run the Custom Data screen:
Select Custom Data from the Information menu. The Custom

Data screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-100).
Screen Layout
The Custom Data screen has the following areas:
5-149
Display Area
The Custom Data display area is made up of separate blocks, each
containing custom data settings that you define. Only three blocks
can be displayed at one time on the screen. By using the scroll bars
on the right of the screen, you can scroll down through more blocks.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Custom Data screen are:
• Define
• Print
5-150
Defining Custom Reports
Illustration 5-101: Define Custom Report dialog box
Purpose
The “Define” push-button allows you to create a custom report in the
Define Custom Report dialog box. The Define Custom Report dialog
box contains data to select and fields to enter the information so you
may define your report. For monitoring purposes, the information that
is selected and entered is used to program the ECM.
Instructions
To define a custom report:
Step 1 Select one of the data blocks in the Custom Data

screen. Press the “Define” push-button. The Define
Custom Report dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 5-101).
Note: Changes can be made to the data blocks at any time, as long
as the appropriate block is highlighted when you attempt to define
the data. You may have to provide passwords in the Enter Customer
Passwords dialog box the first time that you define a custom report.
5-151
Step 2 Use the Data drop-down list to select the standard of
measurement. The choices available are:
• None
• Occurrences
• Fuel Burned
• Distance Traveled
• Engine Hours
Step 3 Use the “When” drop-down lists and text boxes in the
center section of the dialog box to choose and enter
under which conditions the measurements are taken.
Note: The functions in the drop-down lists and the units on the text
boxes depend on which standard of measurement you choose from
step 2.
Step 4 Press “OK” to accept your defined custom. The “Are you
sure...” message box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 5-
102).
Press “Cancel” to exit the Define Custom Report dialog

box without defining the report. You return to the Custom
Data screen.
Step 5 Press “Yes” to continue. You return to the Custom Data

screen displaying your changes. Press “No” if you do not
want to continue. You return to the Define Custom
Report dialog box.
5-152
Trip/Job/Driver Reset
Purpose
The Reset function allows you to reset trip data. Resetting the data
completely clears the Reset screen and allows you to begin a new
series of data records. The data is the same in both the Segment
function and the Reset function.
Reset functions currently available on various applications are:
• Driver
• Fleet
• Field (Current)
• Rolling
• Job
• Trip
Instructions
To run the Reset function:
Step 1 Select Trip Reset from the Information menu, and then
select a trip reset option from the sub-menu. The “Do
you want to continue?” message box is displayed.
OR--
Select Job Reset from the Information menu. The “Do
you want to continue?” message box is displayed.
OR--
Select Driver Reset from the Information menu. The “Do
you want to continue?” message box is displayed (Refer
Illustration 5-103: An example of the “Do you want to continue?” message

box
5-153
Step 2 Press “Yes” to clear all the data or “No” not to.
If you press “Yes,” the “...data is successfully reset.”

message box is displayed. Press “OK.” You return to the
Trip, Job, or Driver Segment screen.
5-154
Service Drop-Down Menu
Illustration 6-1: Service drop-down menu
Overview
The Service drop-down menu functions allow you to monitor the Section
service needs for the engine. It also allows you to view and change 6
the ECM configurations that are loaded in the service tool, load the
configurations from and to the ECM, view the ECM time and date,
and display the ECM calibrations.
The functions available under the Service drop-down menu are:
• Configuration
• Copy Configuration
• Monitoring System
• Parameter Lockout
• Security Management
• Machine Security Systems Uninstall
• Operator Settings
• Tool Configuration
• Maintenance Indicator
• ECM Date/Time
• Calibration Status
• Calibrations
• Service Procedures
• Driver Rewards
• Test ECM Mode
6-1
Configuration
Display Area
Illustration 6-2: Configuration screen
Purpose
The Configuration function allows you to view and change the ECM’s
configurable information.
Accessing
To run the Configuration tool:
Select Configuration from the Service menu, push the F5 key (if
the default function keys are set), or press the Configuration Tool
icon from the toolbar (if the default is set). The Configuration screen
Screen Layout
The Configuration screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Configuration display area has four columns: Description, Value,
Unit, and TT. The Description column gives the name of the
parameter set to configure. The Value column displays the status of
6-2
the current parameter. The Unit column displays the configuration
parameter units. The TT column displays the list of total tattletales.
Tattletales represent the number of times the configuration
parameter value is changed.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Configuration screen are:
• Change
• Print

Section
6
6-3
Changing Configuration Parameter Values
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the configuration
parameter values. This push-button is enabled when a parameter’s
configuration can be changed.
Instructions
To change the parameter values:
Highlight a parameter that has a value that can be changed, and

press the “Change” push-button from the Configuration screen.
Depending on which configuration parameter is highlighted, one of
following dialog boxes is displayed:
• Change Engine Power Rating dialog box

• Change Parameter Value dialog box
6-4
Changing Engine Power Rating
Section
6
Illustration 6-3: Change Engine Power Rating dialog box
Purpose
The Change Engine Power Rating dialog box allows you to change
the rating number. Changing rating number causes the rating
information to change.
Instructions
To change the engine power rating:
Step 1 Select a rating number from the Rating Number list box.
As you select a Rating Number, the Rating Information is
sure…” message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to
change the rating number or “No” not to change the
rating number.
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to assign a new value.

You return to the Configuration screen.
6-5
6-6
Purpose

Instructions Section
To change the selected parameter: 6

sure...” message box is displayed. Press “Yes” if you

new value. You return to the Configuration screen.
6-7
Copy Configuration
Illustration 6-5: Copy Configuration menu functions
Purpose
The Copy Configuration function allows you to copy configuration
parameter data to and from ECMs. There are three sub-menus
under the Copy Configuration menu option: Fleet Configuration,
Fleet/Key Configuration, and ECM Replacement. The Fleet
Configuration function copies configuration data common to several
ECMs. The Fleet/Key Configuration configures a MSS control with
keys that start the machine. The ECM Replacement function copies
relevant configuration parameters from one ECM to another.
Accessing
To run the Copy Configuration functions:
Select Copy Configuration from the Service menu, and then

select either Fleet Configuration, Fleet/Key Configuration, or ECM
Replacement option from the sub-menu.
Screen Layout
The Fleet Configuration, Fleet/Key Configuration, or ECM
Replacement screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The display area lists configuration parameters that were loaded
from the ECM. The configuration parameters are displayed by
6-8
category. Each category item is preceded by a check box and a “+”
or “-” symbol. Only the checked parameters are included in the
configuration transfers.
Note: You are unable to check parameters that are grayed because
they are unavailable or not programmed.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Fleet Configuration, Fleet/Key
Configuration, or ECM Replacement screen are:
• Load from ECM

• Program ECM
• Load from File
• Save to File
• Print
Note: “Load from File” and “Save to File” push-buttons are only
available for the Fleet Configuration and Fleet/Key Configuration
functions. Section
6
6-9
Check Boxes
Purpose
The check boxes that are displayed in the Fleet Configuration,
Fleet/Key Configuration, and the ECM Replacement screen are used
to check (✓ ) the parameters that are included in the configuration
transfers. The “+” and “-” symbols are used to expand and collapse
the parameter categories to show the additional parameters in that
category.
When a parameter category is checked, all of the parameters

included in that category are checked. You can manually remove a
specific parameter in that category, by removing the “✓ ” in front of
that specific parameter. When a parameter category is unchecked,
all of the parameters included in that category are unchecked.
Instructions
To expand and collapse the parameter categories:
Step 1 With the mouse, click on the “+” to expand the category.
The “+” changes to a “-” and all of the parameters in that
category are displayed. Click on the “-” to collapse the
category. The “-” changes to a “+” and all of the
parameters in that category are hidden.
OR--
With the keyboard, use the arrow keys to move around
to the different parameter check boxes, then press the
space bar to enable or disable the parameters.
Step 2 With the mouse, click on the parameter check boxes to

enable or disable a parameter or category. When a
parameter is enabled, there is an “✓ ” in the check box.
When a parameter is disabled, the check box is empty.
OR--
With the keyboard, use the arrow keys to move around
to the different parameter check boxes, then press the
spacebar to enable or disable the parameter.
6-10
ECM Replacement
Section
Illustration 6-6: ECM Replacement screen 6
Purpose
The ECM Replacement function allows you to copy configuration
parameters from an existing ECM to another ECM, for physically
changing the ECM on a machine.
All configuration parameters are displayed by category. Each

category item is preceded by a check box and a “+” or “-” symbol.
Note: Once an ECM has been programmed by the ECM

Replacement function, the data on the screen is cleared. This keeps
you from programming more than one ECM with the data from
another ECM.
Instructions
To load data from the ECM:
Step 1 Connect the service tool to the ECM that is being

replaced.
6-11
Step 2 Select Copy Configuration from the Service menu, and
then select ECM Replacement from the sub-menu.
If there is no recently loaded data available the “No data

is available…” message box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-7).
Illustration 6-7: “No data is available…” message box
Step 3 Press “Yes” to load the data from the ECM. The ECM
6-8).
Press “No” if you do not want to load the data. The ECM
Replacement blank screen is displayed.
Note: Pressing the “Load from ECM” push-button from the ECM
Replacement screen also displays the ECM Selector dialog box.
Illustration 6-8: ECM Selector dialog box
Step 4 Highlight the ECM that is being replaced and press “OK.”
As the data is loading from the ECM, the “Please wait…”
message displays. Then, the “Loading data from ECM...”
progress bar is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-9).

6-12
Illustration 6-9: ECM Replacement progress bar
You can cancel the loading process at any time, by

pressing the “Cancel” push-button. The “Are you sure...” Section
message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel loading 6
the data or “No” not to cancel.
Step 5 When the data has been successfully loaded, “The data
has been successfully loaded…” message box is
Illustration 6-10: ECM Replacement message box
Step 6 Press “OK.” The ECM Replacement screen is displayed

with the “Program ECM” push-button enabled.
Step 7 Disconnect the service tool from the ECM.
6-13
To program the new ECM:
Step 1 Connect the hardware to the replacement ECM.

then select ECM Replacement from the sub-menu. The
ECM Replacement message box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-11).
Illustration 6-11: ECM Replacement/current data loaded message box
Step 3 Press “OK.” The ECM Replacement screen is displayed.
Step 4 Press the “Program ECM” push-button. The ECM

Selector dialog box is displayed.
Step 5 Highlight the replacement ECM and press “OK.” A

warning message box is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-12).
6-14
Illustration 6-12: ECM Replacement warning box
Step 6 Press “Yes” if it is the correct control. As the data begins

to upload to the ECM the “Please wait…” message box
displays. Then the “Testing ECM…” progress bar is
Section
Press “No” if the information is not correct. You return to 6
the ECM Replacement screen.
6-15
Illustration 6-13: ECM Replacement progress bar
You can cancel the uploading process at any time, by

pressing the “Cancel” push-button. The “Are you sure...”
message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel
uploading the data or “No” not to cancel.
Step 7 When the data has been successfully uploaded, the

“Programming complete.” message box is displayed.
Press “OK.” A Timing Calibration message box may
display. Press “OK.” You return to the ECM
Replacement blank screen.
6-16
Fleet Configuration
Section
Illustration 6-14: Fleet Configuration screen 6
Purpose
The Fleet Configuration function allows you to copy configuration
data common to several ECMs. In this screen you can load the
parameters from the ECM, program the parameters to the ECM, load
the parameters from a file, and save the parameters to a file.
All configuration parameters are displayed by category. Each

category item is preceded by a check box and a “+” or “-” symbol.
Instructions
To load the data from the ECM:
Step 1 Connect the service tool to the ECM you want to copy.

then select Fleet Configuration from the sub-menu.

is available...” message box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-15).
6-17
Step 3 Press “Yes” to load data from the ECM. The ECM
6-16).
Press “No” if you do not want to load data. The Fleet

Configuration blank screen is displayed.
Note: Pressing the “Load from ECM” push-button from the Fleet
Configuration screen also displays the ECM Selector dialog box.
Step 4 Highlight the ECM you wish to copy from and press
“OK.” As the data is loading from the ECM, the “Please
wait…”message displays. Then, the “Loading data from
ECM…” progress bar is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-17).

6-18
Illustration 6-17: Fleet Configuration progress bar

message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel loading 6
Illustration 6-18: Fleet Configuration message box
Step 6 Press “OK.” The Fleet Configuration screen is displayed

with the “Program ECM” and “Save to File” push-buttons
enabled.
Note: The data must be saved to a file before you can disconnect
from the service tool or the data is lost.
6-19
To save the configuration to a file:
Step 1 Press the “Save to File” push-button. The Print New

Illustration 6-19).
button to continue. See “Printing,” section 1, page 26 for help.
Illustration 6-19: Print New Document to file dialog box
Step 2 Enter a document name and description in the

appropriate text boxes. Press “OK.” The “Fleet
Configuration saved successfully” message box is
displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-20). Press “Cancel” to
exit the Print New Document To File dialog box without
saving the file. You return to the Fleet Configuration
dialog box.
6-20
Illustration 6-20: Fleet Configuration saved… message box
Step 3 Press “OK.” You return to the Fleet Configuration

screen.
To load data from a file:
Step 1 Connect the service tool to the ECM to be programmed.

then select Fleet Configuration from the sub-menu.

Illustration 6-21). Section
6
Step 3 Press “No,” that you do not want to load data from the
ECM. The Fleet Configuration screen display is
displayed.
Step 4 Press the “Load from File” push-button. The File

Management dialog box is displayed. See “File
Management,” section 2, page 7.
Note: If you press the “Load from File” push-button with unsaved
data on the Fleet Configuration screen, a message box is displayed
asking if you want to save the changes.
6-21
Step 5 From the File Management dialog box, highlight the file
from the Files list box, and then highlight the Fleet
Configuration document that you want to load from the
Documents list box.
Step 6 Open the document. As the data loads, a progress bar

displays. Then, the Fleet Configuration message box is
Step 7 Press “OK.” The Fleet Configuration screen is displayed

with the new file data.
To program the ECM:
Note: The data must be loaded from a file before you can program
an ECM.

Step 2 Highlight an ECM and press “OK.” The “Please wait…”

message box displays. Then the “Testing ECM…”
6-22

message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel 6

Press “OK.”
6-23
Fleet/Key Configuration
Illustration 6-24: Fleet/Key Configuration screen
Purpose
The Fleet/Key Configuration function allows you to easily configure
and manage a Machine Security System (MSS) enabled machine or
set of machines. The function allows you to program, load, and save
a set of configuration parameters and key information. The
information can be loaded from or programmed to the MSS. This
information can also be saved to or loaded from a file.
Once a file is saved in Fleet/Key Configuration, File Management

can be used to export the file as a *.MSS file. The exported *.MSS
file can then be imported into the MSS Key Management Software
program, for management of the Fleet/Key information.
Note: See "File Management," section 2, page 7 for information on

importing and exporting files.
6-24
Instructions
To load the data from the ECM:
Step 1 Connect the service tool to the Machine Security System

ECM you want to copy.

then select Fleet/Key Configuration from the sub-menu.
Note: A master key gives the ability to enter this function.

Illustration 6-25).
Section
6
Illustration 6-25 “No data is available…” message box
Step 3 Press “Yes” to load data from the ECM. The ECM
6-26).
Press “No” if you do not want to load data. The Fleet/Key

Configuration blank screen is displayed.
Note: Pressing the “Load from ECM” push-button from the Fleet/Key
Configuration screen also displays the ECM Selector dialog box.
6-25
Step 4 Highlight the Machine Security System ECM you wish to

copy from and press “OK.” As the data is loading from
the ECM, the “Please wait…”message displays. Then,
the “Loading data from ECM…” progress bar is

Illustration 6-27: Fleet/Key Configuration progress bar

message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel loading
6-26
Illustration 6-28: Fleet/Key Configuration message box
Step 6 Press “OK.” The Fleet/Key Configuration screen is

displayed with the “Program ECM” and “Save to File”
push-buttons enabled.
Note: The data must be saved to a file before you disconnect from
the service tool or the data is lost.
Section
To save the configuration to a file: 6
Step 1 Press the “Save to File” push-button. The Print New

Illustration 6-29).
button to continue. See “Printing,” section 1, page 26 for help.
6-27
Illustration 6-29: Print New Document to file dialog box
Step 2 Enter a document name and description in the

appropriate text boxes. Press “OK.” The “Fleet/Key
Configuration saved successfully” message box is
exit the Print New Document To File dialog box without
saving the file. You return to the Fleet Configuration
dialog box.
6-28
Illustration 6-30: Fleet/Key Configuration saved… message box
Step 3 Press “OK.” You return to the Fleet/Key Configuration

screen.
To load data from a file:
Step 1 Connect the service tool to the ECM to be programmed.

then select Fleet/Key Configuration from the sub-menu.

Illustration 6-31). Section
6
Step 3 Press “No,” that you do not want to load data from the
ECM. The Fleet/Key Configuration screen display is
displayed.
Step 4 Press the “Load from File” push-button. The File

Management dialog box is displayed. See “File
Management,” section 2, page 7.
Note: If you press the “Load from File” push-button with unsaved
data on the Fleet/Key Configuration screen, a message box is
displayed asking if you want to save the changes.
6-29
Step 5 From the File Management dialog box, highlight the file
from the Files list box, and then highlight the Fleet/Key
Configuration document that you want to load from the
Documents list box.
Step 6 Open the document. As the data loads, a progress bar

displays. Then, the Fleet Configuration message box is
Step 7 Press “OK.” The Fleet/Key Configuration screen is

displayed with the file data.
To program the ECM:
Note: The data must be loaded from a file before you can program
an ECM.
Note: Keys that are already programmed into the ECM can be
unchecked from the Fleet/Key Configuration screen. This is only a
time saving measure. If you do not uncheck the keys, the Program
ECM message box displays. This message box lists all keys that
were not programmed because they were already stored.
6-30
Step 2 Highlight an ECM and press “OK.” The “Please wait…”

message box displays. Then the “Testing ECM…”
Section
6

message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel

Press “OK.”
6-31
Note: MSS has a maximum number of keys that it can store at one
time (usually 50). Fleet/Key Configuration determines the number of
keys slots not programmed on the MSS. You cannot program more
keys than the maximum number allowed. A message box displays
informing you of the number of key slots available (Refer to
Illustrations 6-34) or that there are no more key slots are available
You must remove enough keys in order to add new key information.
6-32
Monitoring System
Display Area
Section
Illustration 6-36: Monitoring System screen 6
Purpose
The Monitoring System function allows you to adjust trip points and
delay times for different ECM parameters. The trip points and delay
times displayed are the basis for an operator warning, an engine
derate, or an engine shutdown. This function helps warn the operator
of major problems that could develop in the engine.
Accessing
To run the Monitoring System function:
Select Monitoring System from the Service menu. The

Monitoring System screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-36).
Screen Layout
The Monitoring System screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Monitoring System display area has four columns: Description,
State, Trip Point, and Delay Time. The Description column gives the
6-33
name of the parameter being monitored. The State column displays
if the parameter monitored is “On” or “Off.” The Trip Point column
displays the value at which the parameter is tripped to cause a
diagnostic code. The Delay Time displays the amount of time that
the trip point can be held before a diagnostic code is generated.
In the Description column, each parameter that is listed, is

underlined. Underneath each parameter, there is a list of actions or
responses that occur when the parameter is out of normal range.
This is based on the trip point value set for the delay period. For
example, if the high engine coolant temperature reaches 216
Degrees Fahrenheit and holds that value for 5 seconds, the operator
is warned.

Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Monitoring System screen are:
• Change
• Print
6-34
Changing the Monitor System
Illustration 6-37: Change Monitor System dialog box
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the monitor system Section
values. 6
Note: Towards the bottom of this dialog box, there is a section titled
Allowed Values. This section informs you of the ranges allowed for
the Trip Point and the Delay Time. You cannot enter values outside
of these ranges.
Instructions
To change the monitor system:
Step 1 Highlight the parameter or action under the parameter,

and then press the “Change” push-button. The Change
Monitor System dialog is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-37).
Step 2 In the columns to the right of the action (warn operator,

engine derate, or engine shutdown), double click on the
cell and enter the new value or select the new value.
State In the State column, select “On” or “Off”

from the drop-down list. The value that
you select is displayed in the box.
6-35
Trip Point In the Trip Point column, type the new
value in the text box (units cannot be
changed). The value that you typed is
displayed in the box.
Delay In the Delay column, type the new value in

the text box (units cannot be change). The
value that you typed is displayed in the
box.
Note: If the values that you entered are out of the range specified in
the Allowed Values section of the screen, the “The value entered is
out of range” message box is displayed. Press “OK” to return to the
Change Monitor System dialog box.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the new values. The “Are you
sure…” message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to accept
the changes or “No” if you do not want to accept the
changes.

new values. You return to the Monitoring System screen.
6-36
Monitoring System (with Parameter Security)
Display Area
Section
Illustration 6-38: Monitoring System screen 6
Purpose
The Monitoring System function allows you to adjust trip points and
delay times for different ECM parameters. The trip points and delay
times displayed are the basis for an operator warning, an engine
derate, or an engine shutdown. This function helps warn the operator
of major problems that could develop in the engine.
Accessing
To run the Monitoring System function:
Select Monitoring System from the Service menu. The

Monitoring System screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-38).
Screen Layout
The Monitoring System screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Monitoring System display area has four columns: Description,
State, Trip Point, and Delay Time. The Description column gives the
6-37
name of the parameter being monitored. The State column displays
if the parameter monitored is “On” or “Off.” The Trip Point column
displays the value at which the parameter is tripped to cause a
diagnostic code. The Delay Time displays the amount of time that
the trip point can be held before a diagnostic code is generated.
In the Description column, each parameter that is listed, is

underlined. Underneath each parameter, there is a list of actions or
responses that occur when the parameter is out of normal range.
This is based on the trip point value set for the delay period. For
example, if the high engine coolant temperature reaches 216
Degrees Fahrenheit and holds that value for 20 seconds, the
operator is warned.

Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Monitoring System screen are:
• Change
• Print
6-38
Changing the Monitor System
Illustration 6-39: Change Monitor System dialog box
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the monitor system Section
values. 6
Note: Towards the bottom of this dialog box, there is a section titled
Allowed Values. The action selected is displayed with the title. This
section informs you of the ranges allowed for the Trip Point and the
Delay Time. You cannot enter values outside of these ranges. This
section also displays “Not Programmable” if security for the
parameter is read-only.
Instructions
To change the monitor system:
Step 1 Highlight the parameter or action under the parameter,

and then press the “Change” push-button. The Change
Monitor System dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-39).
Step 2 In the columns to the right of the action (warn operator,

engine derate, or engine shutdown), double click on the
cell and enter the new value or select the new value.
6-39
State In the State column, select “On” or “Off”
from the drop-down list. The value that
you select is displayed in the box.
Trip Point In the Trip Point column, type the new

value in the text box (units cannot be
changed). The value that you typed is
displayed in the box.
Delay In the Delay column, type the new value in

the text box (units cannot be change). The
value that you typed is displayed in the
box.
Security The Security column indicates the security

level required to change the action setting
and displays None, Read-only, Customer,
or Factory. This information is sent by the
ECM and cannot be changed. If the action
is a Read-only, Not Programmable is
displayed in the Allowed Values area.
Note: If the values that you entered are out of the range specified in
the Allowed Values section of the screen, the “The value entered is
out of range” message box is displayed. Press “OK” to return to the
Change Monitor System dialog box.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the new values. The “Are you
sure…” message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to accept
the changes or “No” if you do not want to accept the
changes.

new values. You return to the Monitoring System screen.
6-40
Parameter Lockout
Display Area
Section
6
Illustration 6-40: Parameter Lockout screen
Purpose
The Parameter Lockout function allows you to lock parameters that
you do not want service mechanics to change. Once the parameters
are locked, they cannot be changed anywhere in the service tool.
Accessing
To run the Parameter Lockout function:
Select Parameter Lockout from the Service menu. The

Parameter Lockout screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 3-40).
Screen Layout
The Parameter Lockout screen has the following areas:
6-41
Display Area
The Parameter Lockout display area has two columns: Description
and Mode. The Description column gives the name of the parameter.
The Mode column displays if the parameter is “Locked” or
“Unlocked.”
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Parameter Lockout screen are:
• Change
• Print
6-42
Locking Parameters
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to lock the selected
parameter, based on its current mode.
Instructions
To lock parameters:
Step 1 Highlight an unlocked parameter, and press the

“Change” push-button. The Parameter Lockout warning
box is displayed (Refer to Illustration 41).
Illustration 41: Parameter Lockout warning box

Section
6
Step 2 Press “Yes” to lock the parameters or “No” not to. If you
press “Yes,” the Enter Customer Passwords dialog box
is displayed.
Step 3 Type the first customer password into the Customer

Password number 1 text box. Type the second customer
password into the Customer Password number 2 text
box.
Step 4 Press “OK” to enter these passwords. You return to the

Parameter Lockout screen.
6-43
6-44
Security Management
Section
Illustration 6-41: Security Management screen 6
Purpose
The Security Management function allows you to determine which
keys will or will not start a machine. Machines equipped with Security
Management manage the keys authorized to start a machine.
Accessing
To run the Security Management:
Select Security Management from the Service menu. The

Security Management screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-41).
Screen Layout
The Security Management screen has the following areas:
Current Key Information Area

The Current Key information area displays information of the key
currently in the ignition. If the current key is not authorized or if the
information was not entered, Description, Access Level, and/or
Expiration are blank.
6-45
Display Area
The Machine Security System display area has five columns:
Description, Access Level, Expiration, ID 1, and ID 2. The
information can be sorted by column by pressing its header. The
Description column is the key identification name (maximum eleven
alphanumeric characters). The Access Level column displays if the
key is “Master” or “Standard.” The Expiration column gives the date
and time a key expires. ID 1 and ID 2 are the numbers exclusive to
the specific key.
Note: You can only add, delete, or change information if a master

key is in the ignition. If you try to add, delete, or change information
with a standard key, the service tool displays an error message.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Security Management screen are:
• Change
• Add
• Delete
• Print
6-46
Adding Key Information
Illustration 6-42: Add Key Information dialog box
Purpose
The “Add” push-button allows you to add a key to the authorized key
list.
Instruction Section
To add a key: 6
Step 1 Press the “Add” push-button. The Add Key Information

Step 2 Enter the key numbers in the ID 1 and ID 2 text boxes.
Note: Pressing the “Read” push-button fills ID 1and ID2 with the
current information for the key in the ignition.
Step 3 Enter the key identification name in the Description text

box.
Step 4 Select the type of key from the Access Level drop-down.
Step 5 Select an expiration radio button. “Disable” does not

have an expiration date.
If Enable is selected, enter the date and time of

expiration.
Date Enter the date by highlighting the number

and pressing the up and down arrows next
6-47
to the text boxes, entering in the
information with the keyboard, or using the
up and down arrows (↑ and ↓) on the
keyboard to increase or decrease the
value by one.
Time Select the time from the Time drop-down

list.
Step 6 Press “OK” to add the key information. The “Are you
sure…” message box is displayed. Press “OK” to add
the key or press “Cancel” if you do not want to add the
key.
Press “Help” to open online help for assistance. Press

“Cancel” to exit the Add Key Information dialog box
without adding the information.
6-48
Changing the Key Information
Illustration 6-43: Change Key Information dialog box
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the key information
from the authorized key list. ID 1 and ID 2 cannot be changed.
Note: The “Change” push-button is disabled until a key is selected Section

from the authorized list. 6
Instructions
To change the selected key information:
Step 1 Highlight the key you want to change and press the
“Change “ push-button. The Change Key Information
OR--
Double click the key you want to change. The Change
Key Information dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-43).
Step 2 Enter the changes you want to make. See “Adding Key
Information” for more detail.
Step 3 Press “OK” to change the key information. The “Are you
sure…” message box is displayed Press “OK” to change
the key or press “Cancel” if you do not want to change
the key.
6-49
Press “Help” to open online help for assistance. Press
“Cancel” to exit the Change Key Information dialog box
without making changes.
6-50
Deleting Key Information
Purpose
The Delete operation allows you to delete a key from the authorized
key list.
Note: You cannot delete the last master key. An error message
displays if you attempt to delete the last master key.
Instructions:
To delete a key:
Step 1 Highlight the key you want to delete and press “Delete.”
The “Are you sure…” message box is displayed (Refer
Section
6
Illustration 6-44: “Are you sure…” message box
Step 2 Press “OK” if you want to delete the key or “Cancel” if do

not want to delete the key. You return to the Security
Management screen.
6-51
Machine Security System Uninstall
Status Line
Area
Display
Area
Illustration 6-45: Machine Security System Uninstall screen
Purpose
The Machine Security System Uninstall function allows you the
capability to remove/uninstall the Machine Security System function
from all modules on an application.
Accessing
To run the Machine Security System Uninstall:
Select Machine Security System Uninstall from the Service

menu. The Machine Security System Uninstall screen is displayed
Screen Layout
The Machine Security System Uninstall screen has the following
areas:
6-52
Status Line
The Machine Security System Uninstall status line displays
messages regarding the process of the function.
Displays Area
The Machine Security System Uninstall display area has two
columns: ECM and Security System Status. The ECM column lists
all ECMs supported by the Machine Security System. The Security
System Status column lists if the security system is "Installed" or
"Not Installed" in the ECM.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Machine Security System Uninstall
screen is:
• Uninstall/Retry
Section
6
6-53
Uninstalling Machine Security System
Instructions
To uninstall the Machine Security System:
Step 1 Press the "Uninstall" push-button. The "Are you sure…"

Illustration 6-46: Are you sure…" message box
Step 2 Press “Yes” if you want to uninstall Machine Security

System.
Press “No” if you do not to uninstall Machine Security

System. You return to the Machine Security System
Uninstall screen.
Note: You can only uninstall the Machine Security System if a

master key is in the ignition. If you try to uninstall the Machine
Security System with a standard key, the service tool displays an
error message.
Illustration 6-47:
Step 3 If the uninstall was successful, the Machine Security
System Uninstall Successful message box is displayed
6-54
Illustration 6-48: Machine Security System Uninstall successful message box
Press "OK." You return to the Machine Security System

Uninstall screen.
OR--
If the uninstall was not successful, the Machine Security
System Uninstall aborted message box is displayed
Section
6
Illustration 6-49: Machine Security System Uninstall aborted message box
Press "OK." You return to the Machine Security System

Uninstall screen.
Note: The “Uninstall” push-button is replaced with the “Retry”

push-button in the Machine Security System Uninstall screen. Press
"Retry" to start the uninstall, again.
6-55
6-56
Operator Settings
Active Operator
Title Area
Display
Area
Section
Illustration 6-50: Operator Settings/List screen 6
Purpose
The Operator Settings function provides a convenient way for you to
view and program settings. These settings can then be stored for an
individual operator, which affect the operation of the implements and
dash according to the operator's preferences.
Accessing
To run the Operator Settings/List screen:
Select Operator Settings from the Service menu. The Operator

Settings/List screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-50).
Screen Layout
The Operator Settings/List screen has the following areas:
Active Operator Title Area

The Active Operator title area displays the name of the operator that
has been activated through the VIDS onboard monitoring system. If
no operator is active “None” is displayed.
6-57
Display Area
The Operator Settings/List display area has two columns: Operator
and Operator Name. The Operator column lists the maximum
number of operators stored in the ECM. The Operator Name gives
name of the operator assigned to that number from the VIDS
onboard monitoring system. If an operator has not been defined,
“Not Programmed” displays in the Operator Name column.
Current Settings represent how the machine is presently operating.

These settings cannot be changed through the service tool. Factory
Settings are the default settings and cannot be changed.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Operator Settings/List are:
• View>>
• Print
6-58
Viewing Operator Settings
Title Areas
Display
Area
Section
Illustration 6-51: Operator Settings/View screen 6
Purpose
The Operator Settings/View screen displays the saved settings for a
specific operator. This screen also allows you to modify a specific
operator's settings through the service tool.
Instructions
To view an operator's settings:
Highlight the operator you want to view in the Operator Settings

screen and press the “View>>” push-button or double click on the
operator. The Operator Settings/View screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-51).
Screen Layout
The Operator Settings/View screen has the following areas:
Title Areas
The View Settings title area displays the operator's name and
number that was selected from the Operator Settings/List screen.
6-59
The Active Operator title area displays the name of the operator that
has been activated through the VIDS onboard monitoring system. If
no operator is active “None” is displayed. The Current Setting may
be different from the Active Operator.
Display Area
The Operator Settings/List display area has three columns:
Description, Settings, and Unit. The Description column gives the
name of the parameter set for the operator. The Value column
displays the parameter units.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Operator Settings/List are:
• <<Back
• Change
• Print
Note: To return to the Operator Settings/List screen press the

“<<Back” push-button.
Note: The "Change" push-button is only available for some

machines.
6-60
Changing Operator Settings
Purpose
The "Change" push-button allows you to modify an operator's
settings within the service tool. Current Settings or Factory Settings
cannot be changed; therefore, the "Change" push-button is disabled.

Section
Instructions 6
To change an operator's settings:
Step 1 In the Operator Settings/View screen, highlight a

parameter you want to change and press the "Change"
push-button. The Change Parameter Value dialog box is
Step 2 Depending on the parameter you select to change, enter

the new value in the New Value text box or select the
New Value from the drop-down list.
want to change this setting or “No” if you do not want to
change the setting.

new value. You return to the Operator Settings/View
screen.
6-61
Tool Configuration
Purpose
The Tool Configuration function allows you to configure the
parameters that define how a tool is controlled. You are able to
modify current stored tool parameters, configure a new tool, delete
tool parameters, activate a tool, or deactivate a tool.
Accessing
To run the Tool Configuration function:
Select Tool Configuration from the Service menu. The Tool List
6-62
Tool List Screen
Active Tool
Title Bar
Display
Area
Section
Illustration 6-53: Tool List screen for Track Type Excavators 6
Purpose
The Tool List screen allows you to activate a selected tool,
deactivate a tool, delete a tool, or configure a new tool.
Accessing
To run the Tool List screen:
Select Tool Configuration from the Service menu. The Tool List
OR--
If the Tool Configuration screen is displayed, press the “<<Tool
List” push-button. The Tool List screen is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-53).
Screen Layout
The Tool List screen has the following areas:
6-63
Active Tool Title Area
The Active Tool title area displays the name of the tool you have
activated. If no tool is active “None” is displayed.
Display Area
The Tool List display area has two columns: Tool and Tool Name.
The Tool column lists the maximum number of allowable tool
configurations stored in the ECM. The Tool Name gives the assigned
tool name. If a tool has not been configured, “Not Configured"
displays in the Tool Name column.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Tool List are:
• Activate
• Deactivate
• Delete
• Configure>>
6-64
Activating/ Deactivating a Tool
Purpose
The “Activate” push-button allows you to make the selected tool
active (tool on the machine).
The “Deactivate” push-button allows you to deactivate the currently

active tool.
Note: A “Not Configured” tool cannot be activated or deactivated.
Instructions
To activate a tool:
Step 1 Highlight the tool you wish to activate.
Step 2 Press the “Activate” push-button. The “Are you sure…”

message box is displayed.
Step 3 Press “OK” if you want to activate the selected tool. The Section
tool displays in the Active Tool title area. 6
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to activate the tool.
To deactivate a tool:
Step 1 Highlight the active tool. This tool displays in the Active
Tool title area.
Step 2 Press the “Deactivate” push-button. The “Are you

sure…” message box is displayed.
Step 3 Press “OK” if you want to deactivate the selected tool.

Press “Cancel” if you do not want to deactivate the tool.
6-65
Removing a Configured Tool
Purpose
The “Delete” push-button allows you to remove a configured tool. If
successful, “Not Configured” is displayed.
Note: The Active Tool cannot be deleted.
Instructions
To delete a tool:
Step 1 Highlight the tool you want to delete.
Step 2 Press the “Delete” push-button. The “Are you sure…”

Illustration 6-54: “Are you sure…” message box
Step 3 Press “OK” if you want to delete the tool. The tool
displays in the Active Tool title area.
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to delete the tool.
6-66
Tool Configuration Screen
Configuration
Tool Title Area Active Tool
Title Area
Display
Area
Section
Illustration 6-55: Tool Configuration screen 6
Purpose
The “Configure>>” push-button displays the Tool Configuration
screen. Tool Configuration allows you to configure tool parameters or
change current tool parameters.
Instructions
To configure a new tool:
Step 1 Highlight the "Not Configured" tool you want to configure

in the Tool List screen and press the “Configure>>”
push-button or double click on the tool. The Tool
List - Enter Tool Name dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-56).
6-67
Illustration 6-56: Tool List – Enter Tool Name dialog box
Step 2 Enter the tool name in the Enter Tool Name text box.
Note: The “Next>>” is disabled until a name is entered in the text

box.
Step 3 Press “Next>>” if you want to save the tool name. The
“Please wait…” message displays. Then, the Tool
Configuration screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-55).
Press “Cancel” if you do not want to configure the tool.

You return to the Tool List screen.
To configure an existing tool:
Highlight the tool you want to configure in the Tool List screen
and press the “Configure>>” push-button or double click on the tool.
The “Please wait…” message displays. Then, the Tool Configuration
Screen Layout
The Tool Configuration screen has the following areas
Configuring Tool Title Area

The Configuring Tool title area displays the name of the tool you
want to configure.
Active Tool Title Area

The Active Tool title area displays the name of the tool you have
activated. If no tool is active “None” is displayed.
Display Area
The Tool Configuration display area has three columns:
Descriptions, Value, and Unit. The Description column gives the
name of the parameter set to configure. The Value column displays
6-68
the status of the current parameter. The Unit column displays the
configuration parameter units.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Tool List are:
• <<Tool List
• Change
• Activate
• Deactivate
• Print
Section
6
6-69
Changing Configuration Parameter Values
Purpose

Instructions

Value dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Enter the new value in the New value text box.
want to change this parameter or “No” if you do not want
to change the parameter.

new value. You return to the Configuration screen.
Note: If an unacceptable parameter is entered, an error message is

6-70
Maintenance Indicator
Display
Area
Section
Illustration 6-57: Maintenance Indicator screen 6
Purpose
The Maintenance Indicator function informs you of when
maintenance needs are due. Data is displayed on this screen,
indicating the status of maintenance in the ECM.
Accessing
To run the Maintenance Indicator function:
Select Maintenance Indicator from the Service menu. The

Maintenance Indicator screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-57).
Screen Layout
The Maintenance Indicator Screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Maintenance Indicator display area has four columns:
Description, Service Status, Value, and Unit. The Description column
gives the name of the parameter. The Service Status column informs
you that a parameter is due or overdue for maintenance. The Value
6-71
column informs you of the maintenance due numeric value. The Unit
displays the unit of measurement for the value (the units are defined
in the Configuration tool).
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Maintenance Indicator screen are:
• Reset
• Print
6-72
Resetting the Parameter Data for Maintenance
Illustration 6-58: Are you sure...” message box
Purpose
The “Reset” push-button allows you to reset the parameter data for
maintenance purposes.
Instructions
To reset a parameter:
Step 1 Highlight a parameter and press the “Reset” Section

push-button. The “Are you sure…” message box is 6
Step 2 Press “Yes” to reset the parameters or “No” not to. You
return to the Maintenance Indicator screen.
6-73
ECM Date/Time
Display
Area
Illustration 6-59: ECM Date/Time screen
Purpose
The ECM Date/Time function allows you to view the current date and
time of the ECM. This information is continuously updated. If the
ECM and PC date and time are different, the ECM can be
programmed to match the PC.
Accessing
To display the current date and time of the ECM:
Select ECM Date/Time from the Service menu. The ECM

Date/Time screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-59).
Screen Layout
The ECM Date/Time screen has the following areas:
ECM Title Area

The ECM Title area displays the name of the ECM.
6-74
Display Area
The ECM Date/Time display area lists the day of the week, the date,
and the time digitally. Whatever values are shown on the ECM
Date/Time screen matches the current ECM’s date and time.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the ECM Date/Time screen is:
• Change
Section
6
6-75
Changing the Date and Time
Illustration 6-60: Date/Time dialog box
Purpose
The “Change” push-button allows you to change the date and time
on the display.
Instructions
To change the date and time:
Step 1 Press the “Change” push-button from the ECM

Date/Time screen. The Date and Time dialog box is
Note: You may be required to provide passwords in the Enter

Customer Passwords dialog box the first time you change the date
and time.
Step 2 Click on one of the text boxes, either the date or time,
then change the value by either pressing the up and
down arrows next to the text boxes, or enter in the
information with the keyboard.
OR--
Press the “Get PC Date/Time” push-button to change
the date and time to match that of the PC’s date and
time.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the changes to the date and time.
The “Are you sure…” message box is displayed. Press
6-76
“Yes” to make the changes or “No” if you do not want to
accept the changes.
Press “Cancel” if you want to exit the Date/Time dialog

box. Press “Help” to open online help for assistance.
You return to the ECM Date/Time screen.
Section
6
6-77
Calibration Status
Display
Area
Error Code
Description Area
Illustration 6-61: Calibration Status screen
Purpose:
The Calibration Status function allows you to view the results of an
ECMs calibrations. It also displays the last times the calibrations
were successfully completed.
Accessing
To display the Calibration Status screen:
Select Calibration Status from the Service menu. The Calibration

Status screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-61).
Note: If the calibration status is failed, you can select the calibration
from the display area. It's error codes and descriptions are listed in
the Error Codes Description area.
Screen Layout
The Calibration Status screen has the following areas:
6-78
Display Area
The Calibration Status display area has three columns: Calibration,
Status, and Last Successful Completion. The Calibration column
gives the name of the calibration; the calibration is underlined. The
components of the calibration are listed under the calibration. The
Status column lists if the calibration had "Success," "Failed," or
"Never Calibrated." The Last Successful Completion lists the service
hour of the ECM from the last time the calibration was completed
successfully.
The current number of ECM diagnostic clock hours displays after the
ECM title.
Error Code Description Area

The Calibration Status error code description area has two columns:
Error/Warning and Description. The Error/Warning column lists the
error codes that occurred when the calibration failed. The description
column lists a brief explanation of the error codes.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Calibration Status screen is:
Section
• Print 6
6-79
Calibrations
Illustration 6-62: Example of the Calibrations menu functions
Purpose
The Calibrations function allows you to calibrate and/or monitor
various onboard sensors.
Calibration functions currently available on various applications are:
• Articulation Position Calibration

• Articulation Sensor Calibration
• Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration
• Crankcase Pressure Calibration
• Engine Prechamber Calibration
• Extended Service Coverage Calibration
• Hitch Sensors Calibration
• Hitch Valve Calibration
• Injector Codes Calibration
• Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations
• Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibration
• Monitor Throttle (Position) Sensor Calibration
• Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration
• Pressure Sensor Calibration
• Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration
• Rack Sensor Calibration
• Ripper Position Calibration
• Throttle Calibration
6-80
• Timing Calibration: 3406B/3406C
• Timing Calibration: 3176B/3406E/3500/C-10/C-12/C-15/
C-16/3116 HEUI/3126
• Timing Calibration: EIS
• Other Calibrations
Section
6
6-81
Articulation Position Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-63: Articulation Position Calibration screen
Purpose
The Articulation Position Calibration function allows you to calibrate
the articulation position. The ECM determines if the calibration is
successful or not.
Accessing
To run the Articulation Position Calibration:
Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then select

Articulation Position Calibration from the sub-menu. The Articulation
Position Calibration screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-63).
Screen Layout
The Articulation Position Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Articulation Position Calibration status parameter area lists the
required parameter and its current value: Vehicle Articulation Angle.
6-82
Status Line
The Articulation Position Calibration status line is located in the
the calibration.
Instruction Area
The Articulation Position Calibration instruction area describes the
process of the calibration.
Push-Button
The push-button available in the Articulation Position Calibration
screen is:
• Set
Pressing the “Set” push-button allows you to proceed with the

calibration and display the next set of instructions. The status line
keeps you informed of the results.
Section
6
6-83
Articulation Sensor Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line Graphing
Area
Illustration 6-64: Articulation Sensor Calibration screen #1
Purpose
The Articulation Sensor Calibration allows you to calibrate the
articulation sensor on the Medium Wheel Loaders or Integrated Tool
Carriers. The ECM determines if the calibration is successful or not.
The service tool displays the results and a graph of the articulation
percentages.
Accessing
To run Articulation Sensor Calibration:

Articulation Sensor Calibration from the sub-menu. The Articulation
Sensor Calibration screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-64).
Screen Layout
The Articulation Sensor Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Articulation Sensor Calibration status parameter area lists the
required parameters and their current values: Articulation Sensor,
6-84
Left Articulation Calibration Value, and Right Articulation Calibration
Value.
Status Line
The Articulation Sensor Calibration status line is located in the center
of the screen. It displays messages regarding the process of the
calibration. This area also gives instructions for the calibration.
Graphing Area
The Articulation Sensor Calibration graph area displays a graphical
representation of the angle adjustments as you calibrate.
Push-Button
The push-button available in the Articulation Sensor Calibration is:
• Next>
Section
6
6-85
Continuing the Calibration
Purpose
The “Next>” push-button allows you to work your way through the
directions of the Articulation Sensor Calibration. There is a series of
three different screens for this calibration function.
Instructions
To run the Articulation Sensor Calibration:
Step 1 The first Articulation Sensor Calibration screen appears

when you enter the calibration. This gives you a
real-time display of the Machine Articulation Angle.
Press the “Next>” push-button to start the calibration.

The second Articulation Sensor Calibration screen is
Step 2 The second Articulation Sensor Calibration screen

appears once you steer the machine in both directions
two or three times, and send the set signal to the ECM.
Once this screen is displayed, the calibration starts.
6-86
Press the “Next>” push-button to continue the
calibration. The third Articulation Sensor Calibration

Section
Step 3 The third Articulation Sensor Calibration screen appears 6
after you have finished the calibration. This shows you
the range of the calibrated values. From this screen you
are able to see if the calibration was successful or not,
by noting the position of the pointer in the graphical
representation at the bottom. If the pointer is in the gray
area, the calibration is unsuccessful.
6-87
Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Progress Area
Bar
Illustration 6-67: Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration screen
Purpose
The Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration function is used to
calibrate the correct relationship between the governor actuator
feedback and the engine RPM after replacing or reinstalling the
governor actuator and/or controller.
Accessing
To run the Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration:

Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration from the sub-menu. The
Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration screen is displayed (Refer
Screen Layout
The Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration screen has the
following areas:
6-88
The Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration status parameter area
lists the required parameter and its current value: Engine Speed.
Status Line
The Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration status line is located in
the center of the screen. It displays messages regarding the process
of the calibration.
Instruction Area
The Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration instruction area
describes the step-by-step procedures for the calibration. The step
you need to perform is dark; all other steps are gray.
Progress Bar
The Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration progress bar shows
the advancement of the current calibration step.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Automatic Governor Actuator
Calibration screen are: Section
6
• Next>
• Cancel/Restart
6-89
Purpose
directions of the Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration.
Instructions
To run the Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration:
completed step.


step.
Step 3 When the final step is completed, the “Cancel”

push-button changes to the “Restart” push-button.
6-90
Canceling the Calibration
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the Automatic Governor
Calibration.
Instructions
To cancel the calibration:
Step 1 Press the “Cancel” push-button. The Automatic

Governor Actuator Calibration dialog box is displayed
Section
6
Illustration 6-68: Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration dialog box
Step 2 Press “Default Data” or the “Previous Data” push-button

to calibrate the governor actuator. The status line
informs you that the calibration was unsuccessful.
6-91
Crankcase Pressure Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-69: Crankcase Pressure Calibration screen
Purpose
The Crankcase Pressure Calibration to allows you the capability to
modify the crankcase pressure shutdown value. The ECM samples
the crankcase pressure over at least five minutes. The crankcase
pressure shutdown value is the highest running pressure during this
time plus an additional amount of pressure. When the ECM notifies
the service tool that enough time has elapsed, you are asked to
accept the new shutdown value or cancel the calibration. You can
accept the new shutdown value at any time after the ECM has
indicated the elapsed time for the calibration has expired.
The amount of back pressure in the Crankcase has been proven to

grow over time due to mechanical wear on the crankcase. However,
a rapid increase in crankcase pressure is an indication that a piston
is about to seize up the engine. Calibrating the Crankcase Pressure
shutdown value to a known amount over average running pressure
allows the shutdown value to grow as the Crankcase pressure grows
thus ensuring that the engine is shutdown before major damage can
occur.
6-92
The purpose of this feature is to set the trip point as close to normal
operating point as possible to catch the seizure as early as possible.
Accessing
To run the Crankcase Pressure Calibration

Crankcase Pressure Calibration from the sub-menu. The Crankcase
Pressure Calibration screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-69).
Screen Layout
The Crankcase Pressure Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Crankcase Pressure Calibration status parameter area lists the
required parameters needed for the calibration and their current
values: Engine Speed, Crankcase Pressure, and Engine Load
Factor. This area also lists the High Crankcase Pressure Shutdown
Level value before the calibration began as well as the current
calibrated value.
Section
Status Line
6
The Crankcase Pressure Calibration status line is located in the
the calibration.
Instruction Area
The Crankcase Pressure Calibration instruction area describes the
step-by-step procedure for the calibration. The step you need to
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Crankcase Pressure Calibration
are:
• Start
• Cancel/Restart
6-93
Starting the Calibration
Purpose
The “Start” push-button allows you to begin the Crankcase Pressure
Calibration.
Note: The "Start" push-button is disabled until the set-up conditions

are met.
Instructions
To start the Crankcase Pressure Calibration:
Step 1 Once the set-up conditions are met, press the "Start"
push-button. The service tool places a checkmark in the
box to the left of the completed step.
Step 2 After the minimum calibration time is complete, the

Minimum Calibration Time dialog box is displayed (Refer
to Illustration 6-70)
Illustration 6-70: Minimum Calibration Time dialog box
Press "Accept" if you want to accept the current High

Crankcase Pressure Shutdown Level. Press "Cancel" if
you want the calibration to stop and the existing High
Crankcase Pressure Shutdown Level to remain as the
value.
6-94
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the Crankcase Pressure
Calibration.
Instructions
the Calibration was unsuccessful. The “Cancel” push-button changes
to the “Restart” push-button.
Section
6
6-95
Engine Prechamber Calibration
Display
Area Status
Parameter Area
Illustration 6-71: Engine Prechamber Calibration screen
Purpose
The Engine Prechamber Calibration allows you the capability to see
the effects of adjusting the needle valve, which controls the rate fuel
is delivered to the pre-chamber. The combustion time is the time
from when the spark plug fires until combustion is detected in the
specific cylinder. By measuring the combustion time, the technician
can determine efficiency of each cylinder in relationship to the entire
engine and make adjustments needed to increase productivity of the
engine.
6-96
Accessing
To run the Engine Prechamber Calibration:
Step 1 Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then

select Engine Prechamber Calibration from the
sub-menu. The Engine Prechamber Calibration
Conditions dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-72). Section
6
Illustration 6-72: Engine Prechamber Calibration Conditions dialog box
6-97
Step 2 This dialog box lists the recommended conditions before
starting the calibration and the current condition of each
parameter. Press the "Continue" push-button to proceed
with the calibration. The Engine Prechamber Calibration
Press "Cancel" to exit the Engine Prechamber

Calibration Conditions dialog box and return to the
service tool main screen.
Screen Layout
The Engine Prechamber Calibration screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Engine Prechamber Calibration display area has four columns.
The Cylinder column lists the different cylinder numbers available.
The Exhaust Port Temperature is the exhaust temperature of the
cylinder. The Unfiltered Combustion Time is the actual reading from
the Combustion Sensor. The Filtered Combustion Time is an
averaged unfiltered combustion time.
One cylinder and its values may be selected to display in a larger

font. You may increment through the cylinders on a bank by pressing
the right mouse button. Note: If you are looking at cylinder 2 on a 12
or 16 cylinder engine and press the right mouse button, cylinder 4
displays in the larger font).

The Engine Prechamber Calibration status parameter area displays
parameter values received from the ECM. This area is located at the
right side of the screen. The Desired Combustion Time always
displays with a large font type. The goal is to have the Filtered
Combustion Time match the Desired Combustion Time by adjusting
the Needle Valve. Another parameter that is displayed in this
particular calibration is Engine Average Combustion Time. Active
Codes Present indicate if there are any active diagnostic codes
and/or active event codes.
The last parameter (in this example it is Engine Speed) is a

parameter you can select. If no parameter is selected, Engine Speed
is selected by default. See "Setting Up the Status Parameter,"
section 6, page 102.
6-98
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Engine Prechamber Calibration
screen are:
• Switch Bank
• Active Codes
• More…
• Print
The "Switch Bank" push-button allows you to switch back and forth
from the odd and even banks of the cylinders when calibrating a 12
or 16 cylinder engine. The "Switch Bank" push-button is disabled
when calibrating a 6 or 8 cylinder engine. The odd bank displays
cylinder #1 by default.
Note: "See Displaying Active Diagnostic and Event Codes,"

section 1, page 9.
Pressing the "More…" push-button displays a pop-up menu with

three more option available in the Engine Prechamber Calibration.
Section
6
Note: See "Printing," section 1, page 26.
6-99
Illustration 6-73: Setup Configuration dialog box
Purpose
The "Setup Configuration" option allows you to view specific
parameters configurations. It also gives you the flexibility to change
these selected parameters within the Engine Prechamber Calibration
function.
Instructions
To change the selected parameter/s:
Step 1 Press the "More…" push-button, and then select "Setup

Configuration" from the option menu. The Setup
Configuration dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-73).

the "Change" push-button. The Change Parameter
OR--
Double click the parameter you want to change. The
Change Parameter Value dialog box is displayed (Refer
6-100

want to change this parameter or “No” not to change the
parameter's value.

new value. You return to the Engine Prechamber screen.
Section
6
6-101
Setting Up the Selected Status Parameter
Illustration 6-75: Setup Status dialog box
Purpose
The "Setup Status" option allows you to select one status parameter
to display in the Status Parameter area of the selected service tool
function from any available ECM.
Note: The last parameter selected displays in the Status Parameter

area the next time the function is used.
Instructions
To select a status parameter for display:
Step 1 Press the "More…" push-button, and then select "Setup

Status" from the option menu. The Setup Status dialog

box and press the “>” push-button. This will move the
Selected Parameter list box, (highlighting the parameter
6-102
in the Selected Parameter list box and pressing the “<”
push-button will move it back).
Only one parameter can be added to the Selected

Parameter list box.
Step 4 Press “OK” if you want to save the selected parameter

for the screen.
Press “Cancel” if you want to leave the Setup Status

dialog box without selecting a status parameter. The
previously selected (or the default parameter if none has
ever been selected) parameter continues to display in
the Status Parameter Area.
Section
6
6-103
Starting the Misfire Detection Test
Purpose
The "Misfire Detection" option allows you to start the Misfire
Detection test from the Engine Prechamber Calibration function while
in the Prechamber Calibration mode.
Instructions
To run the Misfire Detection function:
Step 1 Press the "More…" push-button, and then select "

Misfire Detection " from the option menu. The Start
Misfire Detection message box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-76).
Illustration 6-76: Start Misfire Detection message box
Step 2 Press "Yes" if you want to start the test. Misfire

Detection screen in Engine Prechamber Calibration
Mode is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-77). Press the
"No" push-button if you do not want to start the test.
6-104
Illustration 6-77: Misfire Detection screen in Engine Prechamber Calibration
Mode
Note: The Misfire Detection function of an engine is only available in Section

the Engine Prechamber Calibration mode. In this mode, the "Switch 6
Bank" and "More…" push-button are also available. The "Switch
Bank" push-button allows you to switch back and forth from the odd
and even banks of the cylinders when selecting a cylinder to be
tested from the Misfire Detection cylinder drop-down list. The
"More…" push-button displays a pop-up menu, allowing you to return
to the Engine Prechamber Calibration.
For more information see, "Misfire Detection Test," section 4,

page 99.
6-105
Extended Service Coverage Calibration
Display
Area
Illustration 6-78: Extended Service Coverage screen
Purpose
The Extended Service Coverage screen allows you to determine the
need for a PAR DYNO calibration test before extending service
coverage. The engine PAR Dynamometer Requirement Test works
as follows: histogram data is collected from the ECM to establish
whether the engine history mandates a PAR test to allow Extended
Service Coverage (ESC) on used truck engines.
Accessing
To run the Extended Service Coverage Calibration:

Extended Service Coverage from the sub-menu. The Extended
Service Coverage screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-78).
Screen Layout
The Extended Service Coverage display area informs you whether or
not the PAR DYNO test is required.
6-106
Hitch Sensors Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Section
Illustration 6-79 Hitch Sensors Calibration screen 6
Purpose
The Hitch Sensors Calibration function allows you to calibrate the
hitch position sensor and the hitch lever sensor. The ECM reports
the status of the calibration process and indicates if a fault occurs.
Accessing
To run the Hitch Sensors Calibration:
Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then select Hitch
Sensors Calibration from the sub-menu. The Hitch Sensors
Calibration screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-79).
Screen Layout
The Hitch Sensors Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Hitch Sensors Calibration status parameter area lists the
required parameter and its current value: Hitch Control. The status of
the hitch control is Up, Down, Hold, or Undefined.
6-107
Status Line
The Hitch Sensors Calibration status line is located in the center of
calibration.
Instruction Area
The Hitch Sensors Calibration instruction area describes the step-by-
step procedures for the calibration. When the condition is met, the
service tool places a check mark in the box to the left of the
completed step and the next condition is displayed.
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Hitch Sensors Calibration screen is:
• Continue
6-108
Purpose
The “Continue” push-button allows you to work through the
step-by-step directions of the Hitch Sensor Calibration.
Instructions
To run the Hitch Sensors Calibration:
Step 1 Once the first set-up condition is met, press the

“Continue” push-button. When the condition is met, the
service tool places a check mark in the box to the left of
the completed step.


each step. When the condition is met, the service tool
places a check mark in the box to the left of the Section
completed step and the next condition is displayed. 6
6-109
Hitch Valve Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-80: Hitch Valve Calibration screen
Purpose
The Hitch Valve Calibration function allows you to calibrate the
position of the hitch lever. The ECM reports the status of the
calibration and if a fault occurs, the calibration resets.
Accessing
To run the Hitch Valve Calibration:
Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then select Hitch
Valve Calibration from the sub-menu. The Hitch Valve Calibration
Screen Layout
The Hitch Valve Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Hitch Valve Calibration status parameter area lists the required
parameter and its current value: Hitch Control. The status of the hitch
control is Up, Down, Hold, or Undefined.
6-110
Status Line
The Hitch Valve Calibration status line is located in the center of the
screen. It displays messages regarding the process of the
calibration.
Instruction Area
The Hitch Valve Calibration instruction area describes the steps for
the calibration. As each condition is met, continue with the next
condition.
Push-Buttons
There are two different push-buttons displayed on this screen. They
are:
• Start
• Stop
Pressing the “Start” push-button allows you to proceed with the

calibration. The status line keeps you informed of the results of the
calibration. The Hitch Valve Calibration is placed in the calibration
mode and the calibration begins. The “Stop” push-button allows you Section
to stop the calibration. 6

is pressed. The “Start” push-button is disabled when the calibration
is running.
6-111
Injector Codes Calibration
Display
Area
Illustration 6-81: Injector Codes Calibration screen
Purpose
The Injector Codes Calibration function reads the programmed
injector code from the ECM and changes the numeric four-digit code
for each injector. Each injector code should match the four-digit code
stamped on the injector.
Accessing
To run the Injector Codes Calibration:

Injector Codes Calibration from the sub-menu. The Injector Codes
Screen Layout
The Injector Codes Calibration screen has the following areas:
Display Area
The Injector Codes Calibration display area has two columns:
Injector and Code. The Injector column lists the different injector
numbers available. The Code column displays the injectors’ codes.
6-112
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons displayed available in the Injector Codes
Calibration screen are:
• Change
• Print
Section
6
6-113
Changing the Injector Code
Illustration 6-82: Changing Parameter Value dialog box
Purpose
parameter’s value. Each injector code should match the four-digit
code stamped on the injector.
Instructions
Step 1 Highlight the parameter that you want to change and

press the “Change” push-button. The Change Parameter
want to program this parameter or “No” not to.

new value. You return to the Injector Codes Calibration
screen.
Note: The injector code must be four digits and cannot start with a
zero.
6-114
Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Section
Illustration 6-83: Main/Tilt Pump Calibration screen 6
Purpose
The Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations allows you to measure the time
it takes for the cylinders to fully retract and to fully extend. This
calibration compensates for the variation in manufacturing and minor
wear of the hydraulic system.
Note: For tractors with a single tilt blade, the Tilt Pump Calibration is
slightly different.
Accessing
To run the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration:

select Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations from the
sub-menu. The Select Components To Calibrate dialog
6-115
Illustration 6-84: Select Components To Calibrate dialog box
Step 2 Check/Uncheck which pumps you want to calibrate by

clicking on the pump calibration check boxes. By default,
all the pumps are checked.
Step 3 Press the “Begin” push-button. The Main/Tilt Pump

Calibration screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-
83). Press “Cancel” to exit the Select Components To
Calibrate dialog box and return to the service tool main
screen.
Screen Layout
The Main/Tilt Pump Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Main/Tilt Pump Calibration status parameter area lists the
required parameters and their current values: Engine Speed, Parking
Brake, Implement Lockout Switch Position, Hydraulic Oil
Temperature, and Main/Tilt Hydraulic Pump Efficiency.
Note: After the set-up conditions are met, Parking Brake and
Implement Lockout Switch Position parameters are removed from
the status parameter area and depending on the type of pump
calibration, new parameters are added. For the Tilt Pump
Calibration: Tilt Hydraulic Pump Oil Pressure and Blade Pitch, and
for the Main Pump Calibration: Main Hydraulic Pump Oil Pressure
and Blade Lift/Lower Lever Duty Cycle.
For machines with a single blade, Blade Control Handle Raise/Lower

Position parameter displays instead of Blade Pitch or Blade
Lift/Lower Lever Duty Cycle parameters.
6-116
Status Line
The Main/Tilt Pump Calibration status line is located in the center of
calibration.
Instruction Area
The Main/Tilt Pump Calibration instruction area describes the step-
by-step procedures for the calibration. The step you need to perform
is dark; all other steps are gray.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration are:
• Next>
• Cancel
Section
6
6-117
Illustration 6-85: Main/Tilt Pump Calibration-standard blade
Purpose
directions of the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration.
Instructions
To run the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration:
tool places a checkmark in the box to the left of the
completed step.

Note: After the set-up conditions are met, Parking Brake and
Implement Lockout Switch Position parameters are removed from
the status parameter area and depending on the pump calibration,
new parameters are added.
6-118
Step 2 Follow the instruction to continue the calibration. When
the condition is met, press “Next>.” A message box
displays to aid with Step 3 (Refer to Illustration 6-86).
Note: The “Next>” push-button is disabled for the rest of the

calibration.
Illustration 6-86: Tilt Pump Calibration message box-standard blade
Step 3 Read and follow the directions. Press “OK.” You return Section
to the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration screen with instructions 6
displayed in the status line.
Once the service tool determines the condition is met,

Calibrating… displays on the status line. Once the
service tool determines the next condition is met, a
message box is displayed, for the Tilt Pump Calibration-
standard blade, to aid with Step 4 (Refer to Illustration
6-87).
Note: For the Main Pump Calibration, a status box displays the
intended range and measured value for the main pump efficiency.
Proceed to Step 5.
6-119
Illustration 6-87: Tilt Pump Calibration message box-standard blade
Step 4 Read and follow the directions. Press “OK.” You return
to the Tilt Pump Calibration screen with the instructions
displayed in the status line. Once the condition is met,
Calibrating… displays on the status line.
Once the service tool determines the next condition is

met, a status box displays the intended range and
measured value for the Tilt Hydraulic Pump efficiency
Illustration 6-88: Tilt Hydraulic Pump status box
Step 5 Press “Accept” if the values given are acceptable. If the

service tool agrees, you return to the Main/Tilt Pump
Calibration screen with the last instruction displayed in
the status line.
If you press “Accept” and the service tool disagrees, the

Tilt Hydraulic Pump Efficiency message box is displayed
6-120
(Refer to Illustration 6-89). Press “OK.” You return to
Main/Hydraulic Pump Calibration screen with the last
instruction displayed in the status line.
Illustration 6-89: Tilt Hydraulic Pump Efficiency message box
Press “Cancel” if the values given are unacceptable. The

Main/Tilt Pump Calibration screen with the last
instruction displayed in the status line. The values are
not be recorded. Section
6
Step 6 Follow the last instruction to complete the calibration.
Step 7 When the calibration is complete, the Main and Tilt

Pump Calibrations status box is displayed with the
results of each calibration (Refer to Illustration 6-90). A
status line is located in the bottom of the screen. It
displays messages regarding the status of the calibration
selected.
6-121
Illustration 6-90: Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations status box
Press “Continue” to proceed to the next Pending

calibration or if there are no pending calibrations, press
“Restart” to return to the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration
screen.
Press “Cancel” to exit the Main/Tilt Pump Calibration

status box and return to the service tool main screen.
6-122
Section
Illustration 6-91: Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations status box 6
Purpose
calibration being run.
Instructions

you that the Calibration was unsuccessful. The Main and
Tilt Pump Calibrations status box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-91).
Step 2 Press “Continue” to continue to the next calibration.

Press “Restart” to return to the Select Components To
Calibrate screen, if all selected calibrations are
completed. Press “Cancel” to exit the Main/Tilt Pump
Calibration status box and return to the service tool main
screen.
6-123
Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-92: Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations screen
Purpose
The Main/Tilt Pump Sensors Relief Pressure Calibration requires you
to physically connect a pressure gauge at the main relief valve
pressure tap, then move the blade control to the full raise position
and electronically enter the value (relief pressure) from the gauge. At
the same time, the ECM determines the main and tilt pump pressure
sensor values. The service tool writes the value you entered into the
ECM. If the value is acceptable, the ECM will store the value, then
correlate the actual value with the main and tilt pump pressure
sensors.
The Main/Tilt Pump Sensors Atmospheric Pressure Calibration

allows you the ability to calibrate the zero value (atmospheric
pressure) on the main and tilt pump pressure sensors.
Accessing
To run the Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations:

select Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations
6-124
from the sub-menu. The Select Components To
Calibrate dialog box is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-93).
Illustration 6-93: Select Components To Calibrate dialog box
Step 2 Check/Uncheck which sensors you want to calibrate by

clicking on the pump sensors check boxes. By default,
all the sensors are checked.
Section
Step 3 Press the “Begin” push-button. The Main/Tilt Pump 6
Sensors Relief Pressure Calibration screen is displayed
(Refer to Illustration 6-92). Press “Cancel” to exit the
Select Components To Calibrate dialog box and return
to the service tool main screen.
Screen Layout
The Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations screen has the
following areas:

The Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations status parameter
area lists the required parameters and their current values. For the
Main/Tilt Pump Sensors Relief Pressure Calibration: Engine Speed,
Parking Brake, Implement Lockout Switch Position, and Hydraulic Oil
Temperature. For the Main/Tilt Pump Sensors Atmospheric Pressure
Calibration: Parking Brake, Implement Lockout Switch Position, Main
Hydraulic Pump Oil Pressure, and Tilt Hydraulic Pump Oil Pressure.
Note: After the set-up conditions are met in the Main/Tilt Pump
Sensors Relief Pressure Calibration, Parking Brake and Implement
Lockout Switch Position parameters are removed and Pressure
6-125
Compensation Override, Main Hydraulic Pump Oil Pressure, and Tilt
Hydraulic Pump Oil Pressure are added.
Status Line
The Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations status line is
located in the center of the screen. It displays messages regarding
the process of the calibration.
Instruction Area
The Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations instruction area
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors
Calibrations are:
• Next>
• Cancel
6-126
Section
Illustration 6-94: Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations screen 6
Purpose
directions of the Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations.
Instructions
To run the Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibration:
completed step.

Note: After the set-up conditions are met for the Main/Tilt Pump
Sensors Atmospheric Pressure Calibration, the service tool begins
the calibration. When the calibration is finished, “Calibration
Complete” displays on the status line and then the Main/Tilt Pump
Pressure Sensors Calibration status box is displayed.
6-127
Step 2 In the Main/Tilt Pump Sensors Relief Pressure
Calibration, continue to do each step. The Status Line
aids with the steps. As each step is completed, the
service tool places a check mark in the box and darkens
the next step.
Note: If it is determined that the blade control is held too long in the
full raise position, a time out warning box is displayed. Release the
Blade Control Handle and press “OK.”
Step 3 Write down the value from the reference gauge so you
can enter this value later. Once the third step is
complete, the Main Hydraulic Pump Relief Pressure
Illustration 6-95: Main Hydraulic Pump Relief Pressure dialog box
Step 4 Enter the value in the Main Hydraulic Pump Relief

Pressure text box and press “OK.” Press “Cancel” to
return to step two of the Main/Tilt Pump Sensors Relief
Pressure Calibration.
If the value is acceptable, the calibration continues. If

value is unacceptable, “The value recorded is out of
range” message box is displayed. Press “OK.” The Main
Hydraulic Pump Relief Pressure dialog box displays with
the incorrect value highlighted.
Step 5 When the calibration is complete, the Main/Tilt Pump

Pressure Sensors Calibrations status box is displayed
with the results of each calibration (Refer to Illustration
6-96). A status line is located in the bottom of the
6-128
screen. It displays messages regarding the status of the
calibration selected.
Illustration 6-96: Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations status box
Press “Continue” to proceed to the next Pending

calibration or if there are no pending calibrations, press
“Restart” to return to the Pump Pressure Sensors
Calibration screen.
Section
Press “Cancel” to exit the Main/Tilt Pump Pressure 6
Sensors Calibration status box. An “Are you sure…”
message box displays. Press “Yes” to cancel the
remaining calibrations and return to the service tool main
screen. Press “No” to display the Main/Tilt Pressure
Sensors Calibration status box.
6-129
Illustration 6-97: Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations status

screen
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the current calibration
being run.
Instructions

you that the Calibration was unsuccessful. The Main/Tilt
Pump Pressure Sensors Calibration status screen is
Step 2 Press “Continue” to continue to the next calibration.

Press “Restart” to return to the Select Components To
Calibrate screen, if all selected calibrations are
completed.
Press “Cancel” to exit the Main/Tilt Pump Pressure

Sensor Calibration status box. An “Are you sure...”
message box is displayed. Press “Yes” to cancel the
6-130
remaining calibrations. Press “No” to return to the
Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensor Calibration status box.
Section
6
6-131
Monitor Throttle (Position) Sensor Calibration
Status Parameter
Area
Illustration 6-98: Monitor Throttle Sensor Calibration (ATA) screen
Purpose
The Monitor Throttle Sensor Calibration function allows you to
monitor the throttle sensor. The Throttle Position Sensor is used to
provide a throttle signal to the ECM. This sensor must be monitored
to make sure that it is operating properly.
Note: In some applications, this function is called Monitor Throttle

Position Sensor Calibration.
Accessing
To run the Monitor Throttle Sensor Calibration:

Monitor Throttle Sensor from the sub-menu. The Monitor Throttle
Screen Layout
The Monitor Throttle Sensor Calibration screen has the following
areas:
6-132
The Monitor Throttle Sensor Calibration status parameter area lists
one or more required parameters and their current values,
depending on the ECM connection. Throttle Sensor Duty Cycle and
PTO Throttle Sensor Duty Cycle are displayed for ATA. Throttle
Sensor Duty Cycle, Throttle Position, and Desired Engine Speed are
displayed for CAT Data Link. Not all ECMs support the PTO Throttle
Sensor Duty Cycle parameter.
Section
6
6-133
Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-99: Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration screen
Purpose
The Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration sets the solenoid
current levels needed to set the power shift pressure at its high and
low range.
Accessing
To run the Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration:

Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration from the sub-menu. The
Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration screen is displayed (Refer
Screen Layout
The Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration has the following
areas:
6-134
The Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration status parameter
area lists the required parameters and its current values: Engine
Speed, Power Shift Pressure, and Hydraulic Oil Temperature.
Instruction Line
The Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration instruction area
describes the steps for the calibration. As each condition is met, the
next condition is displayed.
Status Area
The Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration status line displays
messages regarding the process of the calibration.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Power Shift Pressure Solenoid
Calibration screen are:
• Start
• Stop
Pressing the “Start” push-button allows you to proceed with the Section
calibration. The status area keeps you informed of the results of the 6
calibration. The “Stop” push-button allows you to stop the calibration.

is pressed. The “Start” push-button is disabled when the calibration
is running.
6-135
Pressure Sensor Calibration
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-100: Pressure Sensor Calibration screen
Purpose
The Pressure Sensor Calibration allows you to calibrate the pressure
sensor. During this calibration, the engine must not be running.
Some of the newer ECMs calibrate the boost sensor on power-up,
and do not require manual calibration.
Note: The Boost Calibration function is similar to the Pressure

Sensor Calibration. To run the Boost Calibration, follow the Pressure
Sensor Calibration instructions.
Accessing
To run the Pressure Sensor Calibration:

Pressure Sensor Calibration from the sub-menu. The Pressure
Screen Layout
The Pressure Sensor Calibration screen has the following areas:
6-136
Status Line
The Pressure Sensor Calibration status line displays messages
regarding the process of the calibration.
Instruction Area
The Pressure Sensor Calibration instruction area describes the
Push-Buttons
The push-button available in the Pressure Sensor Calibration screen
is:
• Start

calibration and display the next set of instructions. The status line
keeps you informed of the results of the Calibration.
Section
6
6-137
Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line Instruction
Area
Control
Area
Illustration 6-101: Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration screen
Purpose
The Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration function allows
calibration of the proportional reducing valve. This valve is needed to
eliminate variation in performance of the proportional reducing valve
or controller after replacing them. This valve is made at two pressure
points.
Accessing
To run the Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration:

Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration from the sub-menu. The
Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration screen is displayed (Refer
Screen Layout
The Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration screen has the
following areas:
6-138
The Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration status parameter area
lists the required parameters and their current values: Engine Speed,
and Hydraulic Oil Temperature.
Status Line
The Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration status line is located in
the center of the screen. It displays messages regarding the process
of the calibration.
Instruction Area
The Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration instruction area
Control Area
The Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration control area allows you
to adjust the command value; the horizontal slide bar shows you that
value. The push-buttons to change the command value are:
• < button – increases the command

• > button – decreases the command Section
6
As the command value is changing, the value is displayed above the
slide bar.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Proportional Reducing Valve
Calibration are:
• Next>
• Cancel/Restart
6-139
Purpose
directions of the Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration.
Instructions
To run the Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration:
completed step.


step.
6-140
Step 3 When the final step is complete, the “Cancel”
Section
6
6-141
Cancelling the Calibration
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the Proportional
Reducing Valve Calibration.
Instructions
To cancel the test:
the Calibration was unsuccessful (Refer to Illustration 6-103). The
“Cancel” push-button changes to the “Restart” push-button.
6-142
Rack Sensor Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Section
Illustration 6-104: Rack Sensor Calibration screen 6
Purpose
The Rack Sensor Calibration function allows you to adjust the rack
on an engine to the exact desired position.
Note: The engine must not be running during this calibration.
Accessing
To run the Rack Sensor Calibration:
Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then select Rack
Sensor Calibration from the sub-menu. The Rack Sensor Calibration
Note: If the engine is running, a message box is displayed telling you

the engine must not be running. Turn off the engine and press the
“Retry” push-button. Press “Cancel” to exit the calibration.
Screen Layout
Rack Sensor Calibration screen has the following area:
6-143
The Rack Sensor Calibration status parameter area has three
sections: Status Line, Bar Graph, and Rack Position parameter. The
Status Line displays messages regarding the process of the
calibration. The Bar Graph shows the relative amount of calibration
error and the direction to turn the sensor. The current value of the
Rack Position Parameter is displayed below the graph.
6-144
Ripper Position Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-105: Ripper Position Calibration screen Section

6
Purpose
The Ripper Position Calibration sets the one point where the ripper
touches the ground.
Accessing
To run the Ripper Position Calibration

Ripper Position Calibration from the sub-menu. The Ripper Position
Screen Layout
The Ripper Position Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Ripper Position Calibration status parameter area lists the
required parameter and its current value: Ripper Position. If the
ripper is 100 percent, the ripper is in a completely up. If the ripper is
–100 percent, the ripper is completely down.
6-145
Status Line
The Ripper Position Calibration status line is located in the center of
calibration.
Instruction Area
The Ripper Position Calibration instruction area describes the
Push-Button
The push-button available in the Ripper Position Calibration screen
is:
• Set
Press the “Set” push-button to zero the ripper sensor. Zero means
the ripper is just touching the ground. The current ripper position is
now the new zero point. The status line keeps you informed of the
results.
6-146
Throttle Calibration
Status
Parameter Area
Parameter
Monitoring Area
Section
Illustration 6-106: Throttle Calibration screen 6
Purpose
The Throttle Calibration function allows you to monitor the status of
specific parameters that effect the primary and secondary throttles
on marine applications. This information allows you to synchronize
the two throttles and troubleshoot any problems.
Accessing
To run the Throttle Calibration:
Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then select the
Throttle Calibration from the sub-menu. The Throttle Calibration
Screen Layout
The Throttle Calibration screen has the following areas:

The Throttle Calibration status parameter area lists the required
parameters and their current values: Throttle Synchronization
6-147
Switch 1, Throttle Synchronization Switch 2, and Throttle
Synchronization Status.
Parameter Monitoring Area

The Throttle Calibration parameter monitoring area grid lists the
required parameter data in real time. As the throttle is adjusted, this
data is updated for both the primary and secondary throttles.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Throttle Calibration are:
• Hold/Resume
• Print
6-148
Pausing the Display
Purpose
Instructions
Step 1 Press the “Hold” push-button from the Throttle

Calibration screen. the service tool immediately stops
updating the status parameters. The “Hold” push-button
changes to the “Resume” push-button.

Section
6
6-149
Timing Calibration: 3406B/3406C
Display
Area
Illustration 6-107: Timing Calibration screen for the 3406B or 3406C Engine
Purpose
The Timing Calibration function allows you to calibrate the timing
sensor used on a 3406B or 3406C engine.
Note: The engine must not be running during this calibration.
Accessing
To run the Timing Calibration:

Timing Calibration from the sub-menu. The Timing Calibration
Note: If the engine is running, a message box is displayed telling you

the engine must not be running. Turn off the engine and press the
“Retry” push-button. Press “Cancel” to exit the calibration.
Screen Layout
The Timing Calibration screen has the following area:
6-150
Display Area
The 3406B or 3406C Timing Calibration display area has three
sections: Status Line, Bar Graph, and Rack Position parameter. The
Status Line displays messages regarding the process of the
calibration. The Bar Graph shows the relative amount of calibration
error and the direction to turn the sensor. The current value of the
Rack Position Parameter is displayed below the graph.
Section
6
6-151
Timing Calibration:
3176B/3406E/3500/C-10/C-12/C-15/C-16/3116
HEUI/3126
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-108: Timing Calibration screen for the

3176B/3406E/3500/C-10/C-12/C-15/C-16/3116 HEUI/3126 Engines
Purpose
The Timing Calibration function is used to calibrate the offset in the
timing between the engine reference timing sensor and the ECM.
This calibration works for the 3176B, 3406E, 3500, C-10, C-12, C-15,
C-16, 3116 HEUI, and 3126 engines.
Accessing

Screen Layout
The Timing Calibration screen has the following areas:
6-152
The Timing Calibration status parameter area lists the required
parameter and its current value: Engine Speed.
Status Line
The Timing Calibration status line is located in the center of the
calibration.
Instruction Area
The Timing Calibration instruction area describes the process of the
calibration.
Push-Button
The push-button available in the Timing Calibration screen is:
• Continue
Pressing the “Continue” push-button allows you to proceed with the

calibration and display the next set of calibration instructions. The
status line keeps you informed of the results.
Section
6
6-153
Timing Calibration: EIS
Illustration 6-109: Timing Calibration screen for EIS Engines
Purpose
The Timing Calibration function allows you to calibrate the ECM to a
specific time that it takes the flywheel to move from top dead center
to 40 degrees past top dead center. This calibration needs to be run
anytime that an Electronic Ignition System (EIS) control is replaced
on an EIS engine. This timing calibration does not require an
additional sensor.
Accessing

Screen Layout
The Timing Calibration screen has the following areas:
6-154
The Timing Calibration status parameter area lists the required
parameter needed for the calibration and its current value: Engine
Speed.
Status Line
The Timing Calibration status line is located in the center of the
calibration.
Instruction Area
The Timing Calibration instruction area describes the step-by-step
procedure for the calibration. The step you need to perform is dark;
all other steps are gray. When the condition is met, the service tool
places a check mark in the box to the left of the completed step and
darkens the next step. If the condition is not met, the service tool
responds by staying at that step.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Timing Calibration screen are:
• Start Section
• Cancel/Restart 6

calibration and display the next set of calibration instructions. The
status line keeps you informed of the results. After the "Start"
push-button is pressed, it becomes disabled until the calibration is
stopped.
The "Cancel" push-button allows you to end the Timing Calibration.

When the final step is complete, the "Cancel" push-button changes
to the "Restart" push-button.
6-155
Other Calibrations
Status
Parameter Area
Status
Line
Instruction
Area
Illustration 6-110: Example of a calibration screen
Purpose: 3rd Implement Valve Manual Calibration

rd
The 3 Implement Valve Manual Calibration function sets the
rd
minimum current required to move the 3 function implement.
Purpose: Blade Control Calibration

The Blade Control Calibration function sets the handle travel for the
control lift and tilt functions.
Purpose: Blade Solenoid Calibration

The Blade Solenoid Calibration sets the turn-on level for any or all of
the blade solenoids, including blade lift, blade lower, blade tilt right,
and blade tilt left.
!WARNING!
DO NOT PROCEED WITH THIS CALIBRATION

UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTAND THE
FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS AND WARNINGS.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OR
6-156
HEED THE WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN INJURY
OR DEATH.
Note: A warning box is displayed when you first enter this

calibration. Press “Accept” to accept the warning and continue the
calibration.
Purpose: Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibration

The Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibration sets the touch-up pressure
for the left and right brakes to achieve smooth brake engagement.
Purpose: Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibrations

(Manual)
The Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibrations (Manual) set the
touch-up pressure for the left and right brakes to achieve smooth
brake engagement.
Note: The Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibration (Manual) screen

layout displays a control area allowing you to increase or decrease
the current to the solenoid. The horizontal slide bar shows you the
calibration range. The current calibration value is above the slide bar.
Section
The parameter reference numbers are to the left and right of the
6
slide bar. A vertical slide indicates where the current value falls. The
• <button – decreases the calibration value

• >button – increases the calibration value
Purpose: Engine Cooling Fan Calibration

The Engine Cooling Fan Calibration finds the optimal fan solenoid
electrical currents for various engine speeds. The speed of the
engine cooling fan is then limited by this calibrated electrical current
which prevents the fan from reaching an overspeed condition. This
calibration should be performed at the factory, commissioning, and
whenever the fan changes configuration.
!WARNING!

OR DEATH.
6-157
calibration. Press “OK” to accept the warning and continue the
calibration, or press “Cancel” to exit and return to the service tool
main screen.
Purpose: FNR Shifter Sensor Calibration

The FNR Shifter Sensor Calibration sets the valid operating range for
the neutral position on the shifter.
Purpose: Impeller Clutch Solenoid Calibration

The Impeller Clutch Solenoid Calibration sets the current level to
drive the solenoid.
Note: The Impeller Clutch Solenoid Calibration screen layout

displays a progress bar to show the advancement of the current
calibration step.
Purpose: Implement Control Lever Calibrations

The Implement Control Lever Calibrations set the travel limits for the
implement control lever.
Note: Pressing the “Cancel” push-button in the Implement Control

Lever Calibrations status box displays an “Are you sure…” message
box. Press “Yes” to cancel the remaining calibrations and return to
the service tool main screen. Press “No” to return to the Implement
Control Lever Calibrations status box.
Purpose: Implement Solenoid Calibration

The Implement Solenoid Calibration sets the minimum electric
current required for motion of the implement to begin.
!WARNING!

OR DEATH.

6-158
main screen.
Purpose: Implement Valve Solenoid Calibration

The Implement Valve Solenoid Calibration sets the minimum current
required to move the implement.
Purpose: Implement Valve Solenoid Manual Calibration

The Implement Valve Solenoid Manual Calibration sets the minimum
current required to move the blade.
Purpose: Inching Pedal Calibration

The Inching Pedal Calibration sets the pedal travel limits.
Purpose: Joystick Calibration

The Joystick Calibration sets the travel limits for the specific
joysticks.
Purpose: Left Brake Pedal Calibration

The Left Brake Pedal Calibration sets the pedal travel limits. Section
6
Purpose: Lever Calibration
The Lever Calibrations set the travel limits for specific levers.
Purpose: Lift Cylinder Position Sensors Calibration

The Lift Cylinder Position Calibration updates the minimum and
maximum travel limits of the lift cylinder position sensors.
Purpose: Lift Linkage Sensor Calibration

The Lift Linkage Sensor Calibration sets the lift linkage sensor travel
limits.
Purpose: Lift/Tilt Sensors Calibration

The Lift/Tilt Sensors Calibration is necessary when a linkage sensor
is adjusted or replaced. In this calibration, both the lift and tilt linkage
sensors are calibrated.
!WARNING!

6-159
OR DEATH.

main screen.
Purpose: Linkage Sensor Calibration

The Linkage Sensor Calibration sets the angle travel limits of the lift
and tilt linkages.
Purpose: Lockup Clutch Engagement Calibration

The Lockup Clutch Engagement Calibration is to determine the
electrical current required to maintain proper lockup clutch pressure.
This calibration should be performed during initial machine
configuration, after the replacement of lockup clutch solenoid valves,
or the replacement of the ECM.
Note: The Lockup Clutch Engagement Calibration screen layout

displays a control area allowing you to increase or decrease the
current to the clutch solenoid. The horizontal slide bar shows you the
• <<button – decreases the lockup clutch current rapidly

• <button – decreases the lockup clutch current
• >button – increases the lockup clutch current
• >>button – increases the lockup clutch current rapidly
Purpose: Main Implement Variable Pump Calibration

The Main Implement Variable Pump Calibration locates the minimum
and maximum currents in the pump’s modulation curve.
Purpose: Modulation Input Calibration

The Modulation Input Calibration sets the center positions and travel
limits for the thumbwheel and attachment pedal positions.
Purpose: Neutralization Setpoint Calibration
6-160
The Neutralization Setpoint Calibration adjusts the amount of brake
pressure available on the left brake pedal at the point of
neutralization.
Purpose: Neutralization Setpoint Adjustment Calibration

The Neutralization Setpoint Adjustment Calibration adjusts the
Neutralization Setpoint Calibration for fine tuning the amount of
brake pressure available, on the left brake pedal, at the point of
neutralization.
Note: The Neutralization Setpoint Adjustment Calibration screen

layout displays a control area allowing you to increase or decrease
the amount of brake pressure at the neutralization point. The
horizontal slide bar shows you the calibration range. The current
calibration value is above the slide bar. The parameter reference
numbers are to the left and right of the slide bar. A vertical slide
indicates where the pressure value falls. The buttons used in this
area are:
• <button – decreases the pressure

• >button – increases the pressure
Section
Purpose: NFC Pressure Sensors Calibration 6
The NFC Pressure Sensors Calibration adjusts the electric current to
meet the pressure gauge output to target the NFC pressure sensors.
This calibrates the conversion table of low/high calibration points
between electric current and pressure of the NFC pressure stabilizer
valve.
Purpose: Oxygen Sensor Calibration

The Oxygen Sensor Calibration compensates for tolerances in the
oxygen sensor element and the oxygen sensor buffer.
Note: The Oxygen Sensor Calibration screen layout displays a

progress bar to show the advancement of the current calibration
step.
Purpose: Pedal/Lever Calibration

The Pedal/Lever Calibration sets the pedal/lever travel limits.
Purpose: Pitch Sensor Calibration

The Pitch Sensor Calibration updates the level position of the pitch
sensor.
6-161
Purpose: PRV-Attachment Valves Pressure Calibration
The PRV-Attachment Valves Pressure Calibration adjust the electric
current to meet the pressure gauge output to target the attachment
valve pressure.
Note: The PRV-Attachment Valves Pressure Calibration control area

allows you to adjust the command value; the horizontal slide bar
shows you that value. The push-buttons to change the command
value are:

• > button – decreases the command

slide bar.
Purpose: PRV-F1 Type Valve Flow Command Pressure

Calibration
The PRV-F1 Type Valve Flow Command Pressure Calibration
adjusts the electric current to meet the pressure gauge output to
target the F1 type valve flow command pressure.
Note: The PRV-F1 Type Valve Flow Command Pressure Calibration

control area allows you to adjust the command value; the horizontal
slide bar shows you that value. The push-buttons to change the
command value are:


slide bar.
Purpose: PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Calibration-

Flow Meter Method
The PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Calibration-Flow Meter Method
adjusts the electric current to meet the flow meter output to the target
main pump flow while maintaining a constant hydraulic pump
pressure.
!WARNING!
6-162
This calibration must be performed using a flow
meter. This calibration method is more accurate than
the PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure
Calibration.
Note: The PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Calibration-Flow Meter

Method control area allows you to adjust the command value; the
horizontal slide bar shows you that value. The push-buttons to
change the command value are:


slide bar.
Purpose: PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure

Calibration
The PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure Calibration adjusts
the electric current to meet the pressure gauge output to the target
main pump flow limitation pressure.
Section
!WARNING! 6
This calibration must be performed using a pressure

gauge. If you have a flow meter, then you should use
the PRV-Main Pump Flow Limit Calibration-Flow
Meter Method Calibration. It is more accurate than
the PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure
Calibration.
Note: The PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure Calibration

control area allows you to adjust the command value; the horizontal
slide bar shows you that value. The push-buttons to change the
command value are:


slide bar.
6-163
Purpose: PRV-Negative Flow Control Stabilizer Pressure
Calibration
The PRV-Negative Flow Control Stabilizer Pressure Calibration
adjusts the electric current to meet the pressure gauge output to the
target negative flow control stabilizer pressure.
Note: The PRV-Negative Flow Control Stabilizer Pressure

Calibration control area allows you to adjust the command value; the
horizontal slide bar shows you that value. The push-buttons to
change the command value are:


slide bar.
Purpose: PRV-NFC Reducer Pressure Calibration

The PRV-NFC Reducer Pressure Calibration adjusts the electric
current to meet the pressure gauge output to the target NFC reducer
pressure.
Note: The PRV-NFC Reducer Pressure Calibration control area

allows you to adjust the command value; the horizontal slide bar
shows you that value. The push-buttons to change the command
value are:


slide bar.
Purpose: PRV-Powershift Pressure Calibration

The PRV-Powershift Pressure Calibration adjusts the electric current
to meet the pressure gauge output to the target powershift pressure.
Note: The PRV-Powershift Pressure Calibration control area allows

you to adjust the command value; the horizontal slide bar shows you
that value. The push-buttons to change the command value are:

6-164
slide bar.
Purpose: Rear Hitch Control Lever Sensor Calibration

The Rear Hitch Control Lever Sensor Calibration adjusts the rear
hitch lever position sensor after first assembly of the machine,
whenever the sensor is replaced, or whenever other changes on the
machine warrant the need for re-calibration.
Purpose: Rear Hitch Height Sensor Calibration

The Rear Hitch Height Sensor Calibration adjusts the rear hitch
height position sensor. This calibration is needed after assembly of
the machine, whenever the sensor is replaced, or whenever other
changes on the machine warrant the need for re-calibration.
!WARNING!

HEED THE WARNINGS COULD RESULT IN INJURY Section
OR DEATH. 6

main screen.
Purpose: Rear Hitch Solenoid Calibrations

The Rear Hitch Solenoid Calibration adjusts the initiation currents for
the rear hitch raise/lower valve and the steer valve. This calibration is
needed after assembly of the machine, whenever a valve or solenoid
is replaced, or whenever other changes on the machine warrant the
need for re-calibration.
!WARNING!

OR DEATH.
6-165
main screen.
Purpose: Retarder Performance Calibration

The Retarder Performance Calibration adjusts the retarder response
to achieve nominal retarder performance.
Purpose: Ripper Control Levers Calibration

The Ripper Control Levers Calibration sets the travel for both the
ripper raise/lower control and the ripper shank in/out control.
Purpose: Ripper Solenoids Calibration

The Ripper Solenoids Calibration sets the turn-on level for any or all
of the ripper solenoids, including ripper lift, ripper lower, ripper shank
in, and ripper shank out.
!WARNING!

OR DEATH.

calibration. Press “Accept” to accept the warning and continue the
calibration.
Purpose: Steerable Hitch Center Calibration

The Steerable Hitch Center Calibration adjusts the center position
and sway limiter for the optional steerable hitch. This calibration is
needed after assembly of the machine, whenever a steer hitch or
rockshaft sensor is replaced in the field, or whenever other changes
on the machine warrant the need for re-calibration
!WARNING!

6-166
OR DEATH.

main screen.
Purpose: Steering Clutch/Brake Pressure Calibration

The Steering Clutch/Brake Pressure Calibration sets the low
pressure for the brakes and both the high and low pressures for the
steering clutches. The service tool commands the ECM to change
the solenoid current until the proper pressure is shown on the gauge.
Note: The Steering Clutch/Brake Pressure Calibration screen layout

displays a control area allowing you to increase or decrease the
current to the solenoid. The horizontal slide bar shows you the
buttons used in this area are: Section
6
• <<button – decreases the current rapidly
• <button – decreases the current
• >button – increases the current
• >>button – increases the current rapidly
Purpose: Tilt Linkage Sensor Calibration

The Tilt Linkage Sensor Calibration sets the tile linkage sensor travel
limits.
Purpose: Torque Converter Pedal Calibration

The Torque Converter Pedal Calibration sets the pedal travel limits.
Purpose: Transmission Clutch Engagement Pressure

Calibration
The Transmission Clutch Engagement Pressure Calibration sets the
engagement hydraulic oil pressure on the transmission’s directional
and speed clutches. The service tool commands the ECM to change
the clutch solenoid current until the proper pressure is shown on the
gauge.
6-167
Note: The Transmission Clutch Engagement Pressure Calibration
screen layout displays a control area allowing you to increase or
decrease the current to the clutch solenoid. The horizontal slide bar
shows you the calibration range. The current calibration value is
above the slide bar. The parameter reference numbers are to the left
and right of the slide bar. A vertical slide indicates where the current
value falls. The buttons used in this area are:
• <<button – decreases the solenoid current rapidly

• <button – decreases the solenoid current
• >button – increases the solenoid current
• >>button – increases the solenoid current rapidly
Purpose: Transmission Fill Calibration

The Transmission Fill Calibration shapes the current trace used to
control the oil pressure to the transmission clutches. The calibration
procedure adjusts the Ramp Level and Hold Level portions of the
solenoid current trace to get the proper oil pressure response for
each clutch.
Purpose: Valve Calibration

The Valve Calibration determines the implement valve solenoid
electrical current necessary to initiate linkage motion.
Purpose: Variable Relief Pressure Calibration

The Variable Relief Pressure Calibration adjusts the electric current
to meet the pressure gauge output to the target variable relief
pressure.
Note: The Variable Relief Pressure Calibration control area allows

you to adjust the command value; the horizontal slide bar shows you
that value. The push-buttons to change the command value are:


slide bar.
Accessing
To run the calibration:
6-168
Select Calibrations from the Service menu, and then select the
desired calibration from the sub-menu. The selected calibration
Note: Some of the calibrations display a Select Components to

Calibrate dialog box. Check/Uncheck which calibration you want to
run and press “Begin.” By default, all components available are
selected.
Screen Layout
The calibration screen has the following areas:

The status parameter area lists the required parameters needed for
the calibration and their current values.
Status Line
The status line is located in the center of the screen. It displays
messages regarding the process of the calibration.
Instruction Area
Section
The instruction area describes the step-by-step procedure for the 6
calibration. The step you need to perform is dark; all other steps are
gray.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available are:
• Next>
• Cancel/Restart
6-169
Purpose
directions of the calibration.
Instructions
To run the calibration:
completed step.


step.
For some of the calibrations, a calibration status box is

displayed with the results of each calibration.
Step 3 When the final step is completed, the “Cancel”

If the calibration status box is displayed, press “Restart”

to return to the calibration screen. Press “Cancel” to exit
the calibration status box and return to the service tool
main screen.
6-170
Purpose
The “Cancel” push-button allows you to end the calibration.
Instructions
the calibration was unsuccessful. The “Cancel” push-button changes
to the “Restart” push-button.
Section
6
6-171
Service Procedure
Illustration 6-111: Example of the Service Procedures menu functions
Purpose
The Service Procedures function allows you to set the performance
of an engine on the currently selected ECM. This allows you to fine-
tune the performance of an engine.
Service Procedures currently available on various applications are:
• Dyno Mode
• Engine Control System Tuning
• Power Balancing Tuning
6-172
Dyno Mode
Status
Parameter Area
Display
Area
Section
Illustration 6-112: Dyno Mode screen 6
Purpose
The Dyno Mode function allows you to test an engine without having
the sensors connected to the machine. The test can override
parameters and then view the effects of the override on different
status parameters. You can only perform this test on an engine
outside of a machine.
!WARNING!
DO NOT PROCEED UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND

UNDERSTAND THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS
AND WARNINGS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS OR HEED THE WARNINGS COULD
RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.
The Dyno Mode can be performed alone or in the background of

other specific functions. The Dyno Mode option has an extended
drop-down menu (Refer to Illustration 6-113) to assist you with this
function.
6-173
Once you select "Start" from the Dyno Mode warning box, the dyno
test is active. At this point, if you select another service tool menu
option, the dyno mode function is still active and running in the
background. When active, the status of Dyno Mode displays on the
title bar.
Illustration 6-113: Dyno Mode menu functions
To return to the Dyno Mode screen, select the Override option from
the Dyno Mode sub-menu. To exit the dyno mode, select the Disable
option from the Dyno Mode sub-menu.
Accessing
To run the Dyno Mode function:
Step 1 Select Service Procedures from the Service menu. From

the sub-menu select Dyno Mode and then select Enable.
The Dyno Mode warning box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 6-114).
6-174
Illustration 6-114: Dyno Mode warning box
Step 2 Press the “Start” push-button. The Dyno Mode screen is

exit and return to the service tool main screen. Section
6
Note: If the service tool determines there is more than one ECM
available, a message box is displayed stating the test cannot be
performed on an engine in a machine.
Screen Layout
The Dyno Mode screen has the following areas:

The Dyno Mode status parameter area lists the required parameters
and their current values. A value of “Unavailable” is displayed if a
parameter is not supported by the current ECM or if an error occurs
while reading the data.
Display Area
The Dyno Mode display area has four columns: Description, Value,
Unit, and Mode. The Description column gives the name of the
parameter set to run the test. The Value column displays the status
of the current parameters. The Unit column displays the
configuration parameter units. The Mode column displays if the
parameter is in “Normal” or “Override.”
6-175
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Dyno Mode screen are:
• Change
• Stop
• Print
6-176
Purpose

Note: Engine Speed is limited to 2100 RPM. Section

6
Instructions
Step 1 In the display area, highlight the parameter you want to

change and press the “Change” push-button. The
Change Parameter Value dialog box is displayed (Refer
Step 2 Depending on the parameter you select to override,

enter the new value in the New Value text box or select
the New Value from the drop-down list.
want to change this parameter or “No” if you do not want
to change the parameter value.

new value. You return to the Dyno Mode screen.
6-177
Purpose
Instructions
Step 1 In the display area, highlight the parameter that is in

override mode. This enables the “Disable Override”
push-button.

wait…” message displays. Then, you return to the Dyno
Mode screen.
6-178
Stopping the Test
Illustration 6-116: Logged Diagnostic Code message box
Purpose
The “Stop” push-button allows you take all parameters out of the
override mode or select the Disable option from the Dyno Mode
sub-menu.
Instructions Section
6
To stop the test and disable all overrides:
Step 1 Press the “Stop” push-button. The “Please wait…”

message displays. Then, the Logged Diagnostic Code
Step 2 Press “Yes” if you want to view the logged diagnostic

codes or “No” to return to the service tool main screen
without viewing the codes.
6-179
Engine Control System Tuning
6-180
Configuring the Parameter
Section
6
6-181
Graphing the Status Parameters
6-182
Section
6
6-183
Power Balancing Tuning
Status Parameter
Area
Instruction
Area
Configuration
Parameter Area
Illustration 6-117: Power Balancing Tuning screen
Purpose
The Power Balancing Tuning function allows you to balance the
power of two engines working together as if they were one engine.
This function provides the capability for you to balance power of an
engine package and to tune the overall control system.
Accessing
To run the Power Balancing Tuning function:
Select Service Procedures from the Service menu, and then

select Power Balancing Tuning from the sub-menu. The Power
Balancing Tuning screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-117).
Screen Layout
The Power Balancing Tuning screen has the following areas:
6-184
The Power Balancing Tuning status parameter area displays Engine
Speed, Inlet Manifold Air Pressure, Engine Load Factor, and Throttle
Position for both the master and slave engines.
Instruction Area
The Power Balancing Tuning instruction area describes briefly how
to change a parameter's value.
Configuration Parameter Area

The Power Balancing Tuning configuration parameter area allows
you to put the ECMs into automatic power balancing mode. This
area also displays and alters specific configuration parameters that
are directly related to whether the power balancing mode is in
manual or automatic.
When Automatic Power Balancing Mode is "On," you cannot modify

the Throttle Actuator Trim parameter. When Automatic Power
Balancing Mode is "Off," you cannot modify Governor Proportional
Gain, Governor Integral Gain, or Desired Inlet Manifold Air Pressure
Offset parameters.
Section
If load balancing is disabled, the slave throttle is the sum of the 6
current master throttle value and throttle trim. If load balancing is
disabled, throttle trim is ignored and the slave calculated the throttle
trim automatically. On the ECM power up, load balancing mode and
oxygen balancing always reverts to automatic configurations.
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Power Balancing Tuning screen
are:
• Submit
• Active Codes
• Print
Note: See "Displaying Active Diagnostic and Event Codes," section

1, page 9.
6-185
Configuring the Parameter
Purpose
Pressing the "Submit" push-button sends changes that have been
made to the configuration parameters to the ECM, in order to
achieve full automatic power balancing between the master and
slave engines.
When Automatic Power Balancing Mode is "On," you cannot modify

the Throttle Actuator Trim parameter. When Automatic Power
Balancing Mode is "Off," you cannot modify Governor Proportional
Gain, Governor Integral Gain, or Desired Inlet Manifold Air Pressure
Offset parameters.
Instructions
To adjust the configuration parameters:
Step 1 In the grid, click on the value relating to the parameter

you wish to change. Use the scroll bar to view more of
the configuration parameters.
Step 2 Change the value by pressing the up and down arrows

next to the text boxes, entering in the information with
the keyboard, or using the up and down arrows (↑ and ↓)
on the keyboard to increase or decrease the value by
one.
Step 3 Press “Submit” to accept the new value/s.
Note: The Instructions area guides you through the steps.
6-186
Driver Reward
Section
Illustration 6-118: Driver Reward screen 6
Purpose
The Driver Reward function provides a way to reward a driver for
good driving habits by increasing the vehicle speed limit. The ECM
compares the current driving habits of the driver to the targeted
driving habits. If the driver performs at or above the targets, the
vehicle speed limit increases.
Accessing
To run the Driver Reward function:
Note: Selecting Driver Reward from the Service menu displays

either a message box or the Driver Reward screen. This is based on
if the Driver Reward Enable parameter is enabled or disabled
(located in Configuration, see section 6, page 2). If it is disabled,
then whether the Driver Reward Enable parameter is locked or
unlocked (located in Parameter Lockout, see section 6, page 41).
6-187
If the Driver Reward Enable parameter is Enabled:
Step 1 Select Driver Reward from the Service menu. The Driver
Reward screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration 6-119).
Step 2 Make the changes to the Driver Reward screen. Press

“Send.” The Enter Customer Passwords dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Enter the first and second customer passwords in the

text boxes. Press “OK.” Please wait… is displayed. You
return to the Driver Reward screen with the changes
accepted.
If the Driver Reward Enable parameter is Disabled and Locked:
Step 1 Select Driver Reward from the Service menu. “The

Driver Reward Enable parameter is locked…” message
Illustration 6-119: The Driver Reward…locked message box
Step 2 Press “OK.” The Driver Reward screen is displayed


displayed.

text boxes. Press “OK.” Please wait…is displayed. You
accepted.
6-188
If the Driver Reward Enable parameter is Disabled and Unlocked:
Step 1 Select Driver Reward from the Service menu. “The

Driver Reward Enable parameter is disabled…”
Illustration 6-120: The Driver Reward…disabled message box
Step 2 Press “No” to keep the Driver Reward Enable parameter

disabled. The Driver Reward screen is displayed (Refer

displayed.
Step 4 Enter the first and second customer passwords in the Section
text boxes. Press “OK.” Please wait… is displayed. You 6
accepted.
OR--
Step 2 Press “Yes” to enable the Driver Reward Enable
parameter. The Enter Customer Passwords dialog box is
displayed.

text boxes. Press “OK.” The Change Parameter Value
Step 4 Select Enabled from the drop-down list. Press “OK.” The
Driver Reward screen is displayed (Refer to Illustration
6-119).

“Send.” Please wait…is displayed. You return to the
Driver Reward screen with the changes accepted.
Note: See “Entering Customer Passwords,” section 1, page 22.
6-189
Screen Layout
The Driver Reward screen has the following areas:
Driver Reward Settings Area:

The Driver Reward Settings area displays three options: Current
ECM Values, Short Haul Settings, and Long Haul Settings. The
Current ECM Values is default and displays the values currently
programmed into the ECM.
Selecting either Long Haul Settings or Short Haul Settings displays

their default settings and not the values currently in the ECM.
Bonus Information Area:

The Bonus Information area displays the edit boxes to tailor the
amount of bonus a driver receives based on his/her driving habits.
Minimum Score For Bonus This is the target for the overall
score. When a driver’s score is
equal to or better than the Minimum
Score For Bonus, the driver
receives the bonus.
Valid Range: 0 to 100 points
Maximum Bonus This is the highest bonus the driver

can receive. When the maximum
bonus is set to zero (0), no bonus is
awarded.
Valid Range: 0 to 15 MPH
Minimum Bonus The driver receives this bonus when

the overall score equals the
Minimum Score For Bonus. The
Minimum Bonus must be less than
or equal to the Maximum Bonus.
Valid Range: 0 to 10 MPH
6-190
Averaging Period This is the amount of time the ECM
uses to average the totals when
calculating the five target
information parameters.
Valid Range: 1 to 100 hours
Note: After pressing the “Send” push-button, if the number entered

in the Bonus Information area is not a valid range, an error message
displays stating the valid range. Press “OK.” You return to the edit
box of the invalid parameter.
Target Information Area:

The Target Information area displays the parameters monitored for
rewarding the driver’s performance. This area allows you to enter the
target amounts of the parameters and prioritize them. The
parameters targeted are:
Average Engine Speed The average engine RPM while a

truck is in motion.
Average Driving Speed The average MPH when cruising Section

over 50 MPH. 6
Average Accelerator Demand This parameter is an indicator of

aggressive accelerator operation.
Percent Idle Time The percent of time the engine is

idling.
Engine Shift Speed The average engine RPM when the

operator up-shifts gears above
2 MPH.
Weighting Factors allows you to place more importance on certain

driving habits. The weighting factors must be in multiples of five and
add up to 100%. The Total % text box displays the current total of
the five weighting factors.
6-191
Push-Buttons
The push-buttons available in the Driver Reward screen are:
• Send
• Get Default
• Print
Note: Pressing the “Get Default” push-button restores the settings

back to the previously stored values. In the Current ECM Values,
these are the values currently in the ECM. In the Long Haul or Short
Haul Settings, these are the values last saved in the service tool.
6-192
Making Changes in the Driver Rewards Screen
Purpose
The “Send” push-button updates the ECM with the new Bonus and
Target Information. The Current ECM Values displays the values
sent to the ECM. If you modify the Short Haul or Long Haul Settings,
a message box displays asking if you want to save the settings as a
default.
Instructions
To use the Driver Reward screen:
Step 1 Select the reward setting from the Driver Reward

Settings drop-down list.
Step 2 Enter the bonus amounts and time in the Bonus

Information text boxes.
Step 3 Enter the target information in the Target Information text

boxes. Section
6
Step 4 Click on one of the Weighting Factors text boxes, then
change the percent of weight to the target parameter by
either pressing the up and down arrows next to the text
boxes, using the up and down arrows (↑ and ↓) on the
keyboard, or typing in the percent.
The weighting factors must be in multiples of five and

add up to 100%. The Total % text box displays the
current total of the five weighting factors.
Note: Using either the up and down arrows (↑ and ↓) on the

keyboard or pressing the up and down arrows next to the text boxes,
increases or decreases the Weight Factors Percent by 5%.
Step 5 Press the “Send” push-button. If you selected Current

ECM Values in the Driver Rewards Settings drop-down,
the update is sent to the ECM.
If you selected Short Haul Settings or Long Haul

Settings in the Driver Rewards Settings drop-down, the
“You have modified…” message box is displayed.
6-193
Step 6 Press “Yes” to save the setting as the Short Haul or
Long Haul Default. You return to the Driver Reward
screen with these settings as the Current ECM Values.
Press “No” to change the Long Haul or Short Haul

Setting, however, keeping the default settings the same.
You return to the Driver Reward screen displaying the
Current ECM Values.
Press “Cancel” to exit the dialog box without any

changes made. You return to the Driver Reward screen
with no changes made.
Note: You may have to provide passwords in the Enter Customer

Passwords dialog box.
Note: Pressing the “Get Default” push-button restores the settings

back to the previously stored values. In the Current ECM Values,
these are the values currently in the ECM. In the Long Haul or Short
Haul Settings, these are the values last saved in the service tool.
6-194
Utilities Drop-Down Menu
Illustration 7-1: Utilities drop-down menu
Overview
The Utilities drop-down menu functions allow you to set different
preferences for the software and hardware connections and license
the service tool.
The functions available under the Utilities drop-down menu are:
• Preferences
• Comm Adapter II Toolkit
• License ET
Note: The Comm Adapter II Toolkit option only displays if the Comm
Adapter II is installed on the PC.
Note: For information in licensing your service tool, see "Licensing

Caterpillar Electronic Technician" in the "Caterpillar Electronic
Technician Getting Started" manual.
Illustration 7-2
Illustration 7-3
Illustration 7-4
Illustration 7-5
Illustration 7-6
Illustration 7-7
Illustration 7-8
7-1
Setting Preferences
Illustration 7-9: Settings drop down menu functions
Purpose
The Preferences dialog boxes allow you to set different preferences
for the software and hardware connections. The preferences that can
be set are the communication interface device and ports, the
languages, and non-critical messages.
The Preferences dialog box is comprised of tabs. Depending on

which tab is selected different preferences may be set. The following
tabs are available:
• Communications
• Regional
• Confirmation
Instructions
To run the Preferences dialog box:
Select Preferences… from the Utilities menu. The Preferences

7-2
Setting Communication Preferences
Illustration 7-10: Preferences dialog box with the Communications tab

displayed
Purpose
The Communications tab in the Preferences dialog box allows you to
set the communication interface device and ports necessary to run
the service tool.
Note: The Communications dialog box is dependent on the

Communication Interface Device you select.
Instructions
To set the communication preferences:
Step 1 Select the Communications tab in the Preferences dialog

box. The Communications window displays in front
Step 2 To select the communication interface device that you

are using to communicate with the service tool, select
the appropriate option from the drop-down list. The
option that you choose and the device you connect to
must match.
7-3
Step 3 To select the communication (COM) port that you are
connected to, check the COM 1, COM 2, COM 3, or
COM 4 radio button under the Ports section. The COM
port radio button that you select must be the same as
the COM port connection on the back of your PC.
Step 4 Press the “Advanced…” push-button to set more

advanced communication settings. The Advanced
Communication Settings dialog box is displayed (Refer
Note: The Advanced Communications Settings dialog box is

dependent on the Communication Interface Device you select.
Illustration 7-11: Advanced Communication Settings dialog box
Step 5 Press the radio button for desired baud rate option in the
Advanced Communication Settings dialog box. There
are hints available to help you choose your settings.
Checking the Data Link Check Option provides a menu

item under the Data Link drop-down for changes
between CDL and ATA. This option should only be
checked when servicing products requiring both CDL
and ATA.
Press “OK” to accept the changes. Press “Cancel” to exit

the Advanced Communication Settings without saving
the changes. Press “Help” to open online help for
7-4
assistance. You return to the Communications tab dialog
box.
Step 6 Press “OK” to accept the changes that you made in the
Communications tab. Press “Cancel” to exit this tab
without saving the changes. Press “Help” to open online
help for assistance. You return to the last active screen.
Illustration 7-12:
Illustration 7-13
7-5
Setting Regional Preferences
Illustration 7-14: Preferences dialog box with the Regional tab displayed
Purpose
The Regional tab in the Preferences dialog box allows you to set the
current language used in the service tool.
Instructions
To set the current language:
Step 1 Select the Regional tab in the Preferences dialog box.

The Regional window displays in front (Refer to
Illustration 7-14). The languages installed with the
service tool are displayed in the Set Current Language
dialog box.
Note: If the language you want is not listed, you must re-run the
Install CD-ROM. Select the “Custom” push-button in the Select
Install Option screen to add a language.
Step 2 Select the language radio button of your choice. Press

“OK.” The Changing Language message box is
displayed (Refer to Illustration 7-15). Press “OK.”
7-6
Illustration 7-15: Changing Language message box
Push “Cancel” to exit this tab without saving the

changes. Press “Help” to open online help for
assistance. You return to the last active screen.
Step 3 Press the “International…” push-button, displaying the

Regional Settings Properties dialog box, to make
international PC adjustments. The standard Microsoft
Windows International dialog box is displayed. See the
Microsoft guide for help with this dialog box.
Note: The Number tab in the Regional Settings Properties dialog box
is where you change the Measurement system between U.S. and
Metric.
7-7
Setting Confirmation Preferences
Illustration 7-16: Preferences dialog box with the Confirmation tab displayed
Purpose
The Confirmation tab in the Preferences dialog box allows you to
enable or disable the service tool's confirmation messages. These
are non-critical messages used to confirm your actions.
Instructions
To enable or disable confirmation messages:
Step 1 Select the Confirmation tab in the Preferences dialog

box. The Confirmation window is displayed on top (Refer
to Illustration 7-16). The different confirmation messages
are displayed in the Confirm On dialog box.
Step 2 To enable a message, check the check box next to the

message of your choice. The checked messages appear
in the service tool when a confirmation is required. To
disable a message, uncheck the check box next to the
message of your choice. The unchecked messages no
longer appear in the service tool.
Press “Default” to enable all the service tool messages.
Step 3 Press “OK” to accept the changes that you made in the
Confirmation tab. Press “Cancel” to exit this tab without
7-8
saving the changes. Press “Help” to open online help for
assistance. You return to the last active screen.
7-9
7-10
Help Drop-Down Menu
Illustration 8-1: Help drop-down menu
Overview
The Help drop-down menu functions allow you to access the online
help file and information about the service tool.
The functions available under the Help drop-down menu are:
• Contents
• Using Help
• Trainer
• What's New
• About Electronic Technician
Contents
The Help Contents function allows you to access the online help file.
Using Help
The Using Help function allows you to get information in using online
help.
What's New
What's New allows you to view a list of new functions and
enhancement available in the installed version of the service tool.
8-1
Trainer
Illustration 8-2: Trainer menu functions
Purpose
The Trainer allows you to run the service tool in a training mode.
This lets you become familiar with the service tool without an
Electronic Control Module (ECM) or Communications Adapter. There
is no charge for Trainer, and authorization is not required.
Trainer simulates some features for the 777C Off Highway Truck, the
3406E Truck Engine, the 950G Medium Wheel Loader Transmission,
and the 9C Industrial Engine.
Instructions
To use Trainer:
Step 1 Select Caterpillar ET from the Programs menu, and then

select Electronic Technician from the sub-menu. The
Connection message box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 8-3).
8-2
Illustration 8-3: Connection message box
Step 2 Press the "Stop Connect" push-button. The service tool

main screen is displayed.
Step 3 Select Trainer from the Help menu, and then select
Enable from the sub-menu or push the Enable Trainer
icon from the toolbar (if default is set). The Trainer dialog
Illustration 8-4: Trainer dialog box
Step 4 Select a product from the Application drop-down list.
8-3
Note: The last product simulated is the default application and
displays in the Application drop-down list the next time Trainer is
used.
Step 5 Press "OK.” The Connection message box is displayed.

Then, the ECM Summary screen displays in the trainer
mode (Refer to Illustration 9-5). Trainer simulates some
of the service tool functions.
Press “Cancel” to exit Trainer. You return to the service

tool main screen.
"Trainer Active"
displays on the
Title Bar
Illustration 8-5: Trainer screen
Note: When you are in trainer mode, "Trainer Active" displays on the
Title Bar.
To change the product simulated within Trainer:
Step 1 Select Trainer from the Help menu, and then select
Properties from the sub-menu. The Trainer dialog box is
Step 2 Select a different product from the Application

drop-down list.
8-4
Step 3 Press "OK.” The Connection message box is displayed.
Then the new product is displayed.
To exit Trainer:
Select Trainer from the Help menu, and then select Disable from
the sub-menu, or push the Disable Trainer icon from the toolbar (if
default is set).
8-5
About Electronic Technician
Illustration 8-6: About Electronic Technician message box
Purpose
The About Electronic Technician message box provides you with the
following information:
• Program Name
• Version Number
• Serial Number
• Subscription
• Copyright Information
Instructions
To view the About Electronic Technician message box:
Step 1 Select About Electronic Technician from the Help menu.

The About Electronic Technician message box is
Step 2 Push “OK” when finished viewing the About Electronic

Technician message box.
8-6
Navigation Shortcuts
Mouse/Keyboard Shortcuts
The mouse can accomplish a variety of functions. Sometimes,
however, the keyboard can be used in conjunction with the mouse to
perform advanced operations.
Clicking the mouse, combined with pressing the control, shift, page
down, or page up keys, can be used in a variety of ways to select a
group of files in (or any other list box) that are not immediately below
or above each other.
The Mouse: used to select the first and last files.
Control Key: highlights one file at a time.
Shift Key: highlights groups of files at one time.
Page Down Key: highlights all files below the first file.
Page Up Key: highlights all files above the first file.
Mouse and Keyboard

Desired Result Necessary Action
Select all files between two Click on the first file. Hold down the
files: Shift key and click on the last file.
Select all files below or above a Click on the first file. Hold down
file: Shift and press the Page Down or
Page Up.
Select a group and then Click on the first file. Hold down Section
individual files: Shift. Press Page Down or Page Up 9
to select a group. Release Shift.
Holding down Control, click on
single files.
Select individual files that are Click on the first file.Hold down the
not next to each other: Control button and click any other
files that you desire.
9-1
Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard Shortcuts give you the power to maneuver through service
tool applications solely using the keyboard. The shortcuts include
using Alt, Tab, Shift, Ctrl (Control), Enter, the space bar, multiple
letters and arrow keys (separately and combined with each other) to
accomplish an action.
Alt Key + Letter

Holding down the Alt key and pressing a letter allows you to navigate
drop-down menus. For example, pressing “F,” while holding down
the Alt key, opens the File Menu. While this menu is open, pressing
the underlined letters in that menu performs the related tasks. In this
case, pressing “N” would prompt the New File box (see Letters).
Tab Key
The Tab key moves the cursor between option buttons (“OK,”
“Cancel,” “Print,” etc.). A button that can be activated by pressing
enter is highlighted (marked with black dashes around the border).
Using the Tab and Shift Keys at the same time reverses the tab
border. On different screens, you can use the Tab button to move
from one area to another. This is called “tab ability.”
Arrow Keys
The arrow keys have many uses. The first function of the keys is to
move between and through the menus after holding down the Alt key
and pressing a letter (see the example given under Alt Key + Letter).
The arrow keys and Enter key can be used instead of pressing the
letter of the corresponding function.
The second use of the arrow keys is similar to that of the Tab key
because the arrows can be used to move between option buttons.
The up and right arrows move the cursor down the option buttons,
and the down and left arrows move the cursor up the option buttons.
The third function of the arrow keys is to scroll through lists. In some
screens, you must highlight the “OK” button with the Tab key before
using the arrows to scroll the list. In others, you must use the tab key
to get into the box with the list before using the arrows.
Letters
Not all buttons have tab ability. If you enter a screen where the Tab
key does not highlight a button, the underlined letter on the button
can be pressed on the keyboard to perform that function. For
example, the buttons in the Status Screen do not have tab ability.
9-2
Therefore, to return to the Groups screen, press G, or, to Zoom In or
Zoom Out, press Z.
Keyboard Only
Desired Result Necessary Action
Activate a menu bar: Press ALT.
Cancel the dialog box: Press Esc (Escape).
Carry out a function: Press Enter or the space bar.
Choose a menu function: Press the underlined letter in the
function name or use the Arrow key to
scroll down the menu. When the
action is highlighted, press Enter.
Move between buttons, dialog Press Tab (Tab + Shift reverses tab
boxes, menu commands, or order), Arrow Keys, or underlined
items in a list: letters.
Open a menu: Press ALT plus the underlined letter
in the menu name.
Select individual files: Highlight the first file with the arrow
keys. Holding down the Control Key
and use the arrow key to find the next
file you want to highlight. When you
have reached this file, press the
space bar. Continue to do this until
you have all desired individual files
selected.
Select a group and then Use an Arrow key to find the first file
individual files: you want to highlight. Holding down
Shift, use an Arrow key to highlight
files, release Shift. Then hold down
Section
Control, use an Arrow key to highlight
9
an individual file, and press Space
Bar. Continue using the Arrow keys to
find files you desire and pressing the
Space Bar to select them until all
desired files are selected.
Select a group of files one at Highlight the first or last file with an
a time: Arrow key. Hold down the Shift key
and use the up or down Arrow keys to
select the group of files you desire.
9-3
Select a group of files at Use an Arrow key to find the first file.
once: Holding down Control, use the Arrow
key to find the last file you desire and
then hold down Shift. Press the Page
Up Arrow key.
Select all files at one time: Highlight the first file with the arrow
keys. Hold down the Control and Shift
keys and then press the End key.
*Note: The Tab key must be used to get into the correct box before
any of these actions can be completed. Press Enter after you select
all desired files.
9-4
Comma Separated Value
Purpose
Data Log Viewer allows you to export the *sdf file as a Comma
Separated Value *.txt file that can be imported into other applications
(For example Excel or Lotus 123).
Note: If the service tool is unable to read the data, “Unavailable” is

inserted into the *.txt file.
Instructions
To view the data in an Excel spreadsheet:
Step 1 Open the Excel program.
Illustration 9-1: File drop-down menu from Excel
Step 2 Select Open from the File menu (Refer to Illustration

9-1). The Open dialog box is displayed (Refer to
Illustration 9-2).
Section
9
9-5
Illustration 9-2: Open dialog box illustrating step 3
Step 3 Select All Files (*.*) from the Files of type drop-down.
Step 4 Locate the data file from the Look in drop-down. The
path is shown in the File text box of the Data Log Viewer
screen to assist you in finding this file.
9-6
Step 5 Double-click on the file. The Text Import Wizard is

Section
9
Illustration 9-5: Text Import Wizard dialog box illustrating Step 6
Step 6 Select the Delimited radio button and press "Next>."
9-7
Illustration 9-6: Text Import Wizard dialog box illustrating Step 7
Step 7 Check Comma from the Delimiters area, making sure no

other delimiter is checked.
Step 8 Press "Finish." The data displays in an Excel spread

sheet for viewing (Refer to Illustration 9-7).
9-8
Illustration 9-7: Excel spread sheet with the Data Log file imported
Step 9 To make the column width fit the data, double-click the
boundary to the right of the column heading The data is
ready for your viewing.
Section
9
9-9
Glossary of Terms
ATA
The abbreviation for American Trucking Association. An ATA Data
Link connection is a type of two wine electrical connection based
upon standards set by the American Trucking Association and SAE
Standards (J1587 and J1708).
Calibration
An electronic adjustment of a sensor signal. For example,
calibrations correct small output differences between the
atmospheric and boost sensors. The boost sensor output is
corrected by the ECM to equal atmospheric sensor output after
calibration.
Caterpillar Electronic Technician (Cat ET)

A diagnostic tool software program for a personal computer (PC).
Designed to replace the ECAP service tool.
CAT Data Link (CDL)

An electrical connection for communication with onboard
microprocessor based devices that use the Data Link such as ECM,
CMS, VIMS, electronic transmissions, electronic dashboards, and
service tools such as Cat ET. The CAT Data Link is also the
communication medium used for programming and troubleshooting
with Caterpillar service tools.
Cat ET
The acronym for Caterpillar Electronic Technician software.
Cell Tip
Allow you to view text when it is not visible due to the size of the
column in a grid. Cell Tip displays when the mouse pointer is held
over a cell for about half a second.
Check Box
A square box accompanied by descriptive text. Clicking the box puts
an “✓ ” in it. Clicking a previously checked box removes the “✓ .”
9-10
Customer Passwords
A password that you assign used for protection in certain functions in
the service tool. The Customer Password cannot be more than eight
characters long.
Diagnostic Code
A code that describes a problem in a system.
Dialog Box
A fixed size moveable window in which a user may review or
maintain information needed by the application.
Drop-Down List Box

A field box with an arrow displayed to the right of the box. Pressing
the arrow displays an expanded list of values below the field box. If
there are more values than can be displayed in the drop-down list
box, a scroll bar appears to the right of the list. Selecting a value
from the list places it in the single value field box and close the
expanded list.
Drop-Down Menu
An expanded list of options displayed when one of the menus above
the toolbar is selected in the service tool.
Electronic Control Module (ECM)

The electronic engine control that provides power to EUI electronics
and injectors, monitors EUI inputs, and acts as a governor to control
engine speed.
Electronic Unit Injector

A fuel system in which the injection pump is a mechanically actuated, Section
electronically controlled unit injector which combines the pumping, 9
electronic fuel metering, and injecting elements in a single unit.
Event
An out of range condition where a measured factor, such as engine
speed or oil pressure, is so excessively above or below limits that
engine damage is likely. Events are logged by the ECM.
9-11
Field Box
A box that has a value in it that corresponds to the title on the left of
the box.
Group Box
A group or related radio buttons, edit fields, or drop-down boxes
surrounded by a frame.
Histogram
A bar graph representation of time distribution, where the area of
each bar is proportional at the time represented.
Icon
A small graphic used to represent an executable program. The
Electronic Technician software program icon appears in the service
tool group box in the Windows Program Manager screen.
List Box
A rectangular box with scroll bars containing a scrollable list of items.
Some list boxes permit single item selection. Accomplished by
clicking the desired entry, or highlighting the entry and pressing
enter. Others permit multiple item selection, accomplished by clicking
each desired entry or highlighting each entry and pressing enter. To
de-select a selected entry, simply click or highlight the entry again
and press enter.
Parameter
A programmable value that determines the characteristics or
behavior of the engine and/or machine electrical system.
9-12
Personality Module
The small module inserted into the ECM that contains all of the
performance maps and instructions (software) for the ECM in a
specific engine application.
Push-Button
A round-cornered rectangle containing text that describes the action
the button performs. “OK’ and “Cancel” are common push-buttons
found on many dialog boxes.
Radio Button
A grouping of circular buttons, only one of which may be selected at
a given time.
Text Box
A box that allows the user to type information into the application. It
follows a title, which tells you what information needs to be entered.
Toolbar
A row of icons that are lined up along the top of the service tool
Screen (under the menus), symbolizing different functions in the
service tool program. The toolbar provides the user with a quicker
way to enter the service tool functions.
Section
9
9-13
9-14
Index
rd
3 Implement Valve Manual Calibration, 6-156
A
About Electronic Technician, 8-6
Active Diagnostic Codes, 4-2
Active Event Codes, 4-146
Articulation Position Calibration, 6-82
Articulation Sensor Calibration, 6-84
Attachment Valves Pressure Test, 4-143
Auto Retarder Test, 4-8
Automatic Governor Actuator Calibration, 6-88
B
Blade Control Calibration, 6-156
Blade Solenoid Calibration, 6-156
Boost Calibration, 6-136
Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibration, 6-157
Brake Touch-up Pressure Calibrations (Manual), 6-157
C
Calibration Status, 6-78
Calibrations, 6-80
Close File, 2-6
Comma Separated Value, 9-5
Communication Preferences, 7-3
Compression Brake Solenoid Test, 4-12
Configuration, 6-2
Confirmation Preferences, 7-8
Connecting to the Service Tool, 2-32
Conversion, 7-7
Copy a Document, 2-23 Section
Copy Configuration, 6-8 10
Counters, 4-159
Crankcase Pressure Calibration, 6-92
Critical Events
ATA, 4-153
Current Totals, 5-15
Custom Data, 5-149
Defining Custom Reports, 5-151
10-1
Customer Passwords, 1-22
Customizing
Function Keys, 3-6
Toolbar, 3-3
Cylinder Cutout
3500 EUI, 4-41
EUI, 4-32
Cylinder Cutout Test
797 Tandem Engine, 4-50
CAT Data Link, 4-17
Cylinder Cutout Test: 3126 HEUI, 4-23
D
Data Link
Switch to CDL, 7-4
Swtich to ATA, 7-4
Data Log, 5-24
Data Log Recorder, 5-25
Changing the Default File, 5-34
Setting up Data Log Recorder, 5-30
Data Log Viewer
Setting up the Graph, 1-17
Data Log Viewer, 1-11
Selecting Parameters, 1-14
Date, 6-74
Delete a Document, 2-24
Delete a File, 2-12
Diagnostic Tests, 4-7
Diagnostics, 4-1
Disconnecting from the Service Tool, 2-33
Doc Operations, 2-9
Copy, 2-23
Delete, 2-24
Edit Description, 2-27
Export, 2-28
Import, 2-30
Move, 2-25
Open, 2-18
Print, 2-22
Rename, 2-26
Driver Reset, 5-153
Driver Reward, 6-187
Dyno Mode, 6-173
10-2
E
ECM Date/Time, 6-74
ECM Replacement, 6-11
ECM Summary, 5-13
Edit Document Description, 2-27
End Line Relief Test, 4-57
Engine Cooling Fan Calibration, 6-157
Engine Speed Test, 4-63
Events, 4-145
Exiting Caterpillar Electronic Technician, 2-37
Export a Document, 2-28
Export to File, 2-14
Extended Service Coverage Calibration, 6-106
F
F1 Type Valve Flow Command Test, 4-143
File, 2-1
Close, 2-6
Exit, 2-37
File Management, 2-7
New File, 2-3
Opening, 2-4
Print Setup, 2-35
File Management, 2-7
Doc Operations, 2-9
File Operations, 2-8
File Operations, 2-8
Delete, 2-12
Export, 2-14
Import, 2-16
New File, 2-10
Open, 2-11
Rename, 2-13
Fleet Configuration, 6-17
Fleet/Key Configuration, 6-24
FNR Shifter Sensor Calibration, 6-158 Section
Function Keys, 3-6 10
G
General Information, 5-37
Creating a New Sea Trial General Information Report, 5-40
Editing an Existing Sea Trial General Information Report, 5-43
Printing the Report, 5-48
10-3
Saving the Sea Trial General Information Report, 5-47
Glossary of Terms, 9-10
H
Help, 8-1
Histogram
Event Histogram, 4-151
Job Histogram, 5-143
Trip Histogram, 5-143
History Functions, 5-18
Hitch Sensors Calibration, 6-107
Hitch Valve Calibration, 6-110
I
Impeller Clutch Solenoid Calibration, 6-158
Implement Control Lever Calibrations, 6-158
Implement Hydraulic Service Mode, 4-67
Implement Solenoid Calibration, 6-158
Implement Valve Solenoid Calibration, 6-159
Implement Valve Solenoid Manual Calibration, 6-159
Import a Document, 2-30
Import from File, 2-16
Inching Pedal Calibration, 6-159
Information, 5-1
Injection Actuation Pressure Test, 4-71
Injector Codes Calibration, 6-112
Injector Solenoid Test (ATA), 4-77
Injector Solenoid Test (CAT Data Link), 4-83
Input Troubleshooting, 4-163
J
Job Histogram, 5-143
Job Reset, 5-153
Job Segment, 5-140
Driver, 5-141
Fleet, 5-141
Joystick Calibration, 6-159
L
Left Brake Pedal Calibration, 6-159
Lever Calibration, 6-159
Lift Cylinder Position Sensors Calibration, 6-159
Lift Linkage Sensor Calibration, 6-159
10-4
Lift/Tilt Sensors Calibration, 6-159
Linkage Sensor Calibration, 6-160
Lockup Clutch Engagement Calibration, 6-160
Logged Diagnostic Codes, 4-4
Logged Event Codes, 4-148
M
Machine Security System Uninstall, 6-52
Main and Tilt Pump Calibrations, 6-115
Main Implement Relief Test, 4-88
Main Implement Variable Pump Calibration, 6-160
Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure Test, 4-143
Main/Tilt Pump Pressure Sensors Calibrations, 6-124
Main/Tilt Pump Relief Diagnostic Test, 4-93
Maintain Graph Sets, 5-106
Maintain Groups, 5-8
Maintenance Indicator, 6-71
Measurement System, 7-7
Metric Units, 7-7
Misfire Detection, 4-99
Modulation Input Calibration, 6-160
Monitor Throttle Position Sensor Calibration, 6-132
Monitor Throttle Sensor Calibration, 6-132
Monitoring System, 6-33
Monitoring System (with Parameter Security), 6-37
Move a Document, 2-25
N
Navigation Shortcuts, 9-1
Negative Flow Control Stabilizer Pressure Test, 4-143
Neutralization Setpoint Adjustment Calibration, 6-161
Neutralization Setpoint Calibration, 6-160
New File, 2-3, 2-10
NFC Pressure Reducer Pressure Test, 4-143
NRC Pressure Sensors Calibration, 6-161
O Section
10
Open Document, 2-18
Open File, 2-4, 2-11
Operator Settings, 6-57
Override Parameters Test, 4-105
Oxygen Sensor Calibration, 6-161
10-5
P
Parameter Change History, 5-21
Parameter Lockout, 6-41
Passwords
Customer, 1-24
Pedal/Lever Calibration, 6-161
Pitch Sensor Calibration, 6-161
Power Balancing Tuning, 6-184
Power Shift Pressure Solenoid Calibration, 6-134
Power Shift Pressure Test, 4-110
Preferences, 7-2
Communication, 7-3
Confirmation, 7-8
Regional, 7-6
Pressure Sensor Calibration, 6-136
Print a Document, 2-22
Print Setup, 2-35
Printing, 1-27
Print Preview, 1-31
Print to File, 1-29
Print to Printer, 1-31
Prognostics Download, 5-134
Changing the Default File, 5-137
Downloading a File, 5-139
Proportional Reducing Valve Calibration, 6-138
PRV-Attachment Valves Pressure Calibration, 6-162
PRV-F1 Type Valve Flow Command Pressure Calibration, 6-162
PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Calibration-Flow Meter Method, 6-162
PRV-Main Pump Flow Limitation Pressure Calibration, 6-163
PRV-Negative Flow Control Stabilizer Pressure Calibration, 6-164
PRV-NFC Reducer Pressure Calibration, 6-164
PRV-Powershift Pressure Calibration, 6-164
R
Rack Sensor Calibration, 6-143
Rating History, 5-19
Real Time Graphing, 5-101
Setting up the Graph, 5-110
Rear Hitch Control Lever Sensor Calibration, 6-165
Rear Hitch Height Sensor Calibration, 6-165
Rear Hitch Solenoid Calibrations, 6-165
Regional Preferences, 7-6
Rename a Document, 2-26
10-6
Rename a File, 2-13
Reset VIDS Event List, 4-162
Retarder Performance Calibration, 6-166
Ripper Control Levers Calibration, 6-166
Ripper Position Calibration, 6-145
Ripper Solenoid Calibration, 6-166
S
Sea Trial, 5-36
Deleting a Capture, 5-86
Sea Trial General Information, 5-37
Creating a New Sea Trial General Information Report, 5-40
Editing an Existing Sea Trial General Information Report, 5-43
Printing the Report, 5-48
Saving the Sea Trial General Information Report, 5-47
Sea Trial Steady State
Deleting a Capture, 5-86
Sea Trial Steady State Recorder, 5-79
Sea Trial Transient Data Log Recorder, 5-90
Security Management, 6-45
Select Snapshot Chart Items, 5-131
Selecting a Graph
To Change a Set, 5-108
To Create a New Set, 5-105
To Create a New Set/Multiple ECMs, 5-106
To Delete a Set, 5-108
Selecting a Graph Set, 5-104
Selecting a Group, 5-5
To Change a Group, 5-9
To Create a New Group/Multiple ECMs, 5-8
To Create a New Group/One ECM, 5-6
To Delete a Group, 5-10
To Select a Group, 5-5
Selecting the ECM, 2-34
Service, 6-1
Service Procedure, 6-172
Shift Count Matrix, 4-156 Section
Shortcuts, 9-1 10
Keyboard Shortcuts, 9-1
Mouse Shortcuts, 9-1
Snapshot Recorder, 5-114
Snapshot Viewer, 5-120
Selecting Snapshot Chart Items, 5-131
Snapshot Viewer Data, 5-121
Special Tests, 4-114
10-7
Status, 5-2
Steady State, 5-49
Steerable Hitch Center Calibration, 6-166
Steering Clutch/Brake Pressure Calibration, 6-167
System Troubleshooting Settings, 4-119
T
Throttle Calibration, 6-147
Tilt Linkage Sensor Calibration, 6-167
Time, 6-74
Timing Calibration:
3176B/3406E/3500/C-10/C-12/3116 HEUI/3126, 6-152
Timing Calibration: 3406B/3406C, 6-150
Timing Calibration: EIS, 6-154
Tool Configuration, 6-62
Tool Configuration screen, 6-67
Tool List screen, 6-63
Tool List, 6-63
Toolbar, 3-2, 3-3
Torque Converter Pedal Calibration, 6-167
Traction Aid Brake Test, 4-123
Trainer, 8-2
Transmission Clutch Engagement Pressure Calibration, 6-167
Transmission Fill Calibration, 6-168
Transmission Stall Test, 4-130
Trip Histogram, 5-143
Trip Reset, 5-153
Trip Segment, 5-140
Current (Field), 5-141
Driver, 5-141
Fleet, 5-141
Job, 5-141
Lifetime, 5-141
Previous, 5-141
Rolling, 5-141
Trip, 5-141
U
U.S. Units, 7-7
Units, 7-7
Utilities, 7-1
V
Valve Calibration, 6-168
10-8
Variable Relief Pressure Calibration, 6-168
Variable Relief Valve Pressure Test, 4-143
View, 3-1
Section
10
10-9
10-10

Manual ET2001A

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual ET2001A

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Caterpillar

IMPORTANT: THE MEDIA CONTAINING CATERPILLAR

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO LICENSE: The PROGRAM

You may not:

RESTRICTED PROGRAM FUNCTIONS: Certain functions of the

LIMITED WARRANTIES: CATERPILLAR warrants that it is the sole

EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTIES DESCRIBED ABOVE,

YOU ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION OF THIS

LIMITATION ON LIABILITY: In no event will CATERPILLAR be

TERM: This Agreement is effective until terminated as hereinafter

GENERAL: This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS

INQUIRIES: Should you have any questions concerning this

About Caterpillar Electronic Technician Section

• Display, graph, and record logs of parameter status

For some subscriptions of Caterpillar Electronic Technician,

Caterpillar Electronic Technician is designed to communicate with

About Caterpillar Electronic Technician Documentation

Illustration 1-1: Caterpillar Electronic Technician main screen

Title bar The bar at the across the top of the

Minimize button Located in the upper right corner of the

Maximize button Located in the upper right corner of the

Restore button Located in the upper right corner of the Section

Close button Located in the upper right corner of the

Menu bar Located under the title bar, this area

Toolbar Located under the menu bar, this area

Function screen Located below the toolbar, this area

Status bar Located at the bottom, the service tool

Illustration 1-2: Caterpillar Electronic Technician Menu Items

Illustration 1-4: Caterpillar Electronic Technician Toolbar in default

The icons available are:

Active Diagnostic Codes

Logged Diagnostic Codes

Logged Event Codes

Exit the application

Like many other computer applications, Caterpillar Electronic

The common service tool functions are:

Illustration 1-5: Active Codes dialog box

On the title bar, a "push-pin" icon is displayed before the Active

When the push-pin appears "pushed in," the

The description of each code helps distinguish each code. The

Step 1 Press the "Active Codes" push-button. The Active Codes

Note: Pressing the "Hide Events" push-button removes the active

Step 2 Press "Close." You return to the selected service tool

Illustration 1-6: Data Log Viewer screen

Note: For an explanation of how to export a Comma Separated

To maneuver through the screen:

Tracing Point Area

Note: See "Exporting a File," section 1, page 20.

Illustration 1-7: Select Parameters dialog box

The Selected Parameters dialog box displays the comments entered

Step 1 Press the "Parameters" push-button from the Data Log

Illustration 1-8: Select an SDF file dialog box

Select a file and press "Open." You return to the Select

Step 3 Highlight a parameter in the Available Parameters list

When finished, you can select a different file from the

Note: If you want to select parameters from another file for

Step 4 Press "OK" to accept the selected file/s and their

Press "Cancel" if you want to leave the Select

Illustration 1-9: Data Log Settings dialog box

Note: If a parameter’s range cannot be changed, the value is

Step 1 Press the "Settings…" push-button from the Data Log

Step 2 Depending on the value you select to change, enter the

The X-Axis Range settings display on the graph the